GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC NASHIK · 20.2 6553 CSP Control System and PLC 178 ... Communication and...

GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC NASHIK

(AN ACADEMICALLY AUTONOMOUS INSTITUTE OF GOVT. OF MAHARASHTRA)

CURRICULUM - 2016

DIPLOMA PROGRAMME IN

ELECTRONICS & TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

-INDEX-

Sr. No. Content Page No.

1 Preface i

2 Government Polytechnic Nashik iii

2.1 Vision iii

2.2 Mission iii

3 Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering Department

iii

3.1 Vision iii

3.2 Mission iii

4 Job Profile of Diploma Engineer in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering.

iv

5 Rationale v

6 Programme Educational Objectives v

7 Programme Outcomes v

8 Programme Specific Outcomes vi

9 Mapping of Mission and Programme Educational Objectives vii

10 Mapping of Programme Educational Objectives and Programme Outcomes

vii

11 Mapping of Programme Specific Outcomes and Programme Outcomes vii

12 Mapping of Programme Outcome and Courses viii

13 Programme Structure 1-6

14 Courses For Award of Class 7

15 Sample Path Entry Level 10+ 8

Course Contents of

16 LEVEL -1: FOUNDATION COURSES 9-68

COURSE CODE COURSE NAME

16.1 6101 CMS Communication Skills 9

16.2 6102 DLS Development of Life Skills 14

16.3 6103 BMT Basic Mathematics 18

16.4 6104 EMT Engineering Mathematics 22

16.5 6105 PHY Applied Physics 26

16.6 6106 CHY Applied Chemistry 34

16.7 6107 EGR Engineering Graphics 40

16.8 6113 FET Fundamentals of Electrical Technology 43

16.9 6114 EWP Electronic Workshop Practice 48

16.10 6115 COA Computer Applications 52

16.11 6116 EMC Electronic Material and Components 56

16.12 6127 EWS Engineering Workshop Practice 62


17 LEVEL -2: BASIC TECHNOLOGY COURSES 69-110


17.1 6244 BTX Basic Electronics 69

17.2 6245 EMN Electronic Measurement and Instruments 74

17.3 6246 INI Industrial Instrumentation 80

17.4 6247 DEX Digital Electronics 85

17.5 6248 LIC Linear Integrated Circuits 90

17.6 6249 ACO Analog Communication 97

17.7 6250 IEA Industrial Electronics and Applications 102

17.8 6251 CPG C Programming 107

18 LEVEL -3: ALLIED COURSES 111-138


18.1 6301 AMT Applied Mathematics 111

18.2 6302 EVS Environmental Studies 115

18.3 6303 IOM Industrial Organization and Management 119

18.4 6305 SSL Supervisory Skills 123

18.5 6306 MKM Marketing Management 127

18.6 6309 EDP Entrepreneurship Development 131

18.7 6310 RES Renewable Energy Sources 135

19 LEVEL -4: APPLIED TECHNOLOGY COURSES 139-172


19.1 6410 PPR Professional Practices 139

19.2 6411 SEM Seminar 142

19.3 6412 PRO Project 145

19.4 6441 AET Applied Electronics 149

19.5 6442 AVE Audio Video Engineering 155

19.6 6443 DCO Digital Communication 160

19.7 6444 ACS Advance Communication Systems 165

19.8 6445 NTT .NET Technology 170

20 LEVEL -5: DIVERSIFIED COURSES 173-230


20.1 6552 MIC Micro Controller-8051 173

20.2 6553 CSP Control System and PLC 178

20.3 6554 CHN Computer Hardware and Networking 183

20.4 6555 DCM Data Communication and Networking 187

20.5 6556 AMC Advanced Microcontrollers 191

20.6 6557 PCS Process Control and SCADA System 195

20.7 6558 MCM Mobile Communication 200


20.8 6559 EMS Embedded System 205

20.9 6560 MCS Mechatronics: Components and Systems 210

20.10 6561 AMW Antenna and Microwaves 216

20.11 6562 VLT VLSI Techniques 221

20.12 6563 IAM Industrial Automation 226

21 Annexures 231-240

I Rules for Registration and Examination 231

II Evaluation Scheme for project 233

III Committees 234

III.1 Governing Body (GB) 234

III.2 Board of Studies (BOS) 235

III.3 Programme Wise Committee (PWC) 237

III.4 Programme Curriculum Development Committee 238

- Institute Level Curriculum Development Cell 238

- Department Level Committee 238

- NITTTR Committee 238

- Contributors to Course Curriculum Development 239

i

PREFACE

Government Polytechnic, Nashik is established in 1980. The institute has been conferred an

academically autonomous status in 1995 by Government of Maharashtra because of excellent

performance.

The vision of the institute is to be a premier technical training and development institute

catering to the skill and professional development in multi-domain for successful employment / self-

employment by offering certified and accredited NSQF compliant programmes. The institute shall be

the center for excellence in skill development and community development through different training

programmes, business incubation and entrepreneurship development. For this the institute is

committed to provide education for skill development, engineering diploma and continuing education

programmes for enhancement of employability skills of the aspirants in the job/self-employment

through continually developing quality learning systems. The institute aims at holistic and student

centric education in collaboration with business, industry and having practice based education. To

achieve this continuous efforts are made to design the curriculum considering the latest development

in the industrial sector and technology.

The three year Diploma Programme in Electronics & Telecommunication Engineering is being

offered since 2002. First curriculum was implemented in 2002 under academic autonomy and

subsequently it was revised and implemented in 2007, 2011. The curriculum revision is a regular

activity and outcome based education approach is adopted for designing the curriculum. The revised

outcome based curriculum is designated as “Curriculum 2016”. The implementation of Curriculum

2016 will be effective from the academic year 2016- 17.

For designing the curriculum, the various domains have been identified in Electronics &

Telecommunication Engineering Programme. These domains are Consumer Electronics,

Telecommunication, Industrial Automation, Industrial/Power Electronics, Medical Electronics,

Mechatronics, Computer System and Peripherals, Service and Repair. The questionnaire has been

designed to get the responses from these domains. The feedback of different stake holders i.e.

industries, teachers and students has been analysed. Further, the roles, functions, activities, tasks

and attitudes necessary for Diploma Electronics and Telecommunication Engineer have been

identified. The programme structure is finalised and the content detailing of individual course has

been carried out by group of experts, and approved by Programme Wise Committee (PWC), Board of

Studies (BOS) and Governing Body (GB).

In this Curriculum-2016, the student has to acquire 200 credits for successful completion of

Diploma Programme. The courses of curriculum are structured at different 5 levels i.e. Foundation

Courses, Basic Technology Courses, Allied Courses, Applied Technology Courses and Diversified

Courses.

ii

The minimum entry level is 10th. However, the curriculum provides “Multi Point Entry and

Credit system (MPEC)” for the students opting admission after passing 12th, ITI, MCVC. At higher

entry level, the students will get exemptions in certain courses as per the rules.

There is flexibility to opt the courses as per the choice of students. The curriculum provides

“Sample Path” as a guide line for selection of courses in each term for entry level as 10th. The List of

Courses for Award of Class after completion of Diploma Programme is prescribed separately in this

curriculum.

The fulfilment of programme outcome as stated in the Curriculum-2016 will depend on its

effective implementation. The teachers who are implementing the curriculum were also involved in

the design process of curriculum, hence, I hope that the Curriculum-2016 will be implemented in

effective way and the passouts will acquire the requisite knowledge and skills to satisfy the industrial

needs.

(Prof. DNYANDEO PUNDALIKRAO NATHE)

Principal Government Polytechnic, Nasik

iii

GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC NASHIK

VISION To be a premier technical training and development institute catering to the skill and professional

development in multi-domain for successful employment/self-employment by offering certified and

accredited NSQF compliant programmes. The institute shall be the center for excellence in skill

development and community development through different training programmes, business

incubation and entrepreneurship development.

MISSION The Government Polytechnic Nashik, an autonomous institute of Government of Maharashtra has the

mission to provide education for skill development, engineering diploma and continuing education

programmes for enhancement of employability skills of the aspirants in the job/self-employment

through continually developing quality learning systems. The institute aims at holistic and student

centric education in collaboration with business, industry and having practice based education.

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

VISION

“To be the Centre for Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering Supporting to the Multi-

Disciplinary Problem Solving through Outcome and Practice based Environment and with Focus up on

the Requirements of Digital India.”

MISSION

Department of Diploma in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering is committed

M1. To Provide Diploma Engineering Education and Skill Education for Manpower to the Industry

and Society

M2. To Inculcate Entrepreneurship Abilities

M3. To Prepare Life-Long Learners by Creating the Outcome and Practice Based Learning

Environment

M4. To Develop Professionalism, Ethics and Good Individual Citizen.

iv

JOB PROFILE OF DIPLOMA ELECTRONICS AND TELECOMMUNICATION

ENGINEERS

A Diploma Electronics and Telecommunication Engineer has to carry out various activities in various

areas during his implementation of engineering knowledge.

Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering job opportunities are available in following domains:

a. Consumer Electronics

b. Telecommunication

c. Industrial Automation

d. Industrial/Power Electronics

e. Medical Electronics

f. Mechatronics

g. Computer systems and Peripherals

h. Service and Repair

In above domain areas Diploma Electronics and Telecommunication Engineer has to perform

following duties and functions.

1. Skilled Engineer

2. Supervisor

3. Testing Engineer

4. Engineer in Railway Department

5. Maintenance Engineer

6. Service Engineer

7. Instructor in various Institutes

8. Maintenance / Quality Assurance Supervisor

9. Entrepreneur

10. Store Officer

11. Sales and Marketing Engineer

v

DIPLOMA PROGRAMME IN ELECTRONICS & TELECOMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING

RATIONALE:

In today’s world everyone is familiar with electronics and communication equipments

and they have become very important in life. Demand of Electronics and Telecommunication

Engineer is increasing day by day in residential, commercial, industrial, agricultural areas.

Expert manpower is needed for research, installation, testing, operation and

maintenance of equipments.

The program of Diploma in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering is aimed to

produce professional engineers to undertake various rolls in above areas and various

departments in industry.

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering Department will produce the engineers who:

I. Are Competent Entrepreneurs, Highly Valued Professionals with Life-Long Learning

Skills.

II. Act with Societal, Environmental, and Commercial Awareness.

III. Grow Professionally in their Careers through Continued Development of Technical and

Management Skills.

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

On successful completion of Diploma Programme in Electronics & Telecommunication Engineering,

the passouts will be able to,

a. Basic Knowledge: Apply the basic knowledge of differential equations, vector

calculus, complex variables, matrix theory, probability theory, basic sciences and

fundamentals of Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering.

b. Discipline Knowledge: Identify, analyze and solve Electronics and Telecommunication

Engineering problems upto the substantiate conclusions.

c. Experiments and Practice: Design and implement electronic circuits and to analyze,

interpret and experimentally validate the results.

d. Engineering Tools: Model and simulate analog and digital systems using appropriate

technologies and software tools.

vi

e. The Engineer and Society: Apply the knowledge of societal aspects and related

responsibilities while working in industries, research laboratories and multidisciplinary

tasks.

f. Environment and sustainability: Use modern engineering tools, software’s and

equipments to analyze the impact of engineering solutions in societal and environmental

contexts.

g. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and knowledge for the benefits of society and

industries.

h. Individual and Teamwork: Work effectively as an individual and member or a leader

in multidisciplinary teams.

i. Communication: Communicate effectively in society and engineering community

through verbal and written form.

j. Project Management and Finance: Manage projects in multidisciplinary environment

by applying the knowledge of engineering and management principles with the ability of

continuous learning.

k. Life-long Learning: Be an entrepreneur or to seek employment in the industry, public

sector undertakings and government organizations with the adaptability of lifelong

learning in the context of technological changes.

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

On successful completion of Diploma Programme in Electronics & Telecommunication

Engineering, the student will be able to,

PSO 1. Use basic concepts in various domains of Electronics and Telecommunication

Programme such as Applied Electronics, Analog and Digital communication, Digital

and Embedded Systems, Industrial Instrumentation and Automation.

PSO 2. Apply and upgrade the knowledge in order to develop electronic products and

systems

PSO 3. Work effectively on various technical projects to satisfy the industrial needs.

PSO 4. Utilize the engineering practices with professional ethics for societal and

environmental wellbeing.

vii

MAPPING OF MISSION AND PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES

Sr.

No.

Mapping

Point No.

Component of Mission Statement PEO/s

No.

1 M1 To Provide Diploma Engineering Education and Skill Education for Manpower to the Industry and Society

I

2 M2 To Inculcate Entrepreneurship Abilities I

3 M3 To Prepare Life-Long Learners by Creating the Outcome and Practice Based Learning Environment

I

4 M4 To Develop Professionalism, Ethics and Good Individual Citizen.

II & III

MAPPING OF PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES AND PROGRAMME

OUTCOMES

Sr.

No.

Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs) Programme Outcomes

(POs)

1 I. Are Competent Entrepreneurs, Highly Valued

Professionals with Life-Long Learning Skills.

a, b, c, d, e, f, h, j, k

2 II. Act with Societal, Environmental, and Commercial

Awareness.

g, h, i

3 III. Grow Professionally in their Careers through Continued

Development of Technical and Management Skills.

g, h, i

MAPPING OF PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES AND PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

Sr.

No.

Programme Specific Outcomes (PSOs) Programme

Outcomes (POs)

1 I. Use basic concepts in various domains of Electronics and

Telecommunication Programme such as Applied Electronics,

Analog and Digital communication, Digital and Embedded

Systems, Industrial Instrumentation and Automation.

a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k

2 II. Apply and upgrade the knowledge in order to develop electronic

products and systems

c, d, j, k

3 III. Work effectively on various technical projects to satisfy the

industrial needs.

a, b, c, d, e, h, i, j

4 IV. Utilize the engineering practices with professional ethics for

societal and environmental well being.

a, b, c, g, h, i, j, k

viii

MAPPING OF PROGRAMME OUTCOME AND COURSES

Sr.

No.

Programme Objectives (POs) Courses

a. Basic Knowledge: Apply the basic knowledge of differential equations, vector calculus, complex variables, matrix theory, probability theory, basic sciences and fundamentals of Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering.

Basic Mathematics

Engineering Mathematics

Applied Mathematics

Applied Physics

Applied Chemistry

Fundamentals of Electrical Technology

Basic Electronics

Analog Communication

Computer Applications

Engineering Graphics

b. Discipline Knowledge: Identify, analyze and solve Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering problems upto the substantiate conclusions.

Electronic Material and Components

Applied Electronics

Digital Electronics

Electronics Measurement and Instruments

Industrial Instrumentation

Digital Communication

Data Communication

Advance Communication Systems

Mobile Communication

Antenna and Microwaves

c. Experiments and Practice: Design and implement electronic circuits and to analyze, interpret and experimentally validate the results.

Engineering Workshop Practice

Electronic Workshop Practice

Linear Integrated Circuits

Industrial Electronics and Applications

Audio Video Engineering

Control System and PLC

Industrial Automation

d. Engineering Tools: Model and simulate analog and digital systems using appropriate technologies and software tools.

C Programming,

Embedded System Design

Mechatronics: Components and Systems

Microcontroller 8051

Advanced Microcontroller

VLSI Techniques

.NET Technology

Computer Hardware and Networking

Process Control and SCADA System

e. The Engineer and Society: Apply the knowledge of societal aspects and related responsibilities while working in industries, research laboratories and multidisciplinary tasks.

Professional Practice

Development of Life Skills

f. Environment and sustainability: Use modern engineering tools, software’s and equipments to analyze the impact of

Environmental Studies

Renewable Energy Sources

ix

Sr.

No.

Programme Objectives (POs) Courses

engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts.

g. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and knowledge for the benefits of society and industries.

Industrial Organization and Management

Entrepreneurship Development

h. Individual and Teamwork: Work effectively as an individual and member or a leader in multidisciplinary teams.

Supervisory Skills

Marketing Management

i. Communication: Communicate effectively in society and engineering community through verbal and written form.

Communication Skills

Development of Life Skills

Seminar

j. Project Management and Finance: Manage projects in multidisciplinary environment by applying the knowledge of engineering and management principles with the ability of continuous learning.

Project

Engineering Workshop Practice

Electronic Workshop Practice

Entrepreneurship Development

k. Life-long Learning: Be an entrepreneur or to seek employment in the industry, public sector undertakings and government organizations with the adaptability of lifelong learning in the context of technological changes.

All Courses

1

PROGRAMME - DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING CURRICULUM STRUCTURE

SCHEME AT A GLANCE

Level

Name of Level

Total

Number of Courses

offered

Number of

Courses to be

completed

TH TU PR Total

Credits Marks

Level-1 Foundation

Courses 12

12

Compulsory 29 02 26 57 1200

Level-2 Basic

Technology 08

08

Compulsory 30 -- 24 54 1175

Level-3 Allied

Courses 07

05 ( 03Compulsory

+ 02 Electives )

10 -- 04 14 400

Level-4 Applied Technology

08 08 Compulsory

14 -- 24 38 825

Level-5 Diversified

Technology 12

06

( 03 Compulsory + 03 Electives )

23 -- 14 37 900

TOTAL

47

34 Compulsory

+05 Electives --

39

106 02 92 200 4500

Grand Total 47 39 106 02 92 200 4500

Abbreviations:

TH: Theory, TU: Tutorial, PR: Practical.

2

PROGRAMME - DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING PROGRAMME STRUCTURE

LEVEL - 1 FOUNDATION COURSES

Sr.

No.

Course

Code Course Title

Course Abbr

TEACHING SCHEME EXAMINATION SCHEME

TH TU PR Total

Credits

Theory

Paper Test PR OR TW Total

Hrs Mark

01 6101 Communication Skills CMS 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- -- 50

02 6102 Development of Life Skills

DLS 01 -- 02 03 -- -- -- -- -- 50

03 6103 Basic Mathematics BMT 03 01 -- 04 03 80 20 -- -- --

04 6104 Engineering

Mathematics EMT 03 01 -- 04 03 80 20 -- -- --

05 6105 Applied Physics PHY 04 -- 02 06 02# 80# 20# -- -- 50

06 6106 Applied Chemistry CHY 04 -- 02 06 02# 80# 20# -- -- 50

07 6107 Engineering Graphics EGR 02 -- 04 06 -- -- -- 25 -- 25

08 6113 Fundamentals of Electrical Technology

FET 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- -- 50

09 6114 Electronic Workshop

Practice EWP -- -- 04 04 -- -- -- -- -- 50

10 6115 Computer Applications COA 01 -- 02 03 -- -- -- -- -- 50

11 6116 Electronic Material and Components

EMC 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25

12 6127 Engineering Workshop

Practice EWS -- -- 04 04 -- -- -- -- -- 50

TOTAL 29 02 26 57 -- 560 140 25 25 450 1200

Level : 1

Total Courses : 12 Total Credits : 57

Total Marks : 1200

Abbreviations :

Abbr : Course Abbreviation, TH : Theory, TU : Tutorial, PR: Practical, OR : Oral, TW : Term Work Course code Indication:

Example : 6101 First digit : 6 : Indicates last digit of Year of Implementation of Curriculum

Second digit : 1 : Indicates Level. Third & Fourth digit : 01 : Indicates Course Number.

Assessment of PR / OR / TW : 1) All orals & practicals are to be assessed by external & internal examiners.

2) Other TW are to be assessed by internal examiner only. 3) # indicates online progressive test and end examination

3


LEVEL - 2 BASIC TECHNOLOGY COURSES

Sr.

No.

Course

Code Course Title

Course Abbr


TH TU PR Total

Credits

Theory


Hrs Mark

01 6244 Basic Electronics BTX 04 -- 04 08 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

02 6245 Electronic Measurement

and Instruments

EMN 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

03 6246 Industrial Instrumentation

INI 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

04 6247 Digital

Electronics DEX 04 -- 04 08 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

05 6248 Linear Integrated

Circuits LIC 04 -- 04 08 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

06 6249 Analog Communication

ACO 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

07 6250

Industrial

Electronics and Applications

IEA 04 -- 04 08 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

08 6251 C Programming CPG 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- -- 25 125

TOTAL -- 30 -- 24 54 24 640 160 150 25 200 1175

Level: 2 Total Courses : 08

Total Credits : 54

Total Marks : 1175

Assessment of PR / OR / TW: 1) All orals & practicals are to be assessed by external & internal examiners.

2) * Indicates TW to be assessed by external & internal examiners.

3) Other TW are to be assessed by internal examiners.

4


LEVEL - 3 ALLIED COURSES

Sr.

No.

Course

Code Course Title

Course Abbr


TH TU PR Total

Credits

Theory


Hrs Mark

01 6301 Applied

Mathematics AMT 03 -- -- 03 03 80 20 -- -- -- 100

02 6302 Environmental Studies

EVS -- -- 02 02 -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

03 6303

Industrial

Organization and Management

IOM 03 -- -- 03 03 80 20 -- -- -- 100

Elective I : Any ONE of the following

03

6305 Supervisory Skills SSL 03 -- -- 03 03 80 20 -- -- -- 100

6306 Marketing

Management MKM 03 -- -- 03 03 80 20 -- -- -- 100

Elective II : Any ONE of the following

04

6309 Entrepreneurship Development

EDP 01 -- 02 03 -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

6310 Renewable Energy

Sources RES 01 -- 02 03 -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

TOTAL -- 10 -- 04 14 09 240 60 -- -- 100 400

Level: 3

Total Courses : 05

Total Credits : 14 Total Marks : 400

Assessment of PR / OR / TW:

1) All orals & practicals are to be assessed by external & internal examiners. 2) * Indicates TW to be assessed by external & internal examiners.


5


LEVEL - 4 APPLIED TECHNOLOGY COURSES

Sr.

No.

Course

Code Course Title

Course Abbr

PRQ


TH TU PR Total

Credits

Theory


Hrs Mark

01 6410 Professional

Practice PPR -- -- -- 04 04 -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

02 6411 Seminar SEM -- -- -- 02 02 -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

03 6412 Project PRO 100

CR -- -- 04 04 -- -- -- -- 50 50

* 100

04 6441 Applied

Electronics AET -- 04 -- 04 08 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

05 6442 Audio Video Engineering

AVE -- 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- 25 -- 125

06 6443 Digital

Communication DCO -- 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

07 6444

Advance

Communication

Systems

ACS -- 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

08 6445 .NET

Technology NTT -- 01 -- 04 05 -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

TOTAL -- -- 14 -- 24 38 12 320 80 25 125 275 825

Level: 4

Total Courses : 08

Total Credits : 38 Total Marks : 825

Assessment of PR / OR / TW :



6


LEVEL - 5 DIVERSIFIED COURSES

Sr.

No.

Course

Code Course Title

Course Abbr


TH TU PR Total

Credits

Theory


Hrs Mark

01 6552 Microcontroller-

8051 MIC 04 -- 04 08 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

02 6553 Control System and PLC

CSP 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- -- 25 125

03 6554

Computer

Hardware and Networking

CHN 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 50 175

Elective III: Any ONE of the following

04

6555

Data

Communication

and Networking

DCM 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6556 Advanced

Microcontrollers AMC 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6557 Process Control and SCADA

System

PCS 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

Elective IV: Any ONE of the following

05 6558

Mobile

Communication MCM 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6559 Embedded System EMS 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6560

Mechatronics:

Components and Systems

MCS 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

Elective V : Any ONE of the following

06 6561

Antenna and Microwaves

AMW 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6562 VLSI Techniques VLT 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6563 Industrial Automation

IAM 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

TOTAL -- 23 -- 14 37 18 480 120 25 100 175 900

Level: 5

Total Courses : 06 Total Credits : 37

Total Marks : 900

Assessment of PR / OR / TW :



7

PROGRAMME - DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING COURSES FOR AWARD OF CLASS

Sr.

No.

Course

Code Course Title

Course

Abbr


TH TU PR Total

Credits

Theory


Hrs Mark

01 6248 Linear Integrated

Circuits LIC 04 -- 04 08 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

02 6249 Analog Communication ACO 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

03 6250 Industrial Electronics and Applications

IEA 04 -- 04 08 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

04 6411 Seminar SEM -- -- 02 02 -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

05 6412 Project PRO -- -- 04 04 -- -- -- -- 50 50* 100

06 6442 Audio Video

Engineering AVE 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- 25 -- 125

07 6443 Digital Communication DCO 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

08 6552 Microcontroller-8051 MIC 04 -- 04 08 03 80 20 25 -- 25 150

09 6553 Control System and

PLC CSP 03 -- 02 05 03 80 20 -- -- 25 125

Any ONE from Elective III-

10

6555 Data Communication and

Networking

DCM 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6556 Advanced Microcontrollers

AMC 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6557 Process Control and

SCADA System PCS 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

Any ONE from Elective IV-

11

6558 Mobile Communication MCM 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6559 Embedded System EMS 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6560

Mechatronics:

Components and Systems

MCS 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

Any ONE from Elective V-

12

6561 Antenna and

Microwaves AMW 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6562 VLSI Techniques VLT 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

6563 Industrial Automation IAM 04 -- 02 06 03 80 20 -- 25 25 150

TOTAL -- 37 -- 32 69 30 800 200 100 175 325 1600

Total Courses : 12

Total Credits : 69

Total Marks : 1600

Assessment of PR / OR / TW : 1) All orals & practicals are to be assessed by external & internal examiners.

2) * Indicates TW to be assessed by external & internal examiners.


8

PROGRAMME - DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING SAMPLE PATH

ENTRY LEVEL- 10+

Nature of Course

First Year Second Year Third Year

Total Odd Term

Even Term

Odd Term Even Term Odd Term Even Term

Compulsory

6101(05)

CMS

6104(04)

EMT

6244(08)

BTX

6246(06)

INI

6250(08)

IEA

6412(04)

PRO

6102(03) DLS

6106(06) CHY

6245(05) EMN

6248(08) LIC

6303(03) IOM

6443(05) DCO

6103(04)

BMT

6107(06)

EGR

6247(08)

DEX

6301(03)

AMT

6410(04)

PPR

6444(05)

ACS

6105(06)

PHY

6113(06)

FET

6249(06)

ACO

6441(08)

AET

6411(02)

SEM

6445(05)

NTT

6114(04) EWP

6115(03) COA

6251(05) CPG

6554(06) CHN

6442(05) AVE

6553(05) CSP

6127(04)

EWS

6116(06)

EMC

6552(08)

MIC

6302(02)

EVS

Total credits (Compulsory)

26 33 32 31 30 24 176

Elective -- --

I) Any ONE from

Elective: I:

6305(SSL), 6306(MKM)

: (03)

I) Any ONE from

Elective: II:

6309(EDP), 6310(RES)

: (03)

I) Any ONE from

Elective: III: 6555(DCM),

6556(AMC),

6557(PCS) :(06)

Any ONE from

each

I) Elective: IV: 6558(MCM),

6559(EMS), 6560(MCS)

II) Elective: V:

6561(AMW), 6562(VLT),

6563(IAM) : (06+06=12)

Total Credits

(Elective) -- -- 03 03 06 12 24

Total Courses 06 07 06 06 07 07 39

Total Credits

(Compulsory + Elective)

26 33 35 34 36 36 200

Grand Total of Credits 200

Note : Figures in bracket indicates total credits.

9

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE / DD / ID COURSE : Communication Skills (CMS) COURSE CODE : 6101 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks

TH TU PR TH TEST TH+TEST PR OR TW TOTAL

03 -- 02 05 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- 50 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

Proficiency in English is one of the basic needs of technical students hence this curriculum aims at developing the functional and communicative abilities of the students. As Communication skills play a decisive role in the career development and entrepreneurship this course will guide and direct to develop a good personality and effective communication too. This course is compiled with an aim of shaping minds of engineering students while catering to their needs.

2.0 COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The student will be able to,

1. Understand & use basic concepts of Communication in an organisation and social context.

2. Use reasonably and grammatically correct English language with reading competency.

3. Utilise the skills to be a competent communicator.

4. Develop comprehension skills, improve vocabulary and acquire writing skills.

5. Overcome language and communication barriers with the help of effective communication techniques.

3.0 COURSE OUTCOMES:

The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes:

1. Apply the process and identify types of Communication for being an effective communicator

2. Identify the barriers in the communication process and apply ways to overcome them 3. Interpret graphical information precisely 4. Use formal written skills for business correspondence. 5. Exhibit listening & reading skills for improving competencies in communication. 6. Pronounce English sounds with correct stress and intonation in day to day conversations. 7. Construct correct grammatical sentences in oral and written communication.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:

Unit Major Learning Outcomes

(in cognitive domain)

Topics and Sub-topics Hours

Unit-I Communication

1a. Define communication & objectives

1b. Describe the process of Communication

1c. Differentiate between types of communication

1.1 Meaning of communication: definition, objectives and Importance of communication

1.2 Elements/Process of communication 1.3 Types of communication: Formal,

Informal, Verbal, Nonverbal, vertical, Horizontal, Diagonal

04

Unit-II

2a. Explain types of barriers

2.1 Barriers to Communication a) Physical Barrier

04

10




Communication Barriers.

2b. Describe the principles of effective communication

2c. Discuss ways to overcome barriers.

2d. Identify various barriers

Environmental(time, noise, distance and surroundings)

Personal(deafness, stammering, ill-health, spastic, bad handwriting, temporary physical disabilities)

b) Mechanical: Machines/means oriented c) Psychological: Day dreaming

prejudice, emotional, blocked mind, generation gap, status, inactiveness, perception

d) Language: Difference in language, technical jargons pronunciation and allusion

2.2 Ways to overcome barriers 2.3 Principles of effective communication

Unit-III Nonverbal & Graphical Communication

3a. Explain use of body language in oral conversations

3b. Label and interpret the graphical information correctly

3c. Describe the importance of graphical and nonverbal methods in technical field.

3.1 Non-verbal codes:

Proxemics Chronemics Artefacts

3.2 Aspects of body language(Kinesics) 3.3 Graphical communication

Advantages and disadvantages of graphical communication

Tabulation of data and its depiction in the form of bar graphs and pie charts.

06

Unit-IV Formal Written Communication

4a. Develop notices, circulars and emails

4b. Draft letters on given topics

4c. Prepare technical reports.

4d. Develop various types of paragraphs.

4.1 Office Drafting :Notice, Memo, Circulars and e-mails

4.2 Job application and resume 4.3 Business correspondence: Enquiry, Reply

to an enquiry order, complaint, adjustment,

4.4 Technical Report Writing: Accident report, Fall in Production / survey, progress Investigation / maintenance

4.5 Paragraph writing -Types of paragraphs

Descriptive Technical Expository

12

Unit-V Listening skills

5a. Differentiate between hearing and listening.

5b. Apply techniques of effective listening.

5.1 Listening versus hearing 5.2 Merits of good listening 5.3 Types of listening 5.4 Techniques of effective listening

02

Unit-VI Reading Skills

6a. Describe various methods to develop

6.1 Reading for comprehension 6.2 Reading styles 6.3 Developing vocabulary

06

11




vocabulary 6b. Develop reading

competencies. 6c. Explain steps to

comprehend passage

6.4 Methods of word formation: prefixes, suffixes, collocations, synonyms, antonyms, Homophones, Homonyms.

6.5 Comprehension of unseen passages

Unit-VII Speaking Skills

7a. Demonstrate Correct Pronunciation, stress and intonation in everyday conversation

7b. Develop formal conversational techniques.

7c. Deliver different types of speech

7.1 Correct Pronunciation -Introduction to sounds vowels, consonants, stress, intonation

7.2 Conversations : Meeting & Parting Introducing & influencing requests Agreeing & disagreeing

Formal enquiries 7.3 Speech-Types of speech

Welcome Speech Farewell speech Vote of thanks

06

Unit-VIII Language Grammar

8a. Use grammatically correct sentence in day to day oral and written communication

8b. Distinguish between determiners & apply correctly in communicative use

8c. Use correct verb for given course.

8d. Use appropriate preposition as per time, place and direction.

8e. Transform the sentences.

8.1 Tense Present Tense(Simple, Continuous,

perfect, perfect Continuous)

Past Tense(Simple, Continuous, perfect, perfect Continuous)

Future Tense(Simple) 8.2 Determiners

Articles (A, An, The) Some, Any, Much, Many, All, Both,

Few, A few, The few, Little, A little, The little, Each, Every.

8.3 Modal Auxiliaries Can, Could, May, Might, Shall, Should,

Will, Would, Must, Have to, Need, ought

to

8.4 Sentence Transformation

Voice Degree Affirmative, Negative, Assertive,

8.5 Prepositions

Time Place Direction

8.6 Conjunctions

08

TOTAL 48

12

5.0 SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH MARKS (THEORY):

Unit No.

Unit Title Distribution of Theory Marks

R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Communication -- 02 04 06

II Communication Barriers 02 02 02 06

III Nonverbal & Graphical communication -- 02 08 10

IV Formal Written Communication -- 04 18 22

V Listening Skills -- -- 04 04

VI Reading Skills -- 02 06 08

VII Speaking Skills 02 02 04 08

VIII Language Grammar -- 04 12 16

TOTAL 04 18 58 80

Legends: R = Remembrance (Knowledge); U = Understanding; A = Application and above levels (Revised Bloom’s taxonomy)

Note: This specification table shall be treated as a general guideline for students and teachers. The actual distribution of marks in the question paper may vary slightly from above table.

6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/PRACTICALS/TASKS: The tutorial/practical/assignment/task should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the desired programme outcome/course outcome.

Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in the mapping matrix for this course. Faculty should ensure that students also acquire Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes related to affective domain.

Sr. No.

Unit No. Practical Exercises

(Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain) Hours

1 I Communicate on the given topic/situation. 02

2 II Identify communication barriers 02

3 III Non-verbal communication 02

4 IV Business letter writing &job application 02

5 IV Draft official letter 02

6 IV Technical report writing on given topic 04

7 V Attend a seminar and preparing notes 02

8 VI Vocabulary building with different methods 02

9 VII Language lab Experiment for correct pronunciation of sounds 04

10 VII Write & present conversations on given situations 02

11 VIII Grammar application-various exercises on grammar 04

12 I to VIII Mini project (on given topic) 04

TOTAL 32

7.0 STUDENT ACTIVITIES:

Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Prepare charts on types of communication. 2. Convert language information in graphical or nonverbal codes. 3. Maintaining own dictionary of difficult words, words often confuse, homophones &

homonyms. 4. Listening daily English news on television or radio & to summarise it in their language.

13

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Use audios of correct pronunciations. 2. Show videos about use of body language in oral formal conversations

9.0 LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) Books

Sr. No. Title of Book Author Publication

1 Effective English Communication Krishna Mohan and Meenakshi

Raman Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.

2 English for practical purpose Z. N. Patil Macmillan

3 Spoken English Basal and Harrison Orient Longman

4 Contemporary English Grammar R. C. Jain, David Green Macmillan

5 Business correspondence and Report writing

R. C. Sharma and Krishna Mohan

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

6 English Communication for Polytechnics

S. Chandrashekhar & others Orient Black Swan

7 Active English Dictionary S. Chandrashekhar & others Longman

B) Software/Learning Websites

1. http://www.communicationskills.co.in 2. http://www.mindtools.com 3. http://www.communication.skills4confidence 4. http://www.goodcommunication skills.net 5. http://www.free-english-study.com/ 6. http://www.english-online.org.uk/ 7. http://www.englishclub.com 8. http://www.learnenglish.de 9. http://www.talkenglish.com/ 10. http://www.englishgrammarsecrets.com 11. http://www.myenglishpages.com/ 12. http://www.effective-business-letters.com/ 13. http://www.englishlistening.com/ 14. http://www.class-central.com

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications

1. Digital English Language Laboratory. 2. Computers for language laboratory software 3. Headphones with microphone

10.0 MAPPING MATRIX OF PO’S AND CO’S:

Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes

a b c d e f g h i j k

CO1 H M

CO2 H M

CO3 M H M

CO4 M H M

CO5 M H M

CO6 M H

CO7 M H M

H: High Relationship, M: Moderate Relationship, L: Low Relationship.

14

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL /AE / DD / ID COURSE : Development of Life Skills (DLS) COURSE CODE : 6102 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


01 -- 02 03 -- Max. --- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course will develop the student as an effective member of the team in the organization. It will develop the abilities and skills to perform at highest degree of quality. It enhances his/her capabilities in the field of searching, assimilating information, handling people effectively and solving challenging problems.


The student will be able to, 1. Develop the abilities and skills to perform at highest degree of quality as an individual as

well as a member of core group or team. 2. Enhance capabilities in the field of searching, assimilating information, managing the

given task, handling people effectively and solving challenging problems. 3. Understand and use personal management techniques. 4. Analyse their strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats.



1. Analyse self attitude and behaviour. 2. Acquire self learning techniques by using various information sources 3. Identify personal strengths to get future opportunities. 4. Develop presentation skills with the help of effective use of body language. 5. Enhance leadership traits and recognise the importance of team work. 6. Face interview without fear 7. Resolve conflict and solve problems by appropriate methods. 8. Set the goal for personal development.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Self Analysis

1a. Explain types of Motivation.

1b. Differentiate between types of attitude.

1.1 Motivation-types, need 1.2 Attitude-types, tips for developing

positive attitude 1.3 Behaviour-types-passive, assertive,

aggressive

02

1c. Describe types of behaviour

1d. Analyse SWOT of an individual

1.4 Confidence building-need, importance 1.5 SWOT analysis-(significance)

Unit-II

Self Learning Techniques

2a. Explain the self learning techniques by enhancing memory and

2.1 Need & importance of SLT 2.2 Information source-Primary, secondary,

tertiary 2.3 Enhancing Memory and concentration

02

15




( SLT)

concentration 2b. Apply practical

skills for effective learning

2c. Identify the information sources

2.4 Learning Practical Skills- need of Practical Skills types of practical skills-technical, organisational, human Domains of learning 1)cognitive 2)Affective 3)psychomotor

2.5 information search techniques-library search, internet search

Unit-III Self Development & management

3a. Explain the Need of self Management

3b. Set the goals for personal development

3.1 Stress management-remedies to avoid, minimize stress

3.2 Health management –importance of Diet & exercise

3.3 Time management-time planning, tips for effective time management

3.4 Goal setting-need and importance 3.5 Creativity

03

Unit-IV

Emotions

4a. Explain nature and types of human emotions

4b. Differentiate between cognitive and emotional intelligence

4.1 Basic emotions- 4.2 Emotional intelligence 4.3 Emotional stability/maturity.

01

Unit-V Presentation skills

5a. Develop presentation skills with the help of body language

5b. Describe utilisation of voice quality in oral conversations

5.1 Body Language – Codes, dress and appearance, postures, gestures Facial expressions

5.2 Voice and language 5.3 Use of aids:-OHP, LCD projector, white

board

02

Unit-VI Group discussion and interview techniques

6a. Participate in group discussion

6b. Face interview without fear.

6.1 introduction to group discussion 6.2 ways to carry group discussion 6.3 Parameters-analytical, logical thinking,

Decision making 6.4 Interview techniques Necessity, tips for

handling common questions

02

Unit-VII

Team work

7a. Recognise the importance of team work

7b. Enhance leadership qualities

7.1 stages of team development 7.2 Understand and work with dynamic

group 7.3 Ingredients of effective teams. 7.4 leadership in teams, handling frustration

in group

02

Unit-VIII Conflicts & Problem Solving

8a. Describe sources of conflicts and resolve conflicts

8b. Develop lateral thinking abilities

8c. Identify innovative methods in solving Problems.

8.1 sources of conflict 8.2 Resolution of conflict 8.3 ways to enhance interpersonal relation 8.4 Steps in problem solving 8.5 Problem solving techniques-trial, error &

brainstorming

02

TOTAL 16

16

5.0 SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH MARKS (THEORY): Not Applicable

6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/PRACTICALS/TASKS:

The tutorial/practical/assignments/tasks should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the competencies.

Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in a common list at the beginning of curriculum document for this programme. Faculty should refer to that common list and should ensure that students also acquire those Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes related to affective domain.

Sr. No.

Unit No.

Practical Exercises (Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain)

Approx. Hrs. required

1 I Self Introduction-giving personal details for introducing self 02

2 II SLT-Access the book on biography of scientist/industrialist/invention from the library or internet

02

3 I Deliver a seminar for 10 minutes using presentation aids. 02

4 IV Prepare PowerPoint slides on given topic and make presentation 02

5 VII Case study for problem solving in an organisation 04

6 V Discuss a topic in a group & prepare minutes of discussion. 02

7 VI Prepare questionnaire for your friend or any person in the organisation to check emotional intelligence.

02

8 VII Goal setting for achieving the success-SMART goal. 02

9. I SWOT Analysis for yourself with respect to your Strength, Weakness, Opportunities & Threats

04

10 III Attend a seminar or a guest lecture and note down the important points and prepare a report of the same.

02

11 VIII Undertake any social activity in a team and prepare a report about it(i.e. tree plantation, blood donation, environment protection, rain water harvesting)

04

12 III Management of self-stress management, time management, health management

04

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Preparing personal time table. 2. Performing YOGA as a routine part of daily life. 3. Practicing breathing exercises. 4. Improving concentration by chanting and meditation. 5. Focusing on behavior skills and mannerism 6. Searching information on internet and newspapers. 7. Concentrating on various aspects of personality development.

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any):

1. Use of videos on personality development. 2. Use of power point presentation on health, time & stress management 3. Case study of an organization 4. Use of videos to show interviews of successful personalities.

17


A) Books

Sr.No. Title of Book Author Publication

1 Make Every Minute Count Marion E Haynes Kogan Page India

2 Body language Allen Pease Sudha Publication Pvt. Ltd.

3 Presentation Skills Michael Hatton ISTE New Delhi

4 Organizational Behavior Pearson Education Asia Tata McGraw Hill

5 Working in Teams Chakravarty, Ajanta Orient Longman

6 Develop Your Assertiveness Bishop, Sue Kogan Page India

7 Adams Time Management Marshall Cooks Viva Books

8 Time Management Chakravarty, Ajanta Rupa and Company

9 Target setting & Goal Achievement

Richard hale, Peter whilom Kogan page India

10 Creativity &problem solving Lowe and Phil Kogan page (I)P Ltd

11 Basic Managerial Skills for all E. H. Mc Grah, S. J. Prentice Hall of India, Pvt. Ltd.

B) Software/Learning Websites 1. http://www.mindtools.com 2. http://www.successconsciousness.com 3. http://www.studyhabits.com 4. http://www.motivateus.com 5. http://www.quickmba.com 6. http://www.success77.com 7. http://www.stress.org 8. http://www.topachievement.com 9. http://www.ethics.com 10. http://www.creativityforlife.com 11. http:// www.motivation.com 12. http://www.queendom.com

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications Not Applicable


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 L M L L M H H

CO2 M M L L H M H

CO3 M M M H H

CO4 L L L M M H M

CO5 L M M H M L

CO6 L L M H M

CO7 L M M L M M L L

CO8 L L L M L L H L


http://www.successconsciousness.com/

http://www.motivateus.com/

http://www.success77.com/

http://www.stress.org/

http://www.topachievement.com/

http://www.creativityforlife.com/

http://www.motivation.com/

http://www.queendom.com/

18

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE COURSE : Basic Mathematics (BMT) COURSE CODE : 6103 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 01 -- 04 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- -- 100

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- -- --

1.0 RATIONALE: This course is classified under foundation course and intends to teach the students basic facts, concepts and principles of Mathematics, as a tool to analyse the engineering problems and lay down the understanding of basic technology courses.


The student will be able to, 1. Acquire the knowledge of mathematical terms definitions, principles and procedure of

algebra, trigonometry and co-ordinate geometry. 2. Develop the process of logical thinking. 3. Comprehend the principles of the other courses. 4. Solve problems by using analytical & systematic approach.



1. Apply logarithm concept for solving mathematical problems 2. Solve determinant and matrix 3. Solve simultaneous equation in three variables 4. Use partial fraction to solve engineering problems 5. Apply binomial theorem to solve engineering problems 6. Determine properties of triangle and solution of triangle 7. Use coordinate geometry for solving problems in straight lines and circles

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Logarithm

1a. Define logarithm use it for conversion

1b. Apply laws of logarithm to solving problems

1c. Identify common logarithm and Naperian logarithm

1.1 Concept and definition of Logarithm, conversion of exponential and logarithmic forms

03

1.2 Laws of logarithms and change of base formula

1.3 Common logarithm and Naperian logarithm definition and notation only.

Unit-II Determinant and Matrix Algebra

2a. Calculate determinant of order two and three and apply Cramer’s Rule.

2b. Calculate area Of Triangle & condition of

2.1 Determinant of order two and three, Cramer’s Rule for Three Variables. Area of Triangle and Condition of Co linearity.

2.2 Definition of a matrix, types of matrix, algebra of matrices, equality of

10

19




co linearity 2c. Define various types of

matrices; solve problems using Algebra of matrix.

2d. Calculate Inverse of matrix

matrices, scalar multiplication, product of two matrices, Transpose of matrix.

2.3 Minor, cofactor and ad joint of matrix, Inverse of matrix by ad Joint matrix method.

Unit-III Partial Fraction

3a. Identify proper & improper

3b. Resolve partial fraction method of Case I, Case II and Case III.

3.1 Rational function, proper and Improper rational Functions

3.2 Concept of partial fraction. Case-1 The denominator contains linear

non repeated factors. Case-2 the denominator contains linear

but repeated factors Case-3 the denominator contains

quadratic irreducible factors

05

Unit-IV Binomial Theorem

4a. State Binomial Theorem for Positive integral Index.

4b. Use TR+1 for finding middle term general term

4c. Use approximation Theorem for solving problems

4.1 Binomial Theorem for positive integral index, formula for Tr+1, Middle term, particular term.

4.2 Binomial Theorem for rational and negative index (expansion up to four terms only), approximation theorem, simple problems

04

Unit-V Measurement of Angle

5a. Conversion of sexagesimal systems & circular systems

5.1 Measurement of angles, sexagesimal systems & circular systems, co-terminal angles, positive and negative angles, conversion of angle to radian to degree and degree to radians.

02

Unit-VI Trigonometric Ratios

6a. Calculate trigonometric ratios of any angle, Solve problem using fundamental Identities.

6b. Solving problem using allied, Compound, Multiple and Sub multiple forms.

6.1 Trigonometric ratios of any angle, graph of trigonometric functions fundamental identities

6.2 Trigonometric ratios of allied, compound, multiple and sub multiple angles, sum &product forms.

08

Unit-VII Inverse Trigonometric Functions

7a. Convert & solving inverse trigonometry function

7b. Use of form to solve problem.

7.1 Concept and definition of trig. Function, Relation between inverse trig. functions

02

Unit-VIII Properties Of Angle and Solution of Triangle

8a. Use properties of triangle : Sine rule, Cosine rule to solve mathematical problems

8b. Solve any triangle problems

8.1 Sine rule, cosine rule & law of tangent (simple problems)

8.2 solutions of triangle

04

Unit-IX

9a. Calculate Slope, X and Y, intercept Use

9.1 Slope and intercepts of straight line, various form of straight line, angle

06

20




Equation of Straight Line

various form of Straight line to solve problems.

between two lines, condition for two parallel or perpendicular lines, perpendicular distance formula, distance between two parallel lines.

Unit-X Equation of Circle

10a. Calculate Radius & Centre of general circle

10b. Apply various form of circle

10c. Calculate Equation of tangent & normal to the circle.

10.1 Equation of standard circle, center radius form, general form of circle, diameter form of circle, equation of tangent and normal to the circle.

04

TOTAL 48

5.0 SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH MARKS

Unit No.

Unit Title Distribution of Marks

R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Logarithm 02 02 02 06

II Determinant And Matrix Algebra 04 08 04 16

III Partial Fraction 02 04 02 08

IV Binomial Theorem 02 02 02 06

V Measurement Of Angle 02 02 -- 04

VI Trigonometric Ratios 04 04 04 12

VII Inverse Trigonometric Function 02 02 -- 04

VIII Properties of Triangle And Solution Of Triangle 02 02 04 08

IX Equation Of Straight Line 02 04 04 10

X Equation Of Circle 02 02 02 06

TOTAL 24 32 24 80

6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/ TUTORIAL /TASKS

Sr. No.

Unit No.

Batch wise Tutorial Exercises Tutorial: Ten question of multiple choice with justification


1 I Logarithm 01

2 II Determinant 01

3 II Matrix Algebra 02

4 III Partial Fraction 01

5 IV Binomial Theorem 02

6 V Measurement And Angle 01

7 VI Trigonometric Ratios 01

8 VI Trigonometric Ratios 01

9 VII Inverse Trigonometric Ratios 02

10 VIII Properties of Triangle And Solution Of Triangle 01

11 IX Straight Line 02

12 X Circle 01

TOTAL 16

21

7.0 STUDENT ACTIVITIES: Following is the list of proposed student activities like

1. Teacher guided self learning activities. 2. Applications to solve identified Engineering problems and use of Internet.


Not applicable


A) Books


1 Mathematics for polytechnic student (I) S. P. Deshpande Pune Vidyarthi Gruha

2 Trigonometry S. L. Loney S. Chand

3 Higher Engineering Mathematics B. S. Grewal Khanna

4 College Algebra F.G. Valles Charter Publication.

5 Higher Algebra H. S. Halls & S.R. Night

6 Matrices F. Ayers Schan Series. Metric Edition Book, Palace of India.


1. http://www.mathsisfun.com

2. http://mathinsight.org/logarithm_basics 3. http://www.mathportal.org/linear-algebra/determinants/determinant-of-a-

matrix.php 4. http://www.math.hmc.edu/calculus/tutorials/matrixalgebra/ 5. http://ibgwww.colorado.edu/~carey/p7291dir/handouts/matrix.algebra.pdf 6. http://www.purplemath.com/modules/binomial2.htm 7. http://www.themathpage.com/atrig/line.htm 8. http://i1.dainikbhaskar.com/web2images/education/maths_13659_13897.pdf 9. http://mathworld.wolfram.com/InverseTrigonometricFunctions.html 10. http://aieee.examcrazy.com/maths/formula-tips/Co-ordinate-Geometry-circle.asp


1. Scientific Calculator 2. Computer system with Printer and Internet system. 3. LCD Projector


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M L

CO2 H M L

CO3 H L L

CO4 H L L

CO5 H M L

CO6 H M L

CO7 H M L


http://aieee.examcrazy.com/maths/formula-tips/Co-ordinate-Geometry-circle.asp

22

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE COURSE : Engineering Mathematics (EMT) COURSE CODE : 6104 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 01 -- 04 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- -- 100

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- -- --

1.0 RATIONALE: The study of mathematics is necessary to develop in the students the skills essential new for the disciplines like Genetic Engineering, Biotechnology and Information Technology etc. This course is extension of Basic Mathematics and stepping to learn applied mathematics. Engineering mathematics lays down the foundation to understand and express principles and laws involved in other technology courses.


The student will be able to, 1. Acquire knowledge of differential calculus, vector algebra, statistics and probability,

complex numbers. 2. Develop the ability to apply mathematical methods to solve engineering problem 3. Acquire sufficient mathematical techniques necessary for daily and practical problems.


The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes :

1. Solve function and limit of function 2. Apply derivatives to solve engineering problems 3. Apply vector to solve engineering problems 4. Determine statistics probability to solve engineering problems 5. Solve engineering problems using complex number

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Function

1a. Solve problem of functions, State even & odd function, identify various types of function.

1.1 Definition of function, types of functions, Basic functions such as algebraic, exponential, logarithmic, trigonometric, inverse trigonometric functions, explicit, implicit, composite, inverse, parametric, exponential even & odd functions, simple problems

03

Unit-II Limits

2a. Apply limit of various types of Functions.

2.1 Definition of limit, limit of Functions such as algebraic Functions, trigonometric functions, logarithm and exponential functions

05

Unit-III Derivatives

3a. Solve problems of derivative with the help of rules & formulae of derivative.

3.1 Concept and definition of derivative, Notation, standard Formulae and rules of derivative

3.2 Methods of differentiation, derivative of

10

23




3b. Differentiate various types of functions

3c. Calculate second order of derivative.

composite functions, implicit function. Parametric function. Inverse function. Logarithmic Differentiation.

3.3 Second order derivatives, simple problems.

Unit-IV Application of Derivatives

4a. Apply geometrical meaning of derivative; solve the problem based on related rates, radius of curvature & maxima minima.

4.1 Geometric meaning of derivative 4.2 Error theorem. 4.3 Related rates, radius of curvature 4.4 Maxima & Minima

06

Unit-V Vectors

5a. Apply algebra of vector 5b. Calculate scalar and

vector products 5c. Apply vector algebra to

find work done and moment of force, Area of parallelogram

5.1 Definition of vector, position vector, algebra of vector (equality, addition, subtraction and scalar multiplication)

5.2 Dot (scalar) and vector (cross) product of two vectors.

5.3 Application of vectors, work done and moment of force about a point and line.

08

Unit-VI Statistics & Probability

6a. Calculate range, mean deviation, standard deviation for group and ungrouped data, coefficient of variance

6b. Apply the theory of probability to solve problem

6c. Apply addition and multiplication theorems

6.1 Measure of dispersion such as range, mean deviation, standard deviation, variation and coefficient of variation.

6.2 Definition of random experiment, sample space event, occurrence of events and types of events (impossible, mutually exclusive, exhaustive and equally likely)

6.3 Definition of probability, addition and multiplication theorems of probability.

08

Unit-VII Complex Number

7a. Solve problem based on complex number(real and imaginary part, polar form)

7b. Apply Algebra of complex number to solve problem

7c. Solve problem of Euler’s function & circular function, Hyperbolic function.

7.1 Definition of complex number, Cartesian, polar and exponential forms of complex number.

7.2 Algebra of complex no. (equality, addition, subtraction multiplication and division)

7.3 De–Moiver’s theorem (without proof) and simple problems.

7.4 Euler’s form of circular functions, Hyperbolic functions and relation between them.

08

TOTAL 48

24

5.0 SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH MARKS:

Unit No.

Unit Title Distribution of Marks

R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Function 02 02 -- 04

II Limits 02 04 02 08

III Derivative 06 08 06 20

IV Application Of Derivative 02 04 06 12

V Vector 04 06 02 12

VI Statistics and Probability 04 04 04 12

VII Complex Number 04 04 04 12

TOTAL 24 32 24 80

6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/TUTORIAL/TASKS:

Sr. No.

Unit No.

Batch wise Tutorial Exercises (Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain)

Tutorial: Ten question of multiple choice with justification

Approx. Hrs.

required

1 I Function 01

2 II Limits I 01

3 II Limits II 01

4 III Derivative I 01

5 III Derivative II 01

6 III Derivative III 02

7 III Second Order Derivative 01

8 IV Application Of Derivative 02

9 V Vector 02

10 VI Statistics 01

11 VI Probability 01

12 VII Complex Number 02

TOTAL 16


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Teacher guided self learning activities. 2. Applications to solve identified Engineering problems and use of Internet. 3. Learn graphical software: Excel, DPlot and Graph.

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): Not Applicable


A) Books


1 Mathematics for polytechnic student (II) S. P. Deshpande Pune Vidyarthi Gruha

2 Higher Engineering Mathematics B. S. Grewal Khanna

3 Advanced Engineering Mathematics H.K. Das Khanna Publication

4 Calculus of single variable R.T. Smith Tata McGraw Hill.

5 Engineering Mathematics S.S. Shastri Prentice Hall Publication


1. http://schools.aglasem.com/1341 2. http://www.emathzone.com/tutorials/calculus/types-of-functions.html 3. http://www.mathsisfun.com/algebra/vectors.html

25

4. http://www.mathsisfun.com/data/ 5. http://mathworld.wolfram.com/ComplexNumber.html


1. Scientific Calculator 2. Computer system with Printer and Internet system. 3. LCD Projector.


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M L

CO2 H M L

CO3 H M L

CO4 H M L

CO5 H M L


26

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE COURSE : Applied Physics (PHY) COURSE CODE : 6105 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

Online Exam Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 02 Max. 80# 20# 100 -- -- 50 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- 20 --

# Indicates online examination 1.0 RATIONALE:

Physics is associated with our lives at every stage. A good scientific attitude is essential for every human being to increase his/her quality of life. Today learning Physics has become more challenging because it is no more a watertight compartment. The approach is now inter-disciplinary and integrated with emphasis on the principle with their application.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand and apply the laws of Physics in various contexts. 2. Apply their knowledge of basic Physics to solve problems and present the solution in a

clear and concise manner. 3. Acquire and develop experimental skills including the use of variety of laboratory

instruments, taking of data for interpretation and its analysis. 4. Develop skill in the presentation of clear and concise written accounts of laboratory work.



1. Differentiate between various systems of measurement and identify proper unit of a physical quantity.

2. Identify the properties of Laser and Optical fibre as well as their engineering applications. 3. Acquire the knowledge about superconductors, indoor lighting. 4. Identify conductors & insulators of heat and analyse the relation between pressure,

volume and temperature of gas. 5. Recognise elastic properties of materials and types of modulus of elasticity. 6. Identify the properties such as surface tension of liquids and viscosity of fluids. 7. Be aware of the propagation of sound and acoustics of building. 8. Distinguish between various effects produced by an electric charge. 9. Gain broad ideas about capacitors, semiconductors and p-n junction diode. 10. Discover the basics and applications of photoelectric cell and X rays.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Units & Measurements

1a. Differentiate between fundamental &derived quantities/units.

1.1 Need of measurements, units of measurements, systems of units, SI units, fundamental & derived units, fundamental & derived quantities.

08

27




1b. Determine dimension of a physical quantity.

1c. Calculate different types of errors in measurements.

1d. Illustrate use of vernier caliper and screw gauge for linear measurements.

1.2 Dimension of physical quantity, dimensional analysis & its uses, order of magnitude & significant figures.

1.3 Accuracy & errors, instrumental, systematic and random error, estimation of error-average value, absolute error, relative error & percentage error, numerical.

1.4 Measuring instruments-vernier caliper and micrometer screw gauge.

Unit-II Light

2a. Calculate refractive index of material of prism.

2b. Identify advantages of optical fibre over conducting wire.

2c. Differentiate between types of optical fibre.

2d. Recognise the principle of photometry.

2e. Acquire knowledge about indoor lighting.

2.1 Refraction of light, refractive index and its significance, Refraction through prism, Derivation of Prism formula.

2.2 Total internal reflection of light (TIR), Optical fibre, advantages and disadvantages, construction of optical fibre.

2.3 Transmission characteristics of Optical, fibre, types of optical fibre-step & graded index fibre, Application of optical fibre.

2.4 Luminous flux, luminous intensity, illumination, candela, lumen, illuminance, inverse square law of illuminance, principle of photometry.

2.5 Indoor lighting-direct, indirect, semi-indirect, utilization factor, efficiency of source, maintenance factor, space to height ratio, total luminous flux, numericals.

08

Unit-III Laser

3a. Describe the principle of laser.

3b. Acquire knowledge about He-Ne laser

3c. Identify applications of holography

3.1 Laser, Properties of laser, spontaneous absorption, spontaneous emission and stimulated emission, population inversion, pumping, life time, meta-stable-state.

3.2 Construction, advantages & disadvantages of Helium-Neon Laser, applications of Laser.

3.3 Holography recording and Reconstruction of hologram, Application of holography.

06

Unit-IV Current Electricity

4a. Demonstrate ohm’s law, use of metre bridge to find resistance.

4b. Use potentiometer to find internal resistance.

4c. Identify positive/

4.1 Ohm’s law, Specific resistance, conductance, conductivity, Wheatstone’s network, balancing condition, metre bridge.

4.2 Theory of shunt, fall of potential along wire, potentiometer.

4.3 Effect of temperature on resistance of metals, semiconductors &

08

28




Negative temperature coefficient of resistance of material.

4d. Calculate electrical energy consumed in kWh.

4e. Distinguish between properties of conductor & superconductor.

insulators, temperature coefficient of resistance, positive& negative temperature coefficient of resistance.

4.4 Heating effect of electric current, electric power, electric energy, kilowatt hour.

4.5 Superconductivity, graph of temperature versus resistance for mercury, superconductors, properties and application of superconductors, Numericals.

Unit-V Transfer of Heat & Gas Laws

5a. Illustrate conversion of temperature.

5b. Distinguish between good & bad conductors of heat on the basis of thermal conductivity.

5c. Calculate coefficients of expansion of solids.

5d. Identify the relation between pressure, volume & temperature of gas.

5e. Gain idea about specific heats of gases.

5f. Distinguish between isothermal, adiabatic, isobaric & isochoric process.

5.1 Temperature & heat, Celsius & Fahrenheit scale, conduction, convection, radiation.

5.2 Conduction of heat –variable state, steady state and temperature gradient, law of thermal conductivity, coefficient of thermal conductivity, applications of thermal conductivity.

5.3 Expansion of solids, Coefficient of linear, areal and cubical expansion and relation between them.

5.4 Statement of Boyle’s law, Charle’s law, Gay Lussac’s law, concept of absolute zero, Kelvin scale of temperature.

5.5 General gas equation, universal gas constant, Work done in expanding a gas at constant pressure, specific heats of a gases and relation between them (equation only).

5.6 Isothermal, isobaric and isochoric and adiabatic process, difference between these processes, numericals.

08

Unit-VI (ONLY For CE / ME / PS / AE) Elasticity

6a. Differentiate between elasticity, plasticity & rigidity

6b. Calculate moduli of elasticity of materials.

6c. Illustrate applications of elasticity.

6.1 Deforming force, restoring force, elasticity, plasticity and rigidity.

6.2 Stress and strain with their types, elastic limit, Hooke’s law, moduli of elasticity (Y, η, K) and their significance, Poisson’s ratio.

6.3 Stress-strain diagram for wire under increasing load, factor of safety, applications of elasticity, Numericals.

06

Unit-VII (ONLY For CE / ME / PS / AE) Surface

7a. Acquire knowledge about surface tension of liquids & its effects.

7b. Recognise effects of impurities & temperature on

7.1 Cohesive and adhesive force, range of molecular forces, sphere of influence, surface energy, Surface tension, molecular theory of surface tension.

7.2 Effect impurities and temperature on

06

29




Tension

surface tension of liquid.

7c. Calculate surface tension of liquid.

surface tension, relation between surface tension & surface energy

7.3 Angle of contact, capillary action relation between surface tension, capillary rise, radius of capillary, application of surface tension, numericals.

Unit-VIII (ONLY For CE / ME / PS / AE) Viscosity

8a. Identify applications of Pascal’s law.

8b. Gain knowledge about viscosity of fluids.

8c. Find viscosity of fluids using Stoke’s law

8d. Distinguish between types of flow of fluid.

8e. Identify significance of Reynold’s number.

8.1 Pressure, pressure due to liquid column, hydrostatic paradox, Pascal’s law and its applications.

8.2 Viscosity, velocity gradient, Newton’s law of viscosity, coefficient of viscosity and its unit.

8.3 Stoke’s law, expression for relation between coefficient of viscosity and terminal velocity.

8.4 Types of flow, Streamline and turbulent flow, advantages of streamline flow.

8.5 Critical velocity, Reynold’s number and its significance, Bernoulli’s principle & its applications, application of viscosity, Numericals.

06

Unit-IX (ONLY For CE / ME / PS / AE) Sound and Acoustic

9a. Recognise frequency of audible & other sound waves.

9b. Calculate sound intensity in decibel scale.

9c. Illustrate properties & applications of Ultrasonic waves.

9d. Calculate reverberation time using Sabine formula.

9e. Plan acoustical planning of a hall.

9.1 Introduction to sound, frequency of sound and limits of Audibility, intensity of sound.

9.2 Reflection of sound, absorption coefficient, transmission coefficient, reflection coefficient, Loudness and intensity level, threshold of hearing & pain, Decibel scale.

9.3 Ultrasonic waves-properties & applications.

9.4 Echo, Reverberation, standard reverberation time, Sabine’s formula.

9.5 Condition for good Acoustics, factors affecting acoustical planning of auditorium. Numericals.

08

Unit-VI (only for EE / IF / CM / EL) Electrostatics

6a. Calculate force between two charges using Coulomb’s law.

6b. Illustrate different properties of electric lines of force.

6c. Calculate electric potential due an electric charge.

6d. Identify importance of potential of earth.

6.1 Coulomb’s inverse square law, permittivity of medium, unit charge, electric field, electric field intensity.

6.2 Electric lines of force and their properties, electric flux, Electric flux density and relation between them, Electric flux associated with charge.

6.3 Electric potential, potential difference, potential gradient, dielectric strength, breakdown potential, expression for PD between two points due to point charge, expression for absolute potential at point.

08

30




6.4 Potential due to charged sphere. (three cases), potential of earth, numericals.

Unit-VII (only for EE / IF / CM / EL) Capacitance

7a. Illustrate charging &discharging of capacitor.

7b. Calculate effective capacitance of combination of capacitors.

7c. Identify types of capacitors.

7d. Calculate energy stored by a capacitor.

7.1 Capacitor, Capacitance and its unit, dielectric, effect of dielectric, dielectric constant, dielectric breakdown, Principle of capacitor.

7.2 Charging and discharging of Capacitor, Capacitor in series and parallel.

7.3 Types of capacitor- fixed & variable. 7.4 Expression for capacitance of

parallel plate capacitor, capacitance of spherical and cylindrical capacitor equation only, energy stored by charged capacitor (equation only), numericals.

06

Unit-VIII (only for EE / IF / CM / EL) Photo Electricity and X-rays

8a. Acquire knowledge about photoelectric effect.

8b. Identify characteristics of Photoelectric effect.

8c. Calculate KE of photoelectrons using Einstein’s equation.

8d. Recognise production of X-rays.

8e. Illustrate properties & applications of x- rays.

8.1 Planck’s quantum theory, Photo electric effect, experiment to study photoelectric effect.

8.2 Characteristics of photoelectric effect, threshold frequency, threshold-wavelength, photoelectric work function, stopping potential.

8.3 Einstein’s photoelectric equation, photoelectric Cell and types, applications of photoelectric cell.

8.4 Origin of X-rays, production of X-rays using Coolidge’s X-ray tube, minimum wavelength of X-ray.

8.5 Properties of X-rays, applications of X- rays, numericals.

06

Unit-IX (only for EE / IF / CM / EL) Band Theory of Solids

9a. Classify solids on the basis of band theory.

9b. Classify Semiconductors.

9c. Illustrate forward & reverse bias of P-N Junction diode.

9.1 Energy bands in solids-valence band, conduction band and forbidden energy gap, classification of solids on the basis of band theory : conductor, insulator and semiconductor.

9.2 Properties of semiconductor, classification of semiconductors intrinsic & extrinsic, P type & N type semiconductors.

9.3 P-N junction diode, forward & reverse bias characteristics of P-N junction diode, advantages of semiconductor devices.

06

TOTAL 64

31


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

Units common for all programmes

I Units and measurements 04 02 04 10

II Light 02 04 04 10

III Laser 02 04 02 08

IV Current electricity 02 04 04 10

V Transfer of heat & gas laws 02 04 04 10

Units ONLY FOR CE/ME/PS/AE

VI Elasticity 02 04 02 08

VII Surface tension 02 04 02 08

VII Viscosity 02 02 04 08

IX Sound and Acoustics 02 02 04 08

Units ONLY FOR EE/IF/CM/EL

VI Electrostatics 02 04 02 08

VII Capacitance 02 04 02 08

VIII Photo electricity & X-rays 02 02 04 08

IX Band theory of solids 02 02 04 08

TOTAL 20 30 30 80

Legends: R = Remembrance (Knowledge); U= Understanding; A= Application and above levels (Revised Bloom’s taxonomy)



The tutorial/practical/assignments/tasks should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the competencies. Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in a common list at the beginning of curriculum document for this programme. Faculty should refer to that common list and should ensure that students also acquire those Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes related to affective domain.

Sr. No.

Unit No.


Approx. Hrs. Required

Common practicals

1 I Measure the dimensions of different objects using Vernier caliper 02

2 I Measure the dimensions of different objects using micrometer screw gauge

02

3 II Determine the refractive index of material of prism using spectrometer

02

4 IV Verify ohm’s law and determine resistivity of material of given wire. 02

5 IV Verify law of resistance in series & parallel using metre bridge. 02

6 V Determine coefficient of linear expansion using Pullinger’s apparatus. 02

7 V Verify Boyle’s law 04

8 IV Verify principle of potentiometer. 02

Practicals for CE/ME/PS/AE 0

1 VI Verify Hooke’s law of elasticity and determine Young’s modulus of 04

32

Sr. No.

Unit No.



material of wire using Searle’s apparatus.

2 VII Determine surface tension of water using capillary rise method. 02

3 VIII Verify Stoke’s law of viscosity and determine coefficient of viscosity of given fluid.

04

4 IX Determine coefficient of absorption of sound of given acoustical material.

04

Practicals for EE/IF/CM/EL

1 VII Verify law of capacitance in series/parallel. 02

2 VII Charging & discharging of capacitor and determine its time constant. 04

3 VIII To study I-V characteristic of photoelectric cell. 04

4 IX To study I-V characteristics of PN junction diode in forward/reverse biased condition.

04

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Prepare charts of Vernier caliper, screw gauge, travelling microscope, Spherometer &

spectrometer for lab demonstration. 2. Study acoustical planning of institute’s auditorium hall. 3. Study lighting system of institute’s conference hall.


1. Show videos based on topics in the curriculum (total internal reflection, population inversion, different laws of physics) for better understanding of the concepts.

2. Show videos of practical demonstration before performance of practical for better understanding of practical.


A) Books


1 Engineering Physics R K Gaur & S L Gupta Dhanpat Rai Pub.

2 Applied Physics Prof. Arthur Beiser Tata McGraw hill Pub.

3 Engineering Physics D K Bhattacharya Oxford University press

4 Physics Halliday & Resnick Wiley India


1. www.physicsclassroom.com 2. www.physics.org 3. www.physics.brown.edu 4. http://scienceworld.wolfram.com/physics/ 5. http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase 6. www.msu.edu/~brechtjo/physics 7. http://www.rp-photonics.com/laser_applications.html 8. http://webphysics.davidson.edu/alumni/jimn/He-Ne/Pages/Theory.htm 9. http://physix_jun.tripod.com/fibres_4.htm 10. http://www.suite101.com/content/optics-total-internal-reflection-a51310 11. http://teachers.web.cern.Ch/teachers/archive/HST2001/accelerators/superconductivity

/superconductivity.htm 12. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acoustics

33

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications 1. Vernier Caliper (LC = 0.02mm) 2. Micrometer screw gauge ( LC = 0.01mm) 3. Aneroid barometer 4. Digital stop watch 5. Travelling Microscope 6. Regulated power supply 7. Apparatus to verify Boyles law 8. Stoke’s App to measure viscosity 9. Metre bridge 10. Searle's apparatus for Young’s modulus 11. Pullinger's apparatus 12. Gas burner with regulator, LPG gas cylinder and lighter 13. Spectrometer 14. Bunsen’s photometer. 15. Ammeter, voltmeter, galvanometer, rheostat, resistance box 16. Potentiometer.


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M M L H L L

CO2 H M L L M L

CO3 H M L L M

CO4 H M M L M L M L

CO5 H M M L M M

CO6 H M L L M M

CO7 H L L M L M L L

CO8 H M L M L L

CO9 H M L M M L

CO10 H L L M L L L L


34

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE COURSE : Applied Chemistry (CHY) COURSE CODE : 6106 TEACHING & EXAMINATION SCHEME


Hrs / week Credits

Online Exam. Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 02 Max. 80# 20# 100 -- -- 50 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- 20 --

# indicates online examination 1.0 RATIONALE:

Chemistry is the basic science course which is essential to all engineering programmes. The basic aim of teaching science is to develop in the students the habit of scientific inquiry, ability to establish the cause and effect. The study of basic concepts of chemistry like atomic structure, water treatment, metals and alloys, corrosion, lubricants, non metallic materials, fuels, environmental effects etc. will help the students to understand engineering courses where the emphasis is laid on the application of these concepts. Teaching of chemistry should be aimed at developing the right type of aptitude in the students and the ability to predict the result under given conditions. Thus good foundation in basic science will help the students in their self development to cope up with continuous flow of innovation.


The student will be able to, 1. Develop scientific attitude in students. 2. Apply knowledge of chemistry in engineering situations. 3. Develop in students the habit of scientific enquiry, ability to establish cause and effect.



1. Apply the principles of chemistry to engineering situations. 2. Apply knowledge to correlate the properties of materials, their engineering uses and

protection. 3. Write electronic configuration of various elements. 4. Apply various applications of electrolysis in engineering situations. 5. Illustrate various methods of softening of hard water. 6. Use the appropriate metals and alloys for different engineering applications. 7. Differentiate various types of corrosion and gain knowledge on control measures

associated with corrosion 8. Select lubricants for machines. 9. Enlist the various characteristics of good fuel.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Topics & subtopics Hours

Unit-I Atomic Structure

1a. Describe structure of an atom

1b. Explain Bohr’s theory and distinguish between orbit and orbital

1.1 Structure of an atom, fundamental particles of an atom, concept of atomic number, mass number.

1.2 Bohr’s theory, orbit, orbital, shapes of orbital, energy level, sub energy level

06

35




1c. Describe rules for arrangement of electrons

1d. Give electronic configuration

1e. Describe the different types of compounds

1f. Explain the formation of various electrovalent and covalent compounds

1.3 Hund’s rule, Aufbau principle, Rules for distribution of electrons in shell and subshells.

1.4 Electronic configuration of atoms having atomic number 1-30

1.5 Electrovalent and covalent compounds, electrovalency and covalency

1.6 Formation of covalent compound e.g. H2O, CH4, O2, N2, C2H2

1.7 Formation of electrovalent compound e.g. NaCl, CaCl2, AlCl3

Unit-II Electro chemistry

2a. Explain basic concepts of electrochemistry.

2b. Explain theory of ionization and factors affecting it

2c. Explain mechanism of electrolysis with examples.

2d. Describe faraday’s first and second laws and solve numerical.

2e. Explain the applications of electrolysis

2f. Describe the construction and working of cells

2.1 Definition of electrochemistry, atom, ion,

electrode, cell, electrolysis, electrolytes,

non-electrolytes, anode, cathode.

2.2 Arrhenius theory of ionization, degree of

ionization, factors affecting degree of

ionization.

2.3 Electrolysis, mechanism, electrolysis of

fused NaCl, aqueous NaCl using platinum

electrode, CuSO4 solution using Copper

electrode.

2.4 Faraday’s first and second law,

2.5 Numericals on Faraday’s laws.

2.6 Process of electroplating and electro

refining

2.7 Types of cell- e.g. Dry cell, Ni-Cd cell,

introduction to solar cell

08

Unit-III Water

3a. Explain sources, impurities, properties of water.

3b. Differentiate between hard and soft water

3c. Describe the ill effect of hard water in domestic and industrial field

3d. Explain the different methods for removal of hardness of water.

3e. Describe the different treatments of drinking water

3f. Explain the concept of pH and pOH numerical related with it, applications of pH in engineering.

3.1 Sources of water- Rain, surface,

underground water. Impurities in water-

suspended, colloidal, dissolved, biological

3.2 Physical and chemical properties of

water.

3.3 Hard and soft water. Types of hardness

of water, Salts producing hardness of

water, Units of hardness of water.

3.4 Domestic field- cooking, washing,

bathing, drinking. Industrial field- paper,

textile, dye, sugar industry.

3.5 Temporary hardness- boiling, Clark’s

method.

3.6 Permanent hardness- Permutit’s method,

ion exchange method.

3.7 Methods of purification of water:

Screening, Sedimentation, coagulation,

filtration, Sterilization of water.

3.8 Definition of pH and pOH, pH scale and

numerical.

10

36




3.9 Applications of pH in engineering. -city

water supply, corrosion, effluent

treatment, electroplating.

Unit-IV Metals

4a. Explain the basic concepts of metallurgy.

4b. Describe different characteristics of metal.

4c. Explain the metallurgy of iron.

4d. Describe the physical properties and applications of metals.

4.1 Definition of ore, mineral, gangue

4.2 Hardness, toughness, brittleness, tensile

strength, malleability, ductility,

machinability, weldability

4.3 Flow sheet of metallurgy

4.4 Steps of metallurgy :

a. Concentration: physical, chemical.

b. Reduction: smelting, alumino thermic

process.

c. Refining: poling, liquation, distillation,

electrorefining.

4.5 Physical properties and applications of

Fe, Cu, Al, Cr, Ni, Sn, P

08

Unit-V Alloys

5a. Describe the meaning of alloy, its preparation and its purposes of formation.

5b. Explain the classification of alloys and their applications

5.1 Definition of alloy, different methods of preparation of alloy,

5.2 Purposes of formation of an alloy. 5.3 Classification of alloys

Ferrous alloy- alloys steel and its applications.

Non ferrous alloy-Copper alloy-brass, bronze, gun metal, Monel metal Aluminium alloy-Duralumin

Solder alloy and its types.

06

Unit-VI Corrosion

6a. Describe magnitude of corrosion, meaning of corrosion, types of corrosion

6b. Explain the factors affecting the atmospheric and immersed corrosion

6c. Explain different methods of protection of metal from corrosion

6.1 Magnitude of corrosion, definition of corrosion, types of corrosion- a) Atmospheric corrosion- definition,

types – b) corrosion due to oxygen, mechanism

of corrosion due to oxygen, nature of film and its role in corrosion process

c) Corrosion due to other gases 6.2 Immersed corrosion- definition, it’s

mechanism, galvanic and concentration cell corrosion

6.3 Factors affecting atmospheric and immersed corrosion

6.4 Methods of protection of metal from corrosion- hot dipping, metal spraying, sherardizing, electroplating of metal cladding, organic coating-paints and varnish

10

Unit-VII Lubricants

7a. Describe lubricants, its function and classification of lubricants.

7b. Explain lubrication and it’s types

7.1 Definition of lubricant, function of lubricants, classification of lubricants.

7.2 Definition of lubrication, types of lubrication

7.3 Physical properties- viscosity, viscosity index, oiliness, flash and fire point,

08

37




7c. Describe physical and chemical properties of lubricants

7d. Explain selection of lubricants for various machines

volatility, cloud and pour point. 7.4 Chemical properties- acid value,

saponification value, emulsification. 7.5 Properties and names of lubricants used

for various machines like delicate instruments, heavy load and low speed machine, gears, cutting tools, I.C. Engine, steam engine

Unit-VIII Fuels

8a. Describe fuels, characteristics of good fuel, types of fuel

8b. Describe solid fuel-e.g. coal in detail

8c. Describe liquid fuel e.g. -petroleum

8d. Describe gaseous fuel their advantages

8e. Distinguish between solid liquid and gaseous fuels

8.1 Definition of fuel, characteristics of good fuel, classification of fuel

8.2 Solid fuel-e.g. coal, it’s types, properties of good coal, selection of coal, analysis of coal, determination of C and H in coal

8.3 Liquid fuel-e.g. petrol, classification of petrol, refining of petrol

8.4 Gaseous fuel e.g. LPG, natural gas, biogas

8.5 Advantages of gaseous fuel over solid and liquid fuels

8.6 Comparison between solid, liquid and gaseous fuels

08

TOTAL 64


Unit No

Unit title Distribution of Theory marks

R level U level A level Total

1 Atomic Structure 04 02 02 08

2 Electrochemistry 04 04 04 12

3 Water 04 04 04 12

4 Metals 04 02 04 10

5 Alloys 02 02 02 06

6 Corrosion 04 02 06 12

7 Lubricants 04 02 04 10

8 Fuels 04 02 04 10

TOTAL 30 20 30 80

Legends: R = Remembrance (Knowledge); U = Understanding; A = Application and above levels (Revised Bloom’s taxonomy) Note: This specification table shall be treated as a general guideline for students and teachers. The actual distribution of marks in the question paper may vary slightly from above table.


The tutorial/practical/assignment/task should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the desired programme outcome/course outcome. Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in the mapping matrix for this course. Faculty should ensure that students also acquire Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes related to affective domain.

38

Sr. No.

Unit No.



1 to 5 I Inorganic qualitative analysis of any five solutions 10

6 II Determination of electrochemical equivalent of copper. 02

7 to 8 III Strength of given acidic solution using standard base solution. 04

9 III Determination of pH of different unknown solutions. 02

10 III Determination of chloride content in given water sample. 02

11 to 12 III Determination of hardness of water 04

13 V Determination of % of Fe in given ferrous alloy sample. 02

14 VI To find relation between decrease in weight due to corrosion of metal and time.

02

15 VII Determination of viscosity of given lubricating oil. 02

16 VIII Determination of % of moisture in given coal sample by proximate analysis.

02

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Draw structures and write electronic configurations of atoms having atomic number 1-30. 2. Testing of water samples. 3. Sampling and collection of coal.


1. CAI package, video demonstration, charts, models, visits and expert seminar/lecture.


A) Books


1 Engineering Chemistry Jain & Jain Dhanpat Rai and Sons

2 A Text Book of Polytechnic Chemistry

V. P. Mehta Jain Brothers

3 Engineering Chemistry S. S. Dara S. Chand Publication

4 Industrial Chemistry B. K. Sharma Goel Publication

5 Environmental Chemistry & Pollution control

S. S. Dara S. Chand Publication

6 Engineering Chemistry M. M. Uppal Khanna Publisher New Delhi


1. http://chemistry.osu.edu/~woodward/ch121/ch2_atoms.htm 2. http://www.nyu.edu/pages/mathmol/textbook/atoms.html 3. www.chemguide.co.uk/atoms/properties/gcse.html 4. http://www.water-research.net/index.php/water-treatment/tools/hard-water-

hardness 5. http://www.unitedutilities.com/documents/WaterhardnessFactSheet.pdf 6. http://www.explainthatstuff.com/alloys.html 7. http://www.gordonengland.co.uk/xcorrosion.htm 8. http://cuiet.info/notes/chemistry/Lubricants.pdf 9. http://www.ignou.ac.in/upload/unit-3.pdf

http://www.water-research.net/index.php/water-treatment/tools/hard-water-hardness

http://www.water-research.net/index.php/water-treatment/tools/hard-water-hardness

http://www.unitedutilities.com/documents/WaterhardnessFactSheet.pdf

http://www.explainthatstuff.com/alloys.html

http://www.gordonengland.co.uk/xcorrosion.htm

39

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications 1. Muffle furnace 2. Distillation Plant 3. Computer lab with 20 Computers for online theory exam. 4. Digital pH meter 5. Ostwald’s viscometer 6. Electronic weighing balance (0 to 100gm capacity). 7. Digital Stop watch. 8. Lovi Bond comparator 9. Regulated DC power supply 10. Rheostat 11. Ammeter


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M M L L L

CO2 H M M L L

CO3 H M L

CO4 H M L

CO5 H M L M L

CO6 H M M M L

CO7 H M M L

CO8 H M M L

CO9 H L


40

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / ME / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE COURSE : Engineering Graphics (EGR) COURSE CODE : 6107 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


02 -- 04 06 -- Max. -- -- -- 25 -- 25 50

Min. -- -- -- 10 -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

Engineering Graphics is the language of engineers. The concepts of Engineering Graphics are used to develop & express the ideas and convey the instructions, which are used to carry out jobs in the Engineering field. This preliminary course aims at building a foundation for the further course in drawing and other allied courses.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand the use of drawing tools and equipments. 2. Understand the significance of engineering curves for various applications. 3. Understand the projections of point and line inclined to one reference plane. 4. Interpret the pictorial view and understand orthographic projection of the simple object. 5. Interpret the orthographic projection and understand pictorial view of the simple object. 6. Understand the significance of sectional view in the drawing.



1. Draw the engineering curves for given engineering applications. 2. Draw the projections of point and lines inclined to one reference plane only. 3. Draw and dimension orthographic projections of given object. 4. Interpret orthographic projections of object and draw isometric view. 5. Draw sectional view of simple objects as per IS convention.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Drawing Instruments and their Uses

1a. Use Instruments for drawing, Scales, Lines, & their applications.

1.1 Letters and numbers (single stroke vertical)

1.2 Convention of lines and their applications.

1.3 I.S. codes for planning and layout. 1.4 Scale (reduced, enlarged & full size)

plain scale and diagonal scale. 1.5 Sheet layout. 1.6 Geometrical constructions and

drawing polygons

04

Unit-II Engineering Curves

2a. Draw Conic curves, involutes, Cycloid.

2b. State the applications of engineering curves.

2.1 Methods for drawing an ellipse concentric circle, directrix focus and arc of circle method.

2.2 Methods for drawing parabola by directrix focus and rectangular method.

08

41




2.3 Methods for drawing a hyperbola by directrix focus and rectangular method.

2.4 Procedure for drawing involutes of circle and polygon (up to hexagon)

2.5 Procedure for drawing cycloid, epicycloid and hypocycloid

Unit-III Projections of Point and Line

3a. Draw the projection of point

3b. Draw projection of line

3.1 Projection of point in the different quadrants.

3.2 Projection of line parallel to one plane and inclined to another reference plane only.

04

Unit-IV Orthographic Projections

4a. Interpret & draw orthographic views from given pictorial view.

4.1 Concept of Orthographic projections. 4.2 Conversion of pictorial view into

Orthographic views only first angle projection method for simple objects.

06

Unit-V Isometric Projections

5a. Interpretation of isometric view.

5b. Draw isometric view from given orthographic views

5.1 Use of Isometric scale. 5.2 Comparison of true scale with

isometric scale 5.3 Conversion of orthographic views into

isometric View / projection

06

Unit-VI Sectional View

6a. Draw sectional view of simple drawing

6.1 Representation of sectional plane 6.2 Conversion of orthographic views into

sectional View

04

TOTAL 32

5.0 SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH MARKS (Theory)

Not Applicable 6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/PRACTICALS/TASKS:

The tutorial/practical/assignment/task should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the desired programme outcome/course outcome.

Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in the mapping matrix for this course. Faculty should ensure that students also acquire Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes related to affective domain.

Sr. No.

Unit No.



1 I Two sheet on letters, numbers and representation of lines and redraw the figures.

08

2 II Sheet on six engineering curves 12

3 III Sheet on projections of line. ( 04 problems) 12

4 IV Sheet on orthographic projection.( 02 problems) 12

5 V Sheet on isometric views and projection. ( 04 problems) 12

6 VI Sheet on sectional view. ( 02 problems) 08

TOTAL 64

42


1. Collect the information about application of engineering curves.

2. Sketch the orthographic views of simple engineering product in sketch book.

3. Sketch isometric view of simple engineering product in sketch book.

4. Sketch sectional view of simple engineering product in sketch book.

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Show Three Dimensional models of different objects. 2. Use software’s, CAI packages for better imagination.


A) Books


1 Engineering Drawing N. D. Bhatt Charotar Publishing House

2 Engineering Drawing P. J. Shaha S. Chand

3 Engineering Drawing and Graphics K. Venugopal New Age International


1. AutoCAD 2. Solid works.


Not applicable 10.0 MAPPING MATRIX OF PO’S AND CO’S:

Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H L

CO2 H H

CO3 H M M M L L

CO4 H M M M L

CO5 H M H


43

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in IF / CM / EL COURSE : Fundamentals of Electrical Technology (FET) COURSE CODE : 6113 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- 50 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course is introduced in the curriculum of Information technology, Computer technology and Electronics & Telecommunication Engineering to understand basic principles of electric devices & circuits & also to understand the operations of electrical drives. Student can apply knowledge to solve the electrical problems in their field.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand basics of electrical power. 2. Know various laws of AC and DC circuits. 3. Derive various terms of related to electrical circuits and machines 4. Understand construction, working and applications of various types of motor. 5. Describe need and circuit operations of UPS and stabilizers 6. Understand safety precautions while working with electrical installations 7. Understand Battery construction and maintenance 8. Understand wiring system for installations.



1. Apply basic terms and laws of electricity to understand an electric circuit operation. 2. Identify and state type of induced emf. 3. Derive and calculate various electrical parameters related to electrical circuit. 4. Explain transformer working principle and calculate its parameter. 5. Identify applications of DC motor and stepper motor. 6. State various single phase induction motor, know its applications 7. Compare Online and Offline state of UPS and know specification of batteries. 8. List various component with specifications used for electrical installation 9. Practise safety precaution while working with electrical installation.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:

Unit Major Learning Outcomes (in cognitive domain)


Unit-I

Fundamentals of Electricity

1a. State Ohm’s law 1b. Define various terms of

electricity 1c. Solve series and parallel

resistive network. 1d. Understand and apply

Kirchhoff’s laws

1.1 Electrical potential, current resistance, ohm’s law

1.2 Electrical circuits, series & parallel resistance, current & voltage distribution, Kirchhoff’s laws & its applications

08

1e. Describe temperature coefficient of resistance

1f. State definitions of work, power and energy and its SI

1.3 Temperature coefficient of resistance

1.4 Work, power, energy, the SI units

44



units 1g. Apply various effect of electric

current 1h. Apply various rules.

1.5 Effects of electric current – magnetic, chemical, heating effect. Fleming’s rules, right hand gripping rule.

Unit-II Electromagnetic Induction

2a. Describe and apply Faraday’s law of Electromagnetic induction.

2b. Distinguish between static and dynamically induced emf

2c. Define self and mutually induced emf.

2d. State Lenz’s law 2e. Explain and calculate energy

stored in magnetic field.

2.1 Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction Fleming’s right hand rule

2.2 Static & dynamically induced emf, Lenz’s law, self & mutual inductance.

2.3 Energy stored in magnetic field

06

Unit-III AC Fundamentals

3a. Differentiate between single phase and three phase AC supply

3b. Define terms related to alternating quantity.

3c. Differentiate between RMS and average values of alternating quantity.

3d. Elaborate concept of reactance and impedance &power factor.

3e. Solve simple numerical on AC circuit.

3f. Differentiate between Star and Delta network.

3.1 Single phase & three phase AC supply

3.2 Concept of Cycle, Time period, Frequency, amplitude, RMS & average values of an Alternating quantity

3.3 Voltage & current relationship for pure resistive, inductive & capacitive circuits [No derivation]

3.4 Concept of reactance impedance, power factor, simple AC circuits & simple numerical based on it.

3.5 Current, Voltage & Power relationship for balanced three phase star & delta connected systems.

10

Unit-IV Single Phase Transformer

4a. State Principle and function of the transformer

4b. Identify parts and types of transformer

4c. Derive emf and transformation ratio equation of transformer

4d. Describe various losses of transformer

4e. Calculate regulation and efficiency of transformer

4f. Explain Isolation and pulse transformer.

4.1 Single Phase Transformer: Function & principle of operation, construction, classification of transformer according to construction and Voltage level.

4.2 EMF equation, voltage ratio, turns ratio, Current ratio, kVA rating. (Simple numerical)

4.3 Regulation, losses in transformer, efficiency. (Simple numerical)

4.4 Isolation transformer and pulse transformer.

06

Unit-V DC Motor

5a. Explain constructional details of DC shunt motor.

5b. Describe working of DC shunt motor.

5c. Explain types and working of Stepper motor.

5d. Know applications of motors.

5.1 DC Shunt motor: Working principle, construction, operation, applications.

5.2 Stepper motor : types, working, applications

08

45



Unit-VI Single Phase Induction motor

6a. Enlist types of single phase induction motor

6b. Explain working of single phase induction motor

6c. Know applications of single phase induction motor.

6.1 Single phase induction motor: Construction, Classification, working and its applications

06

Unit-VII UPS & stabilizers

7a. Elaborate necessity of UPS 7b. Differentiate between online

and offline UPS 7c. Draw block diagram of UPS 7d. Write function of each part of

UPS 7e. Describe use and types of

batteries used in UPS 7f. Define charging and

discharging of batteries 7g. State meaning of Tickle

charging 7h. Define Ampere hour capacity

of battery, Specification of UPS.

7i. Elaborate maintenance need and schedule of batteries.

7j. Explain need of stabilizers 7k. Describe function of each part

of stabilizers.

7.1 UPS: necessity of UPS for computers

7.2 Concept of on line and off line UPS

7.3 Block diagram of simple UPS, function of each block in short

7.4 Concept of cell/ battery, Types of batteries

7.5 Meaning of charging, discharging, & Tickle charging of battery. Ampere hours capacity of battery

7.6 Maintenance of lead acid cell 7.7 Specification related with UPS

& their meaning. 7.8 Stabilizers (Servo): necessity

of stabilizers for computers, block diagram, functions of each block.

07

Unit VIII Electrical Wiring

8a. Identify types of wires 8b. Explain types of wiring system

used for computer room 8c. Differentiate between light

and power circuit.

8.1 Electrical wiring: Types of wires, meaning of 1\18, 3\20, 7\20 wires,

8.2 Simple wiring system like casing capping, Conduit wiring.

8.3 Meaning of power & lighting circuits used in computer room by giving layout of wiring diagram of small computer room.

07

Unit-IX Electrical Safety

9a. Enlist types of fuses 9b. Describe Function of earthing,

MCCB, ELCB 9c. Explain types of earthing 9d. Elaborate Safety precautions.

9.1 Necessity of Fuses, MCCB, ELCB, Types of fuses,

9.2 Necessity of Earthing, Earthing types, plate & pipe earthings.

9.3 Safety practices and Precautions to be taken while working with electrical installation.

06

TOTAL 64

46


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Fundamentals of Electricity 04 04 04 12

II Electromagnetic induction 02 06 02 10

III AC fundamentals 02 04 04 10

IV Single phase transformer 02 04 02 08

V DC Motor 02 04 02 08

VI Single Phase Induction Motor 02 04 02 08

VII UPS & stabilizers for computers 02 06 -- 08

VIII Electrical Wiring 02 06 -- 08

IX Electrical Safety 04 04 -- 08

TOTAL 22 42 16 80





Sr. No.

Unit No.



1 I Verification of ohm’s law 02

2 I Measurement of current & voltage in series resistive circuits. 02

3 I Measurement of current & voltage in parallel resistive circuits. 02

4 I Verification of Kirchhoff’s current law and Kirchhoff’s voltage law. 04

5 III Verification of Resistance with temperature. 02

6 III Verification of current & voltage relationships for. I ) star connection II) Delta connection.

06

7 IV Voltage & current ratio of a single phase transformer. 04

8 V Demonstration and identification of D.C machines parts. 02

9 VII Demonstration of different parts of UPS, servo stabilizers, write down specification of UPS & their meaning.

04

10 VIII Demonstration of different types of wires, wiring systems, switches & accessories by visiting to computer laboratory in institute. (Report should be written on it)

04

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Study of Panel wiring for IT panels & racks by observation through visits. 2. Collect at least one example of electrical Equipment/ Machine representing types of

induced emf.

47

3. Collect information of domestic appliances which driven by single phase induction motor. 4. Observe and enlist use of stepper motor in computer peripherals. 5. Measure gauge of electrical wire find its current carrying capacity.


Not Applicable


A) Books


1 Basics of electrical Engineering V. N. Mittal Tata McGraw Hill

2 Electrical Technology Vol. I &II B.L. Theraja S. Chand & Co.

3 Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering

M.N. Mittal Everest Publishers House

4 A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurement & Instrumentation

A.K. Sawhney Tata McGraw Hill

5 Electrical Technology Edward Hughes E.L.B.S.


1. http://www.howstuffworks.com

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications 1. Three phase Auto transformer 2. Single Phase Transformer 3. Resistive load bank 4. Demo model of DC Machine 5. UPS


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H L

CO2 H L

CO3 H H

CO4 H H L

CO5 H H

CO6 H L

CO7 H M L

CO8 H M L H

CO9 H M M


http://www.howstuffworks.com/

48

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Electronic Workshop Practice (EWP) COURSE CODE : 6114 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


-- -- 04 04 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE: This course will help the students to have practical knowledge regarding various instruments, & will develop skills while handling tools, instruments, PCBS. It helps to know the basic procedure in designing any electronic circuit. Students will know how to assemble the circuits, test it & troubleshoot any problem if any.

2.0 COURSE OBJECTIVES: The student will be able to,

1. Acquire basic skills of technician like testing, measurement etc. 2. Understand the functions of different active and passive components used in electronic

circuits. 3. State the specifications of active and passive components 4. Assemble and troubleshoot simple electronic circuits. 5. Test self-built electronic circuits comprising of discrete electronic components. 6. Measure different electrical parameters.

3.0 COURSE OUTCOMES: The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes:

1. Identify different active and passive components. 2. Read and interpret electronic circuit diagrams. 3. Assemble and test electronic circuits. 4. Troubleshoot electronic circuits. 5. Identify faulty component(s) in an electronic circuit.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:

Unit Major Practical Learning Outcomes

(in psychomotor domain)


Unit-I Tools used in Electronic workshop

1a. Selection and use of different tools.

1b. Identification of different tools.

1c. State the Specifications of tools.

1.1 Nose pliers, wire stripper, screw- Drivers, align keys, align screw, cutter, hand hacksaw, soldering iron, de-soldering pump, crimping tools and cable testers.

1.2 Identification, Selection and use of the tools.

04

Unit-II Electronics Components

2a. Draw Symbols & Identify different electronic components.

2b. Test different passive and active components.

2c. State the Specifications of electronics components. (Use of data book)

2.1 Identification and testing of passive and active components

2.2 Passive components: Resistor, Capacitor, Inductor

2.3 Active components: Diode, LED Bipolar Junction Transistor, Field Effect Transistor (FET), Uni junction Transistor (UJT), Silicon Controlled

12

49

Unit Major Practical Learning Outcomes

(in psychomotor domain)


Rectifier (SCR), DIAC, TRIAC, IC’S and SMD.

Unit-III Analog and Digital Meters

3a. Draw front panel of analog and digital meters.

3b. Identify front panel controls of different analog and digital meters.

3c. Measurement of parameters using an analog and digital meter.

3d. List the specifications of an analog and digital meter. (Use of data book)

3.1 Need of Analog and Digital meters 3.2 Analog meters: Voltmeter and

Ammeter. 3.3 Multimeter: Analog and digital

multimeter. 3.4 Measurement of electrical

parameters using an analog and digital multimeter.

12

Unit-IV Electronic Equipments

4a. Draw front panel controls of different electronics equipments

4b. Identify the front panel controls of electronic equipments.

4c. Measurement of parameters using measuring equipments.

4d. State the specifications of electronic equipments. (Use of data book / Manuals)

4.1 Need of electronic equipments. 4.2 Regulated power supply. 4.3 Cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO). 4.4 Function generator.

12

Unit-V Cables, connectors and Switches.

5a. Draw labelled diagrams of cables, connectors and switches.

5b. State use of cables, connectors and switches.

5c. State the Specifications of cables, connectors and Switches. ( Use of data book)

5.1 Cable: Flat, Ribbon, Co-axial, twisted pair, Fiber optic cable.

5.2 Connector : PCB edge connector, FRC connector, D-type, BNC, TNC, MCB, RJ-45, RS-232, USB, Ethernet.

5.3 Switches: SPST, SPDT, Toggle, thumbwheel, rotary, slide, micro-switch, membrane.

12

Unit-VI PCB Making & Mini Project

6a. Use of Software for circuit and PCB artwork designing

6b. Select and draw electronic circuit of assigned mini-project

6c. Use of breadboard and general purpose PCB

6d. Identify the faults. 6e. Fabrication of PCB: etching,

drilling, soldering and troubleshooting of circuit.

6.1 PCB: Types of PCB’s- General purpose, Glass epoxy, paper phenolic, Single Sided, double Sided, Selection parameters and applications of PCB.

6.2 Drawing electronic circuit, Designing PCB layout and artwork, Screen printing, photo printing method, drilling, Mounting of components and soldering.

6.3 PCB Layout of Half wave, full wave rectifier and single stage CE amplifier using Express PCB software.

6.4 Build and test electronic circuit on PCB.

12

TOTAL 64

50

5.0 SUGGESTED EXERCISES/PRACTICALS:

S. No.

Unit No.



1 I Demonstration for identification and use of different tools. : Nose pliers, wire stripper, screwdrivers, align keys, align screw, cutter, soldering iron, de-soldering pump, crimping tools.

06

2 II To identify and test passive components: Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors with color codes.

06

3 II To identify and test Active components: Diodes, Transistors (BJT, FET, UJT), SCR, TRIAC, DIAC, IC’S and SMD’S.

06

4 III To identify and measure AC &DC voltage and AC & DC current using analog Meters (Voltmeter and Ammeter)

04

5 III To identify and measure the values resistance, voltage and current using analog and digital Multimeter.

04

6 IV

To State use of front panel controls of Regulated Power Supply and Identification of different circuits from Regulated power supply.

06

7 IV To State use of front panel controls of Cathode Ray Oscilloscope and measure the Voltage and Frequency.

04

8 IV To State use of front panel controls of Function Generator and measure the Voltage and Frequency at different waveforms.

04

9 V To identify and test to demonstrate various types of cables and connectors and switches. A- Cables: Flat, Ribbon, Co-axial, Twisted pair, Fiber optic cable. B- Connectors: PCB edge connector, FRC connector, D-type, BNC, TNC, RJ-45, RS-232, USB connectors. C-Switches: SPST, SPDT, Toggle, thumbwheel, rotary, slide, Micro-switch, Membrane switch.

06

10 VI Implement the simple electronic circuit using breadboard. 06

11 VI Demonstration to draw circuit schematic, layout and artwork using one of the PCB making software mentioned below. (Express PCB, Free PCB, EAGLE PCB, workbench etc.)

06

12 VI Mini-project Prepare PCB (layout, artwork designed by student) for assigned electronic circuits (Mini project group may consist of 3-4 students)

06

TOTAL 64

6.0 SUGGESTED STUDENT ACTIVITIES:

Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Prepare specification table for electronic components and tools and write down the

information about specifications, manufacturers and their cost. 2. Download data sheets of Diode, Transistors and ICs like 78xx, 79xx. 3. Prepare specification table for following measuring and testing equipments: CRO, Function

generator and regulated power supply. 4. Assemble simple electronic circuit on breadboard. 5. Prepare layout and artwork of half and full wave rectifier circuits using PCB making

software.

51

7.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Show animation videos to demonstrate the working principles and constructional features

of different types of electronics components and equipments, 2. Arrange expert lecture of an Industry Person/Trained Faculties in the area of core

electronics. 3. Arrange an industrial visit to PCB Making/ assembling unit.

8.0 SUGGESTED LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) Books


1 Handbook of components for electronics

Harper Charles A Laxmi Enterprise, Bombay

2 Electronic component Handbook Thomas H. Jones Reston publishing company

3 Electronic Materials & component S. M. Dhir Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd; New Delhi

4 Printed Circuit Boards Walter C. Bosshart Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd; New Delhi

5 Troubleshooting Electronic Equipment

R.S. Khandpur Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd; New Delhi


1. http://www.alldatasheet.com 2. http://www.allelectronics.com 3. http://www.techniks.com 4. http://www.aplab.com 5. http://www.kpsec.freeuk.com


1. Tools, Analog Voltmeters & Ammeters, Analog & Digital Multimeters. 2. Cathode Ray Oscilloscope 3. Regulated power Supply 4. Function generator. 5. Cable, connectors and switches 6. Breadboards 7. PCB making machineries and equipments 8. Deep coating machine, UV exposure unit 9. Etching machine. 10. Drilling machine, Shearing machine, developing negative and making PCB.


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 L H H H M

CO2 H H H H M

CO3 H H H M

CO4 H H H M

CO5 H H H H M


http://www.alldatasheet.com/

http://www.allelectronics.com/

http://www.techniks.com/

http://www.aplab.com/

http://www.kpsec.freeuk.com/

52

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Computer Applications (COA) COURSE CODE : 6115 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme Hrs / week

Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


01 -- 02 03 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

It describes the facts, concept, principles and Techniques of computers. It describes the structure of computer and basic operations on computer as well as its peripherals. It focuses on the operating system used for a desktop computer. It describes application packages used in storing and use of information and office automation.


The student will be able to, 1. Use functions of hardware & software components of a computer system. 2. Use and handle the operating system as the interface to the computer system. 3. Set the parameter required for effective use of hardware combined with and application

software’s. 4. Use file managers, word processors, spreadsheets, presentation software’s and Internet. 5. Use various applications of the Internet.


The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes: 1. Explain a computer system and hardware and software components and operating

system. 2. Explain system unit of computer 3. Explain and use MS-WORD. 4. Explain and use MS-EXCEL. 5. Explain and use MS-POWERPOINT. 6. Explain the concept of Internet

53

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:

Units Major Learning Outcomes



Unit-I

1a. Introduction of computers

1b. Types & Applications of computer

1.1 History of computers 1.2 Types Of Computer and Parts Of computer 1.3 Concept of hardware & Architecture of

computer

02

Introduction to Computer

1c. Components of computer

1d. Introduction to Operating system

1.4 Monitor, Mouse, Keyboard, Disk, CPU, Printer, Scanner, Modem, Video, Sound cards, Speakers.

1.5 Windows Operating System. 1.6 Concept of Windows-Arranging, Moving,

Resizing, Opening and Closing of windows, Windows Explorer

1.7 Folder/ File Management-Search, copy, delete and rename files and folders, Windows Desktop

1.8 Windows Accessories: Notepad, Word Pad, Paint

Unit-II System Unit

2a. system unit 2b. Memory and

microprocessor

2.1 Input unit, output unit, system unit--Computer peripherals—motherboards.

2.2 Memory and its types, SMPS, connectors, Expansion Cards.

02

Unit-III Word Processing Software - MS-WORD

3a. Introduction to MS-word

3b. Menus of ms- Word 3c. basic operations of

MS-Word 3d. introduction to

Editors

3.1 Opening a document 3.2 Edit menu 3.3 Format Menu – Font, Paragraph, Bullets,

Borders 3.4 Table formatting 3.5 Spell-check, mail-merge Inserting picture,

word art, header footer 3.6 Printing document 3.7 Equation editor 3.8 Examples of Editors-Edit Plus. Turbo C

editor

02

Unit-IV Data Analysis Software - MS-Excel

4a. Introduction to EXCEL.

4b. Use of worksheet 4c. Use of formula in

Excel 4d. Basic of worksheet

formatting

4.1 Basic worksheet skill. 4.2 Entering worksheet data. 4.3 Speed data entry. 4.4 Worksheet editing. 4.5 Auto correct worksheet 4.6 Cell editing. 4.7 Finding & replacing. 4.8 Inserting & Deleting cells, Rows & columns 4.9 Formulae. 4.10 Worksheet formatting. 4.11 Auto formatting worksheets. 4.12 Chart wizard 4.13 Conditional formatting

04

Unit-V Presentations software - MS-Power Point

5a. Introduction of power point

5b. Use the features of Power point

5c. creating slides

5.1 Creating new presentation 5.2 Slide, Slide sorter, Notes page views 5.3 Saving & printing the work 5.4 Using various slide Designs for single and

multiple slides 5.5 Adding art. 5.6 Adding Custom animation & Slide Transition

04

54

Units Major Learning Outcomes



5.7 Editing individual slide 5.8 Updating text & text boxes 5.9 Action Buttons

Unit-VI Internet

6a. Introduction of Internet

6b. Use of Internet 6c. Basic application of

Internet 6d. study of browser

and search engines

6.1 Concept: Network 6.2 Types of Networks-LAN, WAN, MAN 6.3 Internet basic terminology 6.4 Client, server concepts 6.5 Applications of Internet 6.6 Hardware & software requirements for

internet connection 6.7 Various examples of Browsers 6.8 Browsing 6.9 Search Engines 6.10 Concept of E-Mail

02

TOTAL 16


Legends: R = Remembrance (Knowledge); U= Understanding; A= Application and above levels (Revised Bloom’s taxonomy) Note: This specification table shall be treated as a general guideline for students and teachers. The actual distribution of marks in the question paper may vary slightly from above table.



Sr. No.

Unit No.



1 I Understanding PC, Identify the front and components of CPU. 04

2 I Understanding the storage devices.(Study various secondary storage devices along with their capacities )

04

3 I Introduction to input and output devices and their connections(mouse, keyboard, monitor, printer)

04

4 II Introduction to Window Operating System & its Accessories- Paint, Explorer, WordPad, Notepad etc.

04

5 III Design a database using mail-merge in Ms-Word. 04

6 III Implementation of features like auto correct, auto format, spells check, insert, table Handling etc in Ms-Word.

04

7 IV Design a worksheet in MS- Excel for a Student Mark sheet. 04

8 IV Implementation of Excel Features like conditional formatting, Form-wizard, Data, Filter, Validation, Sort all records etc.

04

9 V Understanding the basics of presentation software & Creating a new presentation using advanced features of slide-show.

04

55

Sr. No.

Unit No.



10 VI Generate your Email-ID using Internet Service. 04

11 VI Implementation of chatting service 04

12 VI Study of browser 04

TOTAL 48


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Compare and use working of different types of operating systems. 2. Assemble one system


Not Applicable


A) Books


1 Introduction to Computers Peter Norton Tata McGraw Hill

2 Computer Fundamentals Architecture B. Ram New Age International

3 Windows 7 Inside Out Ed Bott Carl Siechert Microsoft Press

4 Windows 7 or Windows XP For Dummies

Andy Rathbone Wiley Publishing Inc

5 Structured computer Organization Andrew S. Tanenbaum

Prentice Hall

6 Computer Fundamentals V. Rajaraman Prentice Hall


1. http://www.computerschool.NET/computer/index.html 2. http://www.introductiontocomputers.org/ 3. http://www.functionx.Com/windows/index.htm 4. http://en.wikiversity.org/wiki/Introduction to Computer


Hardware Intel Pentium Processor N3700 (2M Cache, up to 2.40 GHz), Windows 10 Home 64bit English, 2GB (1x2GB) 1600MHz DDR3L Memory, 500GB 5400 rpm Hard Drive, 19.5-inch HD+ (1600 x 900) Anti-Glare LED-Backlit Display, 2GB (1x2GB) 1600MHz DDR3L Memory, 500GB 5400 rpm Hard Drive, Intel HD Graphics, Tray load DVD Drive (RW to DVD/CD), Ports Side 2 USB 3.0 Rear 2 USB 2.0, 45 – RJ 10/100/1000 Gigabit, Wireless Keyboard and Mouse-KM636 - US International (QWERTY) – Black, Wireless mouse included with Keyboard

Software MS-Office 2010


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H H H

CO2 H H H H H

CO3 H H H H H

CO4 H H H H H

CO5 H H H H H

CO6 H H H H H


56

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Electronic Material and Components (EMC) COURSE CODE : 6116 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course will help the students to acquire knowledge of Materials & components used in electronic systems. Also it will give details of construction, working principle of components & their practical applications.


The student will be able to, 1. Know various electronic components and their applications. 2. Understand construction of various switches, relays and displays 3. Understand various types of cables, connectors and IC’s used in electronic circuits. 4. Know about electronic components and materials from point of view of their

manufacturing, operation and testing. 3.0 COURSE OUTCOMES:


1. Explain constructional details, specification and applications of Electronic tools, materials and components

2. Identify and test passive and active components 3. Read data sheets of different components. 4. Explain construction and manufacturing technology of different IC. 5. Select different types of electronic materials and components for various applications. 6. Prepare artwork layout and PCB for assigned electronic circuit

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Resistors

1a. Classify components.

1b. Classify resistors 1c. List specifications of

resistors.

1.1 Components-(a)discrete and non discrete(b) active and passive (c)parasitic components

1.2 Concept of Resistors, Classification of resistors, Materials used for resistors

1.3 Resistors general specification: - maximum voltage rating, power rating, temperature coefficient, tolerance, Ohmic range, operating temperature

12

1d. Describe with sketch construction and working of different fixed and variable resistors

1.4 Colour Coding with four Color bands(simple numeral)

1.5 Classification of resistor:[A] Fixed resistor: Linear Resistors: Definition, types, construction and applications:

57




Carbon Film, wire-wound resistor Nonlinear resistor: (a) LDR (b) TDR (c) VDR [B] Variable resistors: Construction and applications: Wire wound, potentiometer, Trimmer

1.6 Construction, working, applications and characteristic of LDR

1.7 Concept of linear and logarithmic potentiometer

1.8 Construction, specifications and applications of Linear Potentiometer-carbon, standard wire-wound, trimmer.

1.9 Difference between potentiometer and trimmer.

Unit-II Capacitors

2a. Classify capacitors. 2b. List specifications of

capacitors. 2c. Explain different

fixed and variable capacitors with neat diagram

2.1 Classification of capacitors, materials used for capacitors, dielectric materials.

2.2 Capacitors specification: capacitor working voltage, Insulation resistance, C/V ratio, power factor, capacitance- frequency characteristics, E.S.R.

2.3 Classification of capacitors: Fixed capacitors. Electrolytic capacitors: Construction

and applications: (a) Aluminium (b) tantalum.

Non-electrolytic capacitors: Construction and applications: Disc, Ceramic, mica and paper capacitor

2.4 Variable capacitor: Construction and application: (a) Air-gang capacitor (b) PVC gang capacitor (c) Trimmer. Coding of capacitors-using numerals, color band system, directly printed on capacitors.

10

2d. List application of electrolytic capacitor.

Unit-III Inductors

3a. Classify inductors 3b. Explain

specifications of Inductors.

3c. Describe with sketch different inductors with their applications

3d. compare different inductors

3.1 Introduction to Magnetic Materials and types.

3.2 Faradays laws of Electromagnetic induction

3.3 Inductor Specifications- Definitions and expressions of self and mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling, Q-factor, inductive reactance.

3.4 Construction and applications of - Air core, iron core and ferrite core inductors

3.5 Construction, working and applications of slug tuned inductor

3.6 Colour coding of inductors

06

Unit-IV

4a. Explain various specifications of different cables and connectors

4b. Explain construction of different cables

4.1 General specifications of cables: characteristic impedance, current carrying capacity and flexibility.

4.2 Types of cables- construction and applications of coaxial, Twin core, optical fibre and FRC

08

Cables and Connectors

58




and connectors with diagrams.

4c. List advantages and disadvantages of coaxial, twin core cables

4d. List applications of different connectors.

4.3 General specifications of connectors: contact resistance, breakdown voltage and insulation resistance

4.4 Constructional diagram and applications of: BNC, D-type, audio, video, printer, FRC and RJ-45 connectors.

Unit-V Switches, Relays and Displays

5a. List different type of switches and relays.

5b. Draw and explain construction of different types of switches and relays.

5c. Explain construction of different types of relays

5d. Draw neat sketch of different type of switches and relays and displays.

5.1 Specifications: voltage rating, contact current rating, contact resistance and life.

5.2 Characteristics of switch and relay: operating time, release time, bounce time, electrical and mechanical life

5.3 Construction and applications of: Toggle, Rotary, Rocker, Slide, Thumb wheel and push to on and push to off switches.

5.4 Construction, working and applications of General purpose and Dry reed relays

5.5 Normally-Open (NO) and Normally-Closed (NC) contact

5.6 Comparison between switch and relay 5.7 Construction and working principle and

applications of (a)Light emitting diode (LED) (b)7-segment display(common anode and common cathode Type) (c)LCD Display

10

Unit-VI Integrated Circuit and Surface Mount Devices

6a. State advantages and Disadvantages of IC’s and SMD’s

6b. State applications of IC’s.

6c. Differentiate between thick film and thin film IC’s on the basis of manufacturing techniques and Thickness of film.

6d. Explain the concept of hybrid IC

6.1 Integrated circuits (IC)- Definition, advantages and disadvantages

6.2 Classification of IC’s – monolithic, thick and thin film, hybrid, linear and Digital.

6.3 Thin film technology, thick film Technology. Manufacturing of monolithic IC, photolithography

6.4 IC packages, pin identification, 6.5 Surface Mounted Devices 6.6 Concept of SMT and SMD, 6.7 SMD resistor, capacitor, Transistor and

ICs

08

Unit-VII Printed Circuit Board Manufacturing

7a. State types of PCB 7b. State properties of

copper clad. 7c. State rules for

artwork design. 7d. Explain PCB

manufacturing process.

7e. Describe different soldering methods.

7.1 Introduction to PCB, Advantages, disadvantages of PCB, Types of PCB, Base & Conducting material, types of laminates,

7.2 Properties of copper clad laminate, 7.3 Flowchart for preparation of PCB. 7.4 Layout Design, Artwork rules, Screen

printing, photo printing method, Drilling, Mounting of components

7.5 Soldering technique: Methods of

10

59




soldering, Dip, wave and Hand soldering, necessary conditions for soldering Hard & soft solder, soldering alloys, fluxes, soldering defects

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Resistors 02 08 04 14

II Capacitors -- 06 04 10

III Inductors 04 -- 04 08

IV Cables and connectors 02 04 04 10

V Switches, relays and displays 06 06 04 16

VI Integrated circuits and surface mount devices 06 04 -- 10

VII Printed Circuit Board Manufacturing 04 04 04 12

TOTAL 24 32 24 80





S. No.

Unit No.



1 I Indentify different types of resistors used in laboratory. 02

2 I Testing and identification of different types of resistors, find out tolerance and wattage of resistors depending on size. Measure the value of resistor using multi meter and colour code/printed value.

04

3 II Identify different types of fixed capacitors, test values of capacitors using colour coding and by printed values

02

4 III Identify the types of inductor. Find out the value of inductance using colour code.

02

5 IV Identify different types of connectors 02

6 IV Identify and test different types of cables 02

7 V Identify different types of switches 02

8 V Identify different types of relays. 02

9 V Identify different types of displays 02

60

S. No.

Unit No.



10 VI Identify and test different types of IC’s 02

11 VI Identification of SMD components 02

12 VII Mini- project – Select project, prepare layout, assemble the circuit and test it

08

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Prepare assignments based on practicals performed in Electronic material and components

laboratory 2. Market survey of various components 3. Collect specifications of different components 4. Collect information regarding different components and application used in industries. 5. Prepare a report on above information related to industry.


1. Arrange industrial visit 2. Arrange expert lecture on related topic 3. Show videos /power point presentation from renowned experts in the area of electronic

material and components.


A) Books

Sr.No. Title of Book (s) Author (s) Publication

1 Electronic Materials and component S. M. Dhir Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi

2 Electronic Materials and component Grover and Jamwal Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi

3 Electronic Materials and component Madhuri Joshi Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi

4 Electronic component Handbook Thomas H. Jones Reston publishing company

5 Handbook of components for electronics

Harper (Charles A) Laxmi Enterprise, Bombay


1. www.electroniccomponent.com 2. www.digikey.com/product-search/en 3. www.electronicswitches.in/ 4. Express PCB (web version/ student evaluation version)


1. Analog & Digital Mutimeters. 2. Resistors, capacitors, inductors of different values and ratings 3. Different types of Cables, Connectors, switches, Relays. 4. Analog and Digital IC’s 5. Different types of display devices : LCD and LED 6. IC Tester. 7. Breadboards of different configurations 8. PCB Lab set up including different instruments and equipments.

http://www.electroniccomponent.com/

http://www.digikey.com/product-search/en

http://www.electronicswitches.in/

61


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H H M

CO2 M M M H H

CO3 H H H H H

CO4 H

CO5 H H H

CO6 H H H


62

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Engineering Workshop Practice (EWS) COURSE CODE : 6127 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


-- -- 04 04 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

Engineering diploma technician is expected to know conventional workshop practices like sheet metal working, wood working, Fitting, Drilling, Tapping and lathe working processes. The students are required to identify, operate and control various power tools and machines. They should be able to select and use various tools and equipments for various operations and processes like w, fitting, taping, sheet metal working and turning. The students are advised to undergo each skill experience with remembrance, understanding and application with special emphasis on attitude of enquiry to know why and how for the various instructions and practices imparted to them in each shop.


The student will be able to, 1. Develop basic engineering workshop skills. 2. Impart basic know how of various hand tools and their uses in 3. Different sections of workshop. 4. Enhance hands on experiences to learn manufacturing processes. 5. Develop a skill in dignity of labour, precision at work place, team 6. Working and development of right attitude. 7. Adopt safety practices while working on shop floor.


The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes 1. Know basic workshop processes. 2. Read and interpret job drawing. 3. Identify, select and use various marking, measuring, holding, striking and Cutting tools &

equipments. 4. Operate, control different machines and equipments. 5. Inspect the job for specified dimensions. 6. Produce jobs as per specified dimensions. 7. Adopt safety practices while working on the shop floor.

63

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Introduction of Workshop

1a. Sketch general workshop layout.

1b. Follow preliminary safety rules in workshop.

1.1 Workshop layout. 1.2 Importance of various shops/

sections of workshop. 1.3 Types of jobs to be done in different

sections of workshop. 1.4 General safety rules and work

procedures in the workshop.

04

Unit-II Wood Working Section

2a. Select appropriate 2b. Fitting tools for required

application. 2c. Prepare the simple Job

as per drawing and specifications by using carpentry /wood working tools.

2.1 Types, sketch, specification, material, applications and methods of using of carpentry tools-saws, planner, chisels, hammers, pallet, marking gauge, vice, try square, rule etc.

2.2 Types of woods and their applications.

2.3 Types of carpentry hardware’s and their uses.

2.4 Demonstration of carpentry operations such as marking, sawing, planning, chiselling, grooving, boring, joining etc.

2.5 Preparation of wooden joints. 2.6 Safety precautions.

12

Unit-III Fitting Section

3a. Select appropriate Fitting tools for required application.

3b. Prepare the simple Job as per drawing and specifications by using fitting tools.

3.1 Sketches, specifications and applications of different work holding fitting tools. Fitter’s bench vice, V-block, Clamps.

3.2 Sketches, specifications, material, applications and methods of using fitting marking and measuring tools- marking table, surface plate, angle plate, universal scribing block, try-square, scriber, divider, centre punch, letter punch, calipers, digital vernier calipers, height gauge etc.

3.3 Types, sketches, specifications, material, applications and methods of using of fitting cutting tools hacksaw, chisels, twist drill, taps, files, dies.

3.4 Types, sketches, specifications, material, applications and methods of using of fitting finishing tools-files, reamers.

3.5 Sketches, specification s and applications of miscellaneous tools, hammers, spanners, screwdrivers sliding screw wrench.

3.6 Demonstration of various fitting operations such as chipping, filing, scraping, grinding, sawing, marking, drilling, tapping.etc.

16

64




3.7 Preparation of simple job with drilling tapping and saw cut.

3.8 Safety precautions at work place in fitting section.

Unit-IV Sheet Metal Working

4a. Select appropriate sheet metal working tool for the required application.

4b. Prepare the simple job as per specification using sheet metal working tools.

4.1 Concept and conversions of SWG and other gauges in use.

4.2 Use of wire gauge. 4.3 Types of sheet metal joints and

applications. 4.4 Types, sketch, specification,

material, applications and methods of using sheet metal working tools/tin smithy tools-hammers, stakes, scissors/ snips etc.

4.5 Demonstration of various sheet metal working tools/tin smithy tools and sheet metal operations such as shearing, bending and joining.

4.6 Preparation of sheet metal job. 4.7 Observe Safety precautions.

16

Unit-V Metal Turning

5a. Explain the construction and working of center lathe machine.

5b. Identify and select the operation for the required job.

5c. Select appropriate metal turning tool for the required application.

5d. Prepare the simple job as per manufacturing drawing specifications and dimensions.

5.1 Center lathe

Introduction Block diagram Construction details and functions

of each part. Various attachments and

accessories. Lathe work cutting tools. Lathe operations.

5.2 Specifications of centre lathe. 5.3 Demonstration of lathe operations

and use of various turning tools, accessories and attachments.

5.4 Preparation of metal turning job. 5.5 Observe Safety precautions.

16

TOTAL 64




65

S.

No. Unit No.


Hours.

1 I Prepare wood working and fitting shop layout. 04

4 II Demonstrate use of different wood working tools. Student will also prepare the report with sketch, specifications and applications of wood working tools demonstrated.

04

5 II Wood Working Shop One Job Prepare one Job From the following, involving different joints, Turning and paining operation, surface finishing by emery paper, varnishing and polishing e.g. Chaurang and pat, Table, Racks etc. group of 2 to 4 students depending on volume work. OR One simple job involving any one joint like mortise and tendon dovetail bridle half lap etc. One Job per student / preparation of switch board or any other similar job

12

2 III Demonstrate use of different fitting tools –like work holding, marking, measuring, cutting, finishing and miscellaneous. Student will also prepare the report with sketch, specifications and applications of fitting tools demonstrated.

04

3 III Fitting shop One Job Prepare one simple fitting job as per given drawings and specifications involving practice of filing, drilling, tapping, cutting etc. Such as Regulator Heat sink, Transistor Heat Sink or any other similar job.

08

4 IV Demonstrate use of different sheet metal working tools/machines. Student will also prepare the report with sketch, specifications and applications of tools demonstrated, different sheet metal operations like sheet cutting, bending, edging, end curling, lancing, soldering and riveting.

04

5 IV Sheet metal working One job. Prepare one sheet metal job as per drawing having shearing, bending, joining, soldering and riveting. Such as Battery Eliminator Box or any other similar job

12

6 V Demonstrate lathe operations like facing, centering, plain turning, step turning, taper turning, grooving, chamfering, knurling, parting off and use of various turning tools, accessories and attachments.

04

7 V Metal turning One job. Preparation of turning job involving Plain, Step, Taper turning, threading, Chamfering and Knurling operations (Group of 2 students)

12

TOTAL 64


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1 Prepare reports as asked in the workshop practical assignment. 2 Visit the nearer timber and ply wood merchant. Collect the information on types and

appearance of wood being sold by them. 3 Visit the nearer work shop to observe the various lathe operations performed. 4 Down load the catalogues of lathe machine used by them and study their

specifications. 5 Down load videos showing correct practices for fitting, wood working, sheet metal

working and lathe work. 6 Assignments on accessories and attachments used on lathe machine.

66

NOTES: a. It is compulsory to follow safety norms while working in the sections of workshop. b. Preparation Workshop book is compulsory. Record of activities performed by student in

each period is also compulsory and must be duly certified by concerned technical staff and teacher in routine workshop book.

c. Keep your all tools duly re-sharpened/ready. d. It is compulsory to submit reports of student activities and workshop book. e. Student activities are compulsory to perform by each student. f. Students are to be continuously assessed for competencies achieved. g. Each student is required to submit the specified term work


1. Demonstration, 2. Show CAI computer software related to workshop technology. 3. CBT Packages.


A) Books


1. Mechanical workshop practice. K.C. John PHI

2 Workshop Technology-I. Hazra and Chaudhary Media.

promoters & Publisher private limited

3 Workshop Technology-I. W.A. J. Chapman Taylor & Francis.

4 Comprehensive Workshop Technology (Manufacturing Processes).

S.K. Garg Laxmi publications.

5 Workshop practice manual. K. Venkata Reddy B.S. Publications.

6 Workshop familiarization. E. Wilkinson Pitman engineering craft series.

7 Workshop Technology B. S. Raghuwanshi Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi

8 Workshop Technology H. S. Bawa Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New Delhi

9 I.T.B. Handbook. - Engineering industry Training Board.

10 Production Technology Hand Book HMT

- Tata-McGraw Hill Publisher, New Delhi.


1. http://www.nptel.ac.in/name of topic/lecture/video 2. http://www.howstuffworks.com 3. http://www.abmtools.com/downloads/Woodworking%20Carpentry%20Tools.pdf 4. http://www.solderingtechnology.org 5. http://www.newagepublishers.com/samplechapter/001469.pdf 6. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TeBX6cKKHWY 7. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QHF0sNHnttw&feature=related 8. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Kv1zo9CAxt4&feature=relmfu 9. http://www.piehtoolco.com 10. http://sourcing.indiamart.com/engineering/articles/materials-used-hand-tools/ 11. http://www.lathemachinesindia.com/lathe-machine.html 12. http://www.hnsa.org/doc/pdf/lathe.pdf

http://sourcing.indiamart.com/engineering/articles/materials-used-hand-tools/

http://www.lathemachinesindia.com/lathe-machine.html

67

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments

Sr. No Name Of Equipments/ Instruments Qty

Wood working Section

1 Circular saw 1

2 Jig - saw 1

3 Wood Planer 1

4 Drilling Machine Bench Type 1

5 Universal wood working Machine 1

6 Bench Grinder 1

7 Hand Tools Kit 20 Sets

8 Carpentry Bench Vice 20

9 Wood Turning Lathe 5

10 Measuring Tools & Gauges 20 Sets

11 Electrician Tool Kit 2

12 Carpentry Work Bench 20

13 Band Saw 1

14 Band saw and Circular Saw Sharpener 1

15 Chain And Chisel Mortising Machine 1

16 Vertical Sander 1

17 Heavy Duty Circular Saw 1

18 Heavy Duty Variable Speed Reciprocating Saw Kit 1

19 Single Speed Impact Drill. 1

20 ANGLE GRINDER. 1

21 Cordless drill ( Keyed Chuck ) 1

22 Heavy Duty palm grip sander 1

23 Heavy Duty Router 1

Fitting Shop

1 Marking Table with scribers 2

2 Surface plate 2

3 Measuring Instruments, Marking Instruments, Fitting Hand Tools 2 Each

4 Tap & die set. 5 Sets

5 Bench Drilling Machine 1

6 Bench Grinder 1

7 Fitting Shop Vice Size- 100/150 mm. 20

8 Electrically operated Hand Drilling Machine ( pistol Type ) 2

9 Power Hack Saw Machine 1

10 Pedestal Grinder 1

11 Hand Grinder 1

12 Fitter’s Work Bench 10

13 Hand Press Double ( Pillar Type ) 1

14 Arbor Press 1

Sheet Metal Shop

1 Shearing Machine 1

2 Sheet Bending Machine 1

3 Soldering Iron 5

4 Sheet metal working Hand Tools and other Equipments 1

5 Spot welding machine 1

6 Portable Drilling Machine 1

7 Stoving Oven 1

8 Sheet Metal Work Bench Size-1800 x 1200 x 750 mm with stake 2

9 Swaging Machine 1

10 Universal sheet Folding Machine 1

11 Double Column Power Press 1

68

12 Hydraulic Press 1

13 Circle Cutting Machines 1

Turning Section

1 Lathe Machine with standard accessories and attachments 10

2 Required cutting Tools and Tool Holders 10 Set

3 Required measuring Tools 10 Set

4 Hack Saw machine 1

Note:- Latest Technology & specifications are to consider at the time procure


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M L M

CO2 M M

CO3 H

CO4 H M M

CO5 M H L H

CO6 H M H H

CO7 H L H


69

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Basic Electronics (BTX) COURSE CODE : 6244 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 04 08 03 Max. 80 20 100 25 -- 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 10 -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course will help the students to improve their knowledge and grasp the most fundamental concepts of electronic devices and circuits. Basic Electronics is concerned with the fundamental building blocks in electronic technology, giving the student an understanding of the basic circuits & the applications.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand operating principle of semiconductor devices 2. Know the use of semiconductor devices in electronic circuits 3. Analyse the characteristics of electronic devices 4. Understand the working of basic circuits such as rectifiers, amplifiers etc. 5. Build and test simple electronic circuits



1. Select appropriate semiconductor devices required for various electronic applications. 2. Select an electronic circuit according to application requirement. 3. Assemble an electronic circuit. 4. Trace the faults in electronic circuit using voltage and waveform methods.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Semi-conductor diode

1a. Categorize different semiconductor diodes.

1b. Describe with sketch construction, operation and applications of PN junction diode and zener diode.

1c. Describe with sketch construction, operation and applications of LED and photodiode

1.1 Semiconductor diode: Symbol, constructional diagram, operating principle, V-I characteristic and applications of PN junction and zener diode.

1.2 Symbol, constructional diagram, operating principle, V-I characteristic and applications of Light emitting diode (LED) and Photodiode

08

Unit-II Diode rectifiers and filters

2a. Categorize diode rectifiers and filters.

2b. Draw the circuit and explain operation of Half Wave Rectifier, Full Wave Rectifier (center-tapped) and Full Wave Bridge Rectifier along with waveform.

2.1 Classification of rectifiers. 2.2 Circuit diagram and operation of

Half Wave Rectifier, Full Wave Rectifier (center-tapped), Full Wave Bridge Rectifier.

2.3 Classification of filters 2.4 Circuit diagram, operation and

waveforms of Capacitor, Choke,

10

70



2c. Draw circuit and explain operation of different types of filters.

2d. Define Peak Inverse Voltage, Ripple Factor, Form Factor and Transformer Utilization Factor of diode rectifiers.

LC and π type filter.

Unit-III Bipolar Junction transistor

3a. Categorize different BJT & BJT Configurations.

3b. Describe DC and AC load line with the help of an example.

3c. List various BJT biasing methods.

3d. Draw circuit diagram and state the operation of Various BJT biasing methods.

3e. Compare different BJT biasing methods.

3.1 Classification of BJT. 3.2 Circuit diagram, operation and

Input -Output characteristics of CB, CE, CC configurations of BJT.

3.3 DC and AC load line. 3.4 Circuit diagram and operation of

fixed bias, fixed bias with emitter resistance, collector to base bias, voltage divider biasing Methods of BJT.

12

Unit-IV Single and multistage amplifiers

4a. Describe the principle of single and multistage amplifiers and state its need

4b. State different coupling methods used in BJT amplifiers.

4c. Draw the circuit diagram and explain the working of different Coupling Methods of amplifiers.

4.1 Principle, circuit diagram, working of single stage amplifier

4.2 Principle of multistage amplifier and its need

4.3 Circuit diagram, working, frequency response curve, bandwidth and applications of RC-coupled, transformer coupled, direct coupled amplifiers

12

Unit-V Field Effect transistor

5a. Classify Field effect transistors. 5b. Draw constructional diagram

and working principle of JFET and MOSFET.

5.1 Classification of FET 5.2 Symbol, constructional diagram,

working principle, V-I characteristics, parameters and applications of JFET

5.3 Symbol, constructional diagram, working principle and applications of MOSFET

12

Unit-VI Regulated Power supply

6a. Draw block diagram and explain operation of regulated power supply.

6b. Categories different Voltage regulators.

6c. Describe circuit diagram and explain operation of different voltage regulator circuits.

6.1 Block diagram and operation of Regulated power supply.

6.2 Circuit diagram and operation of Zener voltage regulator.

6.3 Circuit diagram and operation of Transistorized series and shunt voltage regulator

6.4 Circuit diagram and working of 78XX and 79XX voltage regulator.

10

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Semiconductor diode 08 04 02 14

II Diode rectifiers and filters 08 02 02 12

III Bipolar Junction transistor 08 04 02 14

71

Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

IV Single and multistage amplifiers 08 04 02 14

V Field Effect transistor 10 02 02 14

VI Regulated Power supply 04 04 04 12

TOTAL 46 20 14 80




S. No.

Unit No.



1 I Plot V-I characteristics of PN junction diode and find out its knee voltage. 02

2 I Plot V-I characteristics of Zener diode and find out the Zener voltage. 02

3 I Plot V-I characteristics of LED. 02

4 I Plot V-I characteristics of photodiode. 02

5 II To construct and test half wave rectifier and draw input–output Waveforms.

04

6 II To construct and test Full wave rectifier and draw input–output Waveforms.

04

7 II To construct and test Bridge full wave rectifier and draw input-output waveforms.

04

8 II To construct and test power supply using full wave rectifier with capacitor input filter. Measure output voltage (DC) with and without filter.

04

9 II To construct and test power supply using full wave rectifier with π filter. Measure output voltage (DC) with and without filter

04

10 III To plot input-output characteristics of BJT in CE mode. 04

11 III To plot input-output characteristics of BJT in CB mode. 04

12 IV To plot frequency response of CE amplifier and find out Gain-Bandwidth product of given circuit.

04

13 IV Construct and plot frequency response of RC coupled amplifier and find out Gain-Bandwidth product of given circuit.

04

14 V Plot V-I characteristics of FET. 04

15 VI Construct and test performance of Zener voltage regulator 04

16 VI Construct and test performance of Transistor series regulator 04

17 VI Construct and test performance of Transistor shunt regulator 04

18 VI Performance of three terminal voltage regulators (78XX and 79XX) 04

TOTAL 64

72


1. Download data sheets of Semiconductor diode, Zener diode, BJT, FET. 2. Collect data about specifications and ratings from the datasheets. 3. Collect data about prices of Semiconductor diode, Zener diode, BJT, FET from local

market. 4. Build DC regulated power supply. 5. Prepare layout and artwork of power supply using IC (78xx and 79xx). 6. Conduct the market survey for regulated power supply and collect the specifications. 7. Mini project based on transistor as a switch, single stage CE amplifier.


1. Show video to demonstrate the working principles, constructional features, testing and maintenance of different types of electronic active components, devices and circuits.

2. Arrange a visit to PCB and power supply manufacturing industry. 3. Arrange expert lecture of an industry person in the field of electronics. 4. Arrange faulty electronic circuit and provide to students for repairing.(Case Study) 5. Encourage students to build electronic circuits


A) Books


1 A text book of Applied Electronics R.S. Sedha S. Chand Publishers, New Delhi

2 Principles of Electronics V.K. Mehta S. Chand Publishers, New Delhi

3 Electronic Devices and Circuits G.K. Mittal Khanna Publishers, New Delhi

4 Basic Electronics B.L. Theraja S. Chand Publishers, New Delhi

5 Electronic Principles Malvino McGraw Hill, New Delhi

6 Electronic Devices and Circuits A. Motershed PHI, New Delhi

7 Basic Electronics and Linear circuits N.N. Bhargava S.C. Gupta

Tata McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi

B) Software/Learning Websites 1. http://www.electronicstheory.com 2. http://www.nptl.com 3. http://www.electronictutorial.com 4. http://www.allaboutcircuit.com

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications 1. Cathode ray oscilloscope : Dual Channel, 4 Trace CRT / TFT based, Bandwidth 20 MHz/30

MHz, X10 magnification, 20 nS max sweep rate, Alternate triggering, Component tester and with optional features such as Digital Read out, USB interface.

2. Function Generator : 1 MHz, sine, square, triangular, ramp and pulse generator Freq range 0.01 Hz to 1 MHz, Output amplitude 20V open circuited, Output impedance 50 ohms. Facility to indicate output frequency & amplitude on display.

3. Regulated power supply : 0 to 30V 2A/3A dual DC regulated power supply with SC protection digital output meters for current and Voltage

4. CRO Probes 5. V-I Characteristics of PN diode – Experimental kit 6. V-I Characteristics of zener diode – Experimental kit 7. half wave rectifier – Experimental kit 8. Full wave rectifier – Experimental kit 9. Bridge Full wave rectifier with and without filter– Experimental kit 10. I/O characteristics of CE, CB Configuration – Experimental kit 11. I/O characteristics of FET – Experimental kit 12. Single stage and Multistage amplifier – Experimental kit

http://www.electronicstheory.com/

http://www.nptl.com/

http://www.electronictutorial.com/

http://www.allaboutcircuit.com/

73


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H M H

CO2 H H H

CO3 H H H H

CO4 M M H H


74

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Electronic Measurement and Instruments (EMN) COURSE CODE: 6245 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 -- 02 05 -- Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course intends to teach the students facts, concepts, principles and procedure of analog & digital electronic measuring instruments. The measurement techniques for the measurement of various electrical quantities can be used for testing & troubleshooting whenever the student performing his role as supervisor or assistant in research and development.


The student will be able to, 1. Know the different parts of measurement instruments 2. Understand basic facts and concepts of measurements. 3. Know calibration procedure. 4. Describe operation of analog and digital meters.



1. Identify the different parts of measurement instruments 2. State the basic facts and concepts of measurements. 3. Calibrate the instruments. 4. Measure different electrical quantities using analog and digital instruments. 5. Selecting the appropriate instruments for measurement 6. Test electronics components.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Fundamentals of Measurements

1a. State and explain the different types of instruments, errors, standards, characteristics of instruments.

1b. Define fundamental and derived unit of measurement and list all the units of measurement.

1c. State and explain importance of grounding.

1d. Explain the need of calibration

1.1 Classification of instruments-Absolute Instruments, Secondary Instruments

1.2 Characteristics of instruments Static-Accuracy, Precision,

sensitivity, Resolution, Static error, Reproducibility, Drift, Dead zone.

Dynamic-speed of response, Lag, Fidelity, Dynamic error.

1.3 Types of error-Gross, Systematic and Random.

1.4 Units of measurement fundamental, Derived.

1.5 Standards and their Classification -International, Primary, Secondary, Working.

1.6 Calibration of Instruments-definition,

08

75




need etc. 1.7 Grounds-Importance of ground,

Grounding, Grounding techniques, Equipment of grounding for safety.

Unit-II Analog DC and AC Meters

2a. Classify the analog instruments.

2b. Define Average and RMS value.

2c. Draw the construction of PMMC and explain its operation and design analog DC, Analog AC meters for the different ranges.

2d. Draw circuit diagram and explain operation analog multimeter.

2.1 Classification of Analog Instruments. 2.2 Definition of Average and RMS value. 2.3 PMMC-Working Principle,

Construction, Sources of torque. Analog DC Ammeters and

Voltmeters. Analog AC Ammeter and

Voltmeter-Average Responding (Rectifier type)

2.4 Analog Multimeter- Circuit diagram and operation.

12

Unit-III Digital Instruments

3a. State Resolution, Sensitivity and Accuracy of digital display.

3b. Draw block diagram and explain operation of digital instruments

3c. State applications of different digital instruments.

3.1 Resolution, Sensitivity and Accuracy of digital display.

3.2 Digital frequency meter-Block Diagram and operation only.

3.3 Digital Voltmeter-Ramp type DVM, Integrating type DVM, Successive approximation type DVM, Dual slope type DVM. (Block diagram, Operation and waveforms)

3.4 Digital Multi meter -Block Diagram and operation.

3.5 LCR, Q- meter-Block diagram and operation only.

3.6 Digital phase meter-Block diagram and operation only.

10

Unit-IV Oscilloscope

4a. Draw neat labeled block diagram of CRO and DSO

4b. List specifications and applications of CRO and DSO.

4c. Draw internal structure of CRT and State its working Principle.

4d. Explain vertical deflection system and Horizontal deflection system.

4e. Draw block diagram of CRO probe and explain types of CRO probes.

4.1 Display system – CRT, construction and operation. Deflection of electron beam in CRT, Electrostatic and Electromagnetic deflection.

4.2 Vertical deflection system- Input coupling selector, input attenuator, pre-amplifier, main vertical amplifier, delay line

4.3 Horizontal deflection system –Trigger circuit, time base generator, Main horizontal amplifier.

4.4 CRO Probes- General block diagram of CRO probe, passive voltage probe and their compensation, active voltage probes, current probes.

4.5 CRO – Block diagram of single beam-single trace, single beam -dual trace oscilloscope.

4.6 CRO–specifications (single beam-dual

12

76




trace) 4.7 Block diagram of Digital storage

oscilloscope (DSO). 4.8 Measurement of amplitude, time

period, frequency and phase using CRO, tracing of diode and transistor characteristics using CRO.

Unit-V Signal Generator and Wave Analyzer

5a. State the need of signal generator, Spectrum and logic analyzer.

5b. Draw block diagram and explain operation of different signal generators, Spectrum and logic analyzer and its applications.

5c. List specification of Function generator and pulse generator, Pattern generator.

5.1 Concept of signal generator 5.2 Need, block diagram, operation,

applications and specifications of signal generators: AF and RF type, function generator and pulse generator, Pattern generator

5.3 Need, block diagram, operation, applications and specifications of spectrum and logic analyzer

06

TOTAL 48


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Fundamentals of Measurements 08 04 04 16

II Analog DC and AC Meters 04 08 08 20

III Digital Instruments 04 06 04 14

IV Oscilloscope 06 08 04 18

V Signal Generators and wave Analyzers 04 02 06 12

26 28 26 80


6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/PRACTICALS/TASKS: (Any 10)



S. No.

Unit No.



1 II Observe and Identify the parts of PMMC analog instruments and perform measurement of

04

77

S. No.

Unit No.



DC voltage, DC Current AC voltage, AC current Resistance

2 III Observe front panel controls of Digital multimeter and perform measurement of

DC voltage, DC Current AC voltage, AC current Resistance Continuity testing

04

3 II Find the RMS and Average values by the AC measurement. 02

4 III Observe front panel controls of LCR-Q meter and measure-Resistance, Inductance, Capacitance and Q- factor

02

5 III Measure phase angle using Digital phase meter. 02

6 IV Observe front panel controls and record specifications of a typical CRO. 02

7 IV Measure frequency, voltage, phase difference (by time measurement) using CRO

02

8 IV Testing of components using CRO. (Resistors, Capacitors, Transformers, PN junction diode, Zener Diode and LED). Draw the observed nature of patterns/waveforms.

04

9 IV Using Lissageous pattern on CRO measure frequency and phase difference of unknown signal.

02

10 IV Observe front panel controls of DSO and Measure frequency and voltage using DSO.

04

11 V Measure frequency and voltage of different waveforms available at the output of function generator

02

12 V Observe front panel of pattern generator. Observe different patterns on it.

02

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Identify different parts of different electronic measurement instruments. 2. Prepare journals based on practical performed in electronic measurement and instrument

in laboratory. 3. Skillfully handle all the measurement instruments and performs measurement. 4. Visit to any electronic measurement and instrument company and prepare a report on it. 5. Develop mini-projects such as design of analog meters (Ammeters, Voltmeters), for

minimum and maximum range of analog meters using basic meters. 6. Case Study: Based on fault finding of any instrument, troubleshoot electronic circuits and

Testing to find the faulty components using different instruments.

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Lecture method 2. Arrange video/animation film to demonstrate the working principles, constructional

features, testing and maintenance of different types of electronic measurement and instruments.

3. Arrange a visit to any electronic measurement industry or manufacturing industry of electronic measurement instruments, national laboratory of measurement etc

4. Arrange expert lecture of any industry person or any Academics person in the area of Electronic measurement and instrument, CRO, Analog meters etc.

5. Prepare PowerPoint presentations on CRO, Analog meters, Digital meters etc. 6. Take one day workshop from any industry expert (Supervisor, Technician) on how to

perform measurement, handling of instrument, calibration of instruments, testing etc.

78


A) Books

Sr. No. Title of Book Author(s) Publication

1 Electrical and Electronic Measurements and instrumentations

A. K. Sawhney Dhanpat Rai and Co. 2010

2 Electronic Instruments H. S. Kalsi Tata McGraw Hills 2012

3 Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement tech.

W. D. Cooper Prentice Hall 1978

4 Student Reference manual for Electronic Instrumentation laboratory

Stanley Wolf and Richard Smith

P. Hall 2004

5 Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation

K Lal Kishore Pearson 2010


1. www.youtube.com/videos of electronic measurement and instruments

2. www.texasinstruments.com

3. http://en.wikipedia.org

4. www.electrical4u.com

5. www.radio-electronics.com/info/generators/signal-generator-


Sr. No.

Name of Equipments/ Instruments

Broad Specifications

1 Cathode ray oscilloscope Dual Channel, 4 Trace CRT / TFT based Bandwidth 20 MHz/30 MHz X10 magnification 20 nS max sweep rate, Alternate triggering Component tester and with optional features such as Digital Read out, USB interface Any other Oscilloscope with additional features are also suitable

2 Dual Regulated power supply

0 to 30 V 2A/3 A dual DC regulated power supply with SC protection digital output meters for current and Voltage

3 Analog Multimeter Suitable to measure AC/DC voltage, Current and Resistance DC voltage Range 400mV to 1000 V AC Voltage Range 4V to 750 V DC current 4 mA to 10A AC current 4 mA to 10 A Resistance 400 Ohm to 40 Mohm or any other better specifications and facilities

5 Digital Multimeters 3.5 digit with R, V, I measurements, diode and BJT testing

8 Digital storage oscilloscope

Bandwidth : 50/100MHz TFT Colour LCD Dual Channel Real Time Sampling: 1GSa/s Equivalent Sampling 25GSa/s Memory 1M pts 10 Waveforms and 10 Setups can be stored Auto set Function s 20 Auto Measurement of Vpp, Vmax, Vmin, Vtop, Vbase, Vamp, Vavg, Vrms, Overshoot Preshoot, Frequency, Risetime, Falltime, Delay 1 -2, Delay 1 -2, +Width, -Width, +Duty, -Duty Mathematical Functions : Add, Subtract, Multiply and FFT Adjustable Digital Filters (HPF, LPF, BPF and BRF) Cursor Measure : Auto, Manual, Track Single shot triggering mode Built-in FFT and USB Interface Ultra scope: PC control and Analysis Software Interpolation sinx/x Acquisition

http://www.texasinstruments.com/

https://en.wikipedia.org/

http://www.electrical4u.com/

http://www.radio-electronics.com/info/generators/signal-generator-

79

Sr. No.

Name of Equipments/ Instruments

Broad Specifications

Modes : Normal, Average, Peak detect or any other better specifications

9 Function Generator 1 MHz, sine, square, triangular, ramp and pulse generator Freq range 0.01 Hz to 1 MHz, Output amplitude 20V open circuited, Output impedance 50 ohm Ohms. Facility to indicate output frequency and amplitude on display.

10 LCR Q meter Parameter L-Q, C-D, R-Q and Z-Q Frequency 00 Hz, 120 Hz and 1 KHz Accuracy Basic Accuracy : 0.3% Display 5 digits display for both primary and secondary parameters L 100 Hz, 120 Hz 1 mH - 9999 H 1 KHz 0.1 mH - 999.9 H Measurement C 100 Hz, 120Hz 1 pF - 9999 mF Range 1 KHz 0.1 pF - 999.9 mFD, Q 0.0001 – 9999 D% 0.0001% - 9999%Test Level 120 Hz 0.3 Vrms (1 ±15%)(Range Auto 1 KHz and Open 100 Hz 0.42 Vrms (1±15%)Circuit) Ranging Mod Auto and Hold Equivalent Parallel and Series Circuit Display Direct, DABS and D% Correction Open and Short Zeroing Terminals 4 terminals Comparator 4 Bins : NG, P1, P2 and P3 D% -9999% - 99999%

11 TV pattern generator Various test pattern output (May be shared with other lab)


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 M H H H

CO2 H H M M M M

CO3 H M M H M

CO4 M H H

CO5 M H M

CO6 H H H


80

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Industrial Instrumentation (INI) COURSE CODE : 6246 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 25 -- 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 10 -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE: Reliable Measurements of various process quantities has been important for trade and commerce for Industrial activities. Modern Engineering practices require adequately precise and fast measurement. This course deals with measurement principles of process parameters like pressure, flow, level, temperature, displacement, humidity etc. covering nearly the entire gamut of industrial measurement. Transducers are used for Measurement of these parameters. Their specifications, limitations and applications, along with their static and dynamic behavior are important for studying this course.


1. Define physical quantities with proper units to ensure precise technical communication about the results of measurements.

2. Understand the concepts of different types of transducers and compare them on the basis of their performance, characteristics and applications.

3. Understand the nature and working of instrumentation systems. 4. Understand the operating principle of transducers for measurement of different physical

quantities.


1. Identify and select different transducers for industrial applications. 2. Draw and explain the construction and operation of different transducers used to measure

physical quantities. 3. State specifications, advantages and disadvantages of different transducers. 4. Use different transducers for measurements of physical quantities.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Transducers and Recorders

1a. Define transducer 1b. Compare different

transducers 1c. Selection of specific

transducers. 1d. Draw and explain block

diagram of instrumentation system.

1.1 Definition and need of transducers. 1.2 Classification of transducers:

active, passive, primary, secondary, analog and digital.

1.3 Selection criteria of transducers 1.4 Block diagram and explanation of

each block in instrumentation system.

10

1e. Need and explanation of recorders

1.5 Recorders-need, types, strip chart and X-Y recorders, their block diagram, working, construction, advantages, disadvantages and

81




applications.

Unit-II Temperature Measurement

2a. Explain different temperature measuring scales and state need of temperature measuring scales

2b. List different temperature measuring transducers

2c. Explain the construction and working of different temperature measuring transducers with neat diagram

2.1 Temperature- definition, units, need, different scales.

2.2 Classification of temperature measuring transducers.

2.3 Construction, Operating principle, advantages, disadvantages and applications of following transducers a. Filled system- gas filled

thermometer. b. Thermistor types-PTC and NTC c. Bimetallic thermometer. d. RTD (Pt-100), 2, 3, wire system

(diagram only) . e. Thermocouple- Seebeck and

Peltier effects, law of intermediate temperature and metal.

f. Thermocouple types: J, K, R, S and T.

g. Pyrometers – optical and radiation.

12

Unit-III Pressure Measurement

3a. State need of pressure measurement

3b. Draw and explain elastic and non elastic pressure transducers

3c. Draw and explain electronic pressure transducers

3d. Explain the dead weight tester.

3.1 Pressure- definition, need, types, units, (absolute atmospheric gauge and vacuum).

3.2 Classification of pressure measuring devices.

3.3 Principle of working, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications of : a. Non elastic pressure

transducers. b. Elastic pressure transducers –

bourdon tube, bellows, diaphragm and capsule.

c. Electronic pressure transducers- LVDT, strain gauge and piezoelectric.

d. Dead weight tester -Calibration of pressure gauge using dead weight tester.

12

Unit IV: Flow Measurement

4a. List of different types of flow and state need of flow measurement.

4b. List different types of flow measuring transducers.

4c. Draw and explain construction and working of different flow measuring transducers

4.1 Flow- definition, types of flow-laminar, turbulent and Reynold’s number.

4.2 Classification of flow measuring transducers.

4.3 Principle of working, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications of: a. Variable head flow meter-

venturi tube and orifice plate.

12

82




b. Variable area flow meter- rotameter.

c. Electromagnetic flow meter. d. Ultrasonic flow meter- Time

difference and Doppler type.

Unit V : Level Measurement

5a. State need of level measurement

5b. List different level measuring methods

5c. Draw the constructional sketch and explain working of different level measuring transducers

5.1 Level-definition, need of level measurements, classification of level measurement methods.

5.2 Principle of working, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications of- a. Float type level gauge. b. Resistive type level gauge. c. Capacitive type level gauge. d. Ultrasonic type. e. Radiation type level gauge.

10

Unit VI: Measurement of Speed, Humidity and Thickness

6a. Define humidity 6b. List different types of

humidity and its unit 6c. Draw the sketch and

explain humidity transducers

6d. Draw the sketch and explain speed measuring transducers

6e. List different thickness measuring transducers

6.1 Humidity- types, absolute, relative 6.2 Humidity transducers,

a. Sling type-dry and wet bulb thermometer.

b. Hair hygrometer. 6.3 Speed measurement-

a. Tachogenerators- AC and DC. b. Non contact type- photoelectric

type. 6.4 Thickness measurement.

a. Differential roller gauge method (contact type device) .

b. Capacitance method.

08

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Mark

s

I Transducers and Recorders 04 04 04 12

II Temperature measurement 04 08 04 16

III Pressure measurement 02 08 04 14

IV Flow measurement 02 08 04 14

V Level measurement -- 08 04 12

VI Measurement of speed, humidity and thickness 04 08 -- 12

TOTAL 16 44 20 80




83


S.

No. Unit No.



1. I List and explain different transducers in the measurement laboratory. 02

2. I Draw front panel of strip chart recorder and explain operation of strip chart recorder.

02

3. II Plot and analyse the characteristics of RTD. 02

4. II Plot and analyse characteristics of thermocouple. 02

5. II Plot and analyse characteristics of thermistor. 02

6. III Measure pressure by strain gauge. 02

7. III Measure pressure by bourdon tube. 02

8. IV Measure flow by venturi meter. 02

9. IV Measure flow by orifice plate. 02

10. V Measure level by capacitive method. 02

11. III Measure linear displacement using LVDT. 02

12. VI Measure angular speed by tachometer. 02

13. VI Humidity measurement by hygrometer. 02

14. Industrial visit and prepare a report. 06

TOTAL 32


1. Collect specifications of various transducers using internet, browsing websites. 2. Identify various transducers. 3. Collect manuals/ photographs of different transducers. 4. Do the assignments on measurement transducers from curriculum. 5. Attend the expert lecture arranged and make report on that. 6. From the electronics magazines find out different latest measuring transducers for

physical parameters.

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Show power points of various transducers. 2. Arrange a visit to related to instrumentation control industry. 3. Arrange expert lecture by industry person in the area of instrumentation, meters etc.


A) Books

Sr.No. Title of Book Author(s) Publication

1 Industrial instrumentation and controls S.K. Singh Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 13:978-0-07-026222-5

2 Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation

A.K. Sawhney Dhanpat Rai and co; New Delhi, 2010

3 Instrumentation System and devices Rangan, Mani Sharma

Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi

4 Principles of Industrial Instrumentation D. Patranabis Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi

5 Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis

B.C. Nakra K.K. Choudhari


84

B) Software/Learning Websites 1. www.youtube.com/”type name of instrument” 2. www.controlnet.com 3. www.osvn.com 4. www.proprofs.com/webschool


1. Cathode ray oscilloscope : Dual Channel, 4 Trace CRT / TFT based, Bandwidth 20 MHz/30 MHz, X10 magnification, 20 nS max sweep rate, Alternate triggering Component tester and with optional features such as Digital Read out, USB interface, CRO Probes

2. Digital Multimeter : 3.5 digit with R, V, I measurements, diode and BJT testing 3. LCR Q meter: Parameter L-Q, C-D, R-Q and Z-Q Frequency 00 Hz, 120 Hz and 1 KHz

Accuracy Basic Accuracy : 0.3%Display 5 digits display. 10.0 MAPPING MATRIX OF PO’S AND CO’S:

Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H H M H

CO2 H M M M M

CO3 H L H M L L

CO4 M M M H H


http://www.youtube.com/

http://www.controlnet.com/

http://www.osvn.com/

http://www.proprofs.com/webschool

85

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Digital Electronics (DEX) COURSE CODE : 6247 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 04 08 03 Max. 80 20 100 25 -- 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 10 -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course is classified under basic technology group and intended to teach the students facts, concepts and principles of working of digital circuits. This course will generate requisite background for understanding of courses such as microprocessor and micro controller.


The student will be able to, 1. Know various number systems and codes. 2. Understand combinational and sequential logic circuits 3. Understand logic families, data converters and semiconductor memories. 4. Implement simple digital circuits using k-map.



1. Convert a number from one number system to another. 2. Implement combinational and sequential circuits. 3. Troubleshoot digital circuits. 4. Use different data converters and memories according to applications. 5. Design simple digital circuits for different applications.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Number Systems and Codes

1a. List different number systems.

1b. Convert one number systems to another.

1c. Perform binary arithmetic.

1d. Explain different codes and their conversion.

1.1 Introduction to digital systems 1.2 Numbers Systems: Binary, Decimal,

Octal, Hexadecimal. 1.3 Conversion of one number system to

another.

10

1.4 Binary Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division

1.5 Subtraction using 1’s and 2’s complement.

1.6 Codes: BCD Code, Excess-3 Code, Gray Code, ASCII code.

1.7 BCD to Excess-3 conversion, Binary to Gray and Gray to Binary code conversion.

1.8 BCD Addition, BCD subtraction using 9’s and 10’s complement.

Unit-II Logic Gates &

2a. Draw symbol and write truth table all the gates.

2.1 Symbol equation and truth table of AND, OR, NOT, EX-OR, EX-NOR, NOR and NAND gate.

12

86




Boolean Algebra

2b. State Boolean laws.

2c. Solve examples related to Boolean algebra.

2d. Solve equations using k-map.

2.2 NOR and NAND gate as a universal gates.

2.3 Fundamental concepts of Boolean algebra, Basic Laws: Cumulative, Associative, Distributive, De-Morgan’s Theorem, Numerical examples.

2.4 Standard representation of canonical forms SOP and POS, Minterm, Maxterm

2.5 Introduction to K-map: Definition, advantages, representation of 2, 3, 4 variable K-map, K- map reduction technique, don’t care condition, Numerical based on the above topic.

Unit-III Combinational Logic Circuits

3a. Implement Adder and subtractor using K-map.

3b. Explain different types of multiplexers and demultiplexers.

3c. Draw Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Tree

3d. Design Encoder circuit.

3e. Explain decoder circuit.

3.1 Definition of combinational logic circuit, half adder, realization of full adder using k-map, half subtractor, Realization of Full subtractor using k-map. Study of IC-7483, 1 –digit adder using IC-7483.

3.2 BCD to 7-segment decoder using k-map 3.3 Multiplexer- Types (2:1, 4:1, 8:1),

Necessity, Application, Multiplexer Tree, study of IC-74151

3.4 Demultiplexer-Types, (1:2, 1:4, 1:8) Necessity, Application, Demultiplexer Tree, Study of IC-74155.

3.5 Encoder-Definition, types, Priority Encoder- Decimal to BCD encoder,

3.6 Decoder-Definition, types, (2:4 and 3:8) Study of IC-74138.

14

Unit-IV Sequential Logic Circuits

4a. Draw circuit of different flip-flops using logic gates and explain its operation.

4b. Implement asynchronous and synchronous counter circuit using k-map

4c. Draw and explain different types of shift register.

4.1 Define Sequential circuit, Compare combinational and sequential circuit and Edge and Level trigger concept.

4.2 Flip Flops: S-R flip-flop using NAND gates, clocked SR flip- flop with present & clear, clocked J-K flip-flop with present & clear, Master slave J-K flip-flop, D & T flip flops. (Symbol, truth-table and operation), study of IC-7474.

4.3 Counter: Introduction, Types of counter. 4.4 Asynchronous counters- Ripple counter

and Ring counter circuit and waveforms. Design example of MOD-N counter.

4.5 Synchronous counter- Implementation of 3-bit synchronous counter using k-map with waveforms.

4.6 Study of IC-7490, Decade counter using IC-7490.

4.7 Shift Register- introduction, circuit diagram and waveforms of SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO shift registers, Bi-directional Shift register.

14

Unit-V 5a. State 5.1 Characteristics of logic gates: 08

87




Logic Families and Data Converters

characteristics of logic gates.

5b. Draw and explain operation of TTL and CMOS gates.

5c. Draw and explain operation of DAC techniques.

5d. Draw and explain operation of ADC techniques.

propagation delay, power dissipation, fan in, fan out Noise Margin.

5.2 Circuit and operation of two inputs TTL NAND gate.

5.3 Circuit and operation of two input CMOS NOR gate.

5.4 Comparison of different logic families. 5.5 DAC – Introduction, necessity, R-2R

Ladder DAC technique with derivation of output equation.

5.6 ADC- Introduction, necessity, Dual slope, 2-bit Flash type ADC, Successive approximation ADC techniques with circuit and operation.

Unit-VI Semiconductor Memories

6a. Classify different types of memories.

6b. Explain different types of memories.

6.1 Introduction to memories 6.2 Characteristics and classification of

memories RAM, ROM, volatile, Non-volatile, static, dynamic and flash.

6.3 ROM types-PROM, EPROM and EEPROM. 6.4 Memory ICs-2716, 6116

06

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Number Systems and Codes 04 04 02 10

II Logic Gates & Boolean Algebra 04 04 04 12

III Combinational Logic Circuits 04 08 08 20

IV Sequential Logic Circuits 04 08 08 20

V Logic Family and Data converters 04 06 00 10

VI Semiconductor Memories 02 06 00 08

TOTAL 22 36 22 80




88

S.

No. Unit No.



1 II Verify truth table of NOT and, OR, EX-OR, EXNOR, NOR, NAND gates.

06

2 II Implement simple Boolean equation using gates and verify output.

04

3 II Implement AND, OR and NOT gate using NOR gate and verify truth table.

04

4 II Implement and verify truth table of DeMorgan’s theorem 02

5 III Implement and verify truth table of Half and Full adder. 02

6 III Implement and Verify truth table of Half and Full Subtractor 02

7 III Implement and verify 4-bit binary adder using IC-7483. 02

8 III Verify truth table of ALU IC 74181 04

9 III Verify truth table of 8:1 Multiplexer using IC 74151 02

10 III Verify truth table of 1:8 DeMultiplexer using IC. 02

11 III Design and implement 2:4 Decoder. 02

12 III Design and implement 4:2 Priority Encoder. 04

13 IV Verify truth table of RS and JK flip-flop 04

14 IV Verify truth table of D and T flip-flop 04

15 IV Implement 4-bit ring counter using shift register. 04

16 IV Design and Implement 4-bit asynchronous UP-DOWN counter 04

17 IV Design and Implement 4-bit asynchronous MOD-5 UP counter 04

18 IV Design and Implement 3-bit synchronous UP counter 04

19 IV Implement and verify Decade counter using IC-7490. 04

TOTAL 64


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Download data sheets of IC-7400, 7404, 7408, 7432, 7486. 2. Download data sheets of IC-74151, 74154, 7483, 7490, 7474, 7476 3. Collect price list of various components required to implement digital circuit. 4. Design and implement mini-project on any combinational or sequential circuit (group of 5

students)

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Show video/animation film to demonstrate the working of various combinational and

sequential circuits. 2. Arrange expert lecture of a person in the area of digital electronics. 3. Arrange faulty circuits and provide to students for repairing.


A) Books


1 Modern Digital Electronics R. P. Jain Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd. (TMH) Fourth Edition

2 Digital Principles and Applications

Malvino Leach McGraw-Hill Education Eighth edition

3 Digital electronics: an introduction to theory and practice

William H. Gothmann

Prentice-Hall 1977

https://books.google.co.in/books?id=HdAiAAAAMAAJ&q=Digital+Electronics+Williams&dq=Digital+Electronics+Williams&hl=en&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwjg2bnM-avMAhXKE5QKHWYaAowQ6AEIGzAA



https://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&biw=1366&bih=643&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22William+H.+Gothmann%22&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwjg2bnM-avMAhXKE5QKHWYaAowQ9AgIHTAA


89

B) Software/Learning Websites 1. http://www.asic-world.com/digital/tutorial.html 2. http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Digital_Circuits


1. Bread board, LED 2. Regulated power supply +5V DC Supply 3. IC-7400, 7404, 7408, 7432, 7486 4. IC-74151, 74154, 7483, 7490, 5. Experimental kits of combinational circuits. 6. Experimental kits of sequential circuits.


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H

CO2 L M M H

CO3 L H M L L

CO4 L M

CO5 L L H H L


http://www.asic-world.com/digital/tutorial.html

https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Digital_Circuits

90

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Linear Integrated Circuits (LIC) COURSE CODE : 6248 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 04 08 03 Max. 80 20 100 25 -- 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 10 -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

Today the growth of any industry is depending upon electronics to a great extent. Integrated circuit is heart of electronics. This course provides knowledge to students about general analog principles & design methodologies using practical devices and application. It focuses on learning about signal conditioning, signal generation instrumentation, timing and control using various IC circuitries.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand and describe the working of linear integrated circuits 2. Define the Op-amp characteristics, parameters and working principle of OP-AMP and its

application. 3. Design electronic circuit using OP-AMP for various mathematical and industrial

applications. 4. Analyze and design amplifiers, active filters and waveform generators using Op-Amp. 5. Understand and Develop electronics circuits using working principle of IC-555. 6. Understand and analyze the response of frequency selective circuit such as PLL.



1. Identify different op-amp ICs 2. Draw and describe operation of different linear circuits. 3. Design, implement, analyze and test linear circuits using op-amp. 4. Troubleshooting linear integrated circuits

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Operational Amplifier

1a. Identify various types of ICs and packages

1b. Explain the working of differential amplifier

1.1 Linear Integrated circuits: classification, packages, pin identification, temperature range and other parameters

10

1c. Draw and describe labelled block diagram of op-amp.

1d. Identify the pin function of IC 741

1e. define different parameters of op-amp

1f. Interpret ideal and practical transfer

1.2 Transistor differential pair, differential amplifier with constant current bias

1.3 Importance of OP-AMP 1.4 Block diagram of op-amp, function of all

stages such as balanced, unbalanced differential amplifier with simple current source, level shifter and complementary push pull amplifier.

1.5 OPAMP IC’s 741 IC, pin diagram, pin

91




characteristics and electrical characteristics of op-amp

function. Circuit symbols and Terminals, equivalent circuit

1.6 Definitions of parameters of op-amp -Input offset voltage, Input offset current, Input bias current, differential input resistance, Input capacitance, Input voltage range, CMMR, SVRR, large signal voltage gain, supply voltages, supply current, output voltage swing, output resistance, slew rate, gain bandwidth product, output short circuit current, offset voltage adjustment.

1.7 Ideal and practical OP-AMP – Electrical characteristics.

1.8 Ideal voltage Transfer curve, Necessity of frequency compensation, offset nulling.

Unit-II OP-AMP Basic Circuits

2a. Differentiate between open loop and closed loop configuration.

2b. Identify inverting and non-inverting configuration

2c. Design and implement different basic circuits using op-amp. Construct integrator and differentiator and test their performance in various conditions.

2d. Design and test different basic circuit for mathematical operations

2e. Construct integrator and differentiator and test their performance in various conditions

2.1 Open loop and closed loop configuration of Op-Amp, its comparison.

2.2 Virtual ground concept. 2.3 Open loop and Closed loop configuration

of op-amp

Inverting Non-inverting differential amplifier, unity gain amplifier (voltage

follower),

inverter(sign changer) 2.4 Inverting and non-inverting configuration

of Adders

summing amplifier scaling Amplifier, Averaging amplifier

2.5 Subtractor. 2.6 Basic and practical Integrator 2.7 Basic and practical Differentiator 2.8 Numerical based on designing of above

circuit.

10

Unit-III Applications of OP-AMP

3a. Explain the need of signal conditioning and signal processing

3b. State the necessity and requirement of instrumentation amplifier

3c. Compute component values for different instrumentation amplifier using operational amplifier

3d. Develop and test

3.1 Need for signal conditioning and signal processing

3.2 Necessity and requirements of instrumentation amplifier Instrumentation Amplifier using two and three OP-AMP with transducer bridge Circuit diagram, operation, derivation of output voltage Equation. advantages and applications of Instrumentation amplifier

3.3 Sample and Hold circuit 3.4 Log-amplifier, Anti-log amplifier, 3.5 Analog voltage multipliers, Analog

10

92




different application circuit using op-amp

3e. Use application circuit in area of communication and industry

voltage divider 3.6 Half wave and full wave precision

rectifiers 3.7 Voltage to current converter (with

floating load, with grounded load) 3.8 Current to voltage converter.

Unit-IV Comparators and Detectors

4a. Use op-amp in nonlinear applications

4b. Assemble and test different types of detectors

4c. Demonstrate the operation of clamping and clipping

4.1 Basic concepts, transfer characteristic and applications of voltage comparator, Inverting and non-inverting comparators

4.2 Inverting and non inverting Zero-crossing detector

4.3 Phase detector 4.4 Peak detectors and Peak to Peak

detector 4.5 Window detector 4.6 Schmitt trigger 4.7 Op-amp clamping circuits: Definition of

clamper, Positive and negative clampers

4.8 Op-amp clippers

10

Unit-V Waveform Generator and Multivibrator

5a. Explain concept of oscillators

5b. Develop and analyze different types of oscillators for desired frequency output using op-amp IC 741

5c. Develop multi-vibrators for given values using timer IC 555

5.1 Concept of oscillators, Types of oscillators: Phase shift oscillators, Wien bridge oscillators, Quadrature oscillator using IC-741.

5.2 Pulse generator. Square and triangular wave generators

5.3 Types of Multi-vibrators: Mono-stable, Astable, Bi-stable usingIC-555. Schmitt trigger, voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) Missing pulse generator, Mono-stable ramp generator, Free-running ramp generator using IC-555

12

Unit-VI Active Filters and PLL

6a. Distinguish between the different types of filters or classify filters

6b. Explain different parameters of filter and steps for designing filters

6c. Design, implement and interpret the different parameters from frequency response of the filter.

6d. Use the PLL in frequency related applications

6e. design and analyze different application using PLL IC 565

6.1 Concept of passive and active filters Merits and demerits of active filters over passive filters Ideal and actual characteristics,

6.2 terms: - cut off frequency, Pass band, Stop band, center frequency, roll off rate, BW, Q-factor, first order and second order Butterworth filters, order of filter, Low pass filter, high pass filter, band pass filter ( wide band pass, narrow band pass filter) Band reject filter(wide band reject, narrow band reject filter)

All pass filter. Numerical based on design of different filters

12

93




6.3 Basic principle of PLL with block diagram Transfer characteristics

6.4 Applications of PLL as frequency multiplier, FM Demodulator, Frequency translator, AM detector

6.5 Pin configuration of PLL IC 565 and its internal block diagram, Pin configuration of VCO IC 566, its internal block diagram

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Operational amplifier 06 06 04 16

II OP-AMP basic circuits 06 04 04 14

III Applications of OP-AMP 04 04 04 12

IV Comparators and detectors 04 04 04 12

V Waveform generator and multivibrator 04 04 04 12

VI Active filters and PLL 04 04 06 14

TOTAL 28 26 26 80





7.0 SUGGESTED EXERCISES/PRACTICALS

Sr. No.

Unit No.


Hrs.

1 II Assemble and test the Inverting amplifier or non inverting amplifier using IC741 and verify equation for gain. Observe the output verify the gain equation

04

2 II Assemble and test adder or subtractor circuit using IC 741 Observe the output verify the gain equation

04

3 II Assemble and test input and output waveforms of Differentiator using IC741 for following input

04

94

Sr. No.

Unit No.


Hrs.

Sine waveform Square waveform

4 Assemble and test input and output waveforms of integrator using IC741 for following input

Sine waveform Square waveform

04

5 IV To Assemble and test Zero crossing detector Circuit using IC 741.

Observe Input and Output Waveform.

04

6 IV Assemble and test circuit of Schmitt Trigger using IC741

Determine upper threshold voltage(UTH) and lower threshold voltages(LTH) determine hysteresis voltage(HY)

04

7 III Assemble and test Voltage to current converter using IC 741 04

8 III Assemble and test current to Voltage converter using IC 741 04

9 III Assemble and observe the waveform of Half wave and full wave precision rectifiers using IC 741

04

10 III Assemble and test the waveform of Op-amp clippers 04

11 V Design and test Wien bridge oscillator using IC 741

Design and implement the circuit Observe the output on CRO Determine output frequency Verify the design

04

12 V Design and test phase shift oscillator using IC 741


04

13 VI Design and assembles Butterworth low pass filter/ high pass filter using IC 741

Design and implement Plot the frequency response Determine its cut-off frequency Verify the design

04

14 VI Design and assembles Butterworth narrow band pass /band reject filter using IC 741 Design and implement Plot the frequency response

Determine its cut-off frequency Verify the design

04

15 V Design and test Astable multivibrator circuit using IC555 / IC 741


04

16 V Design and test Monostable multivibrator circuit using IC741 / IC 741


04

TOTAL 64

95


1. Prepare journals based on practical performed in linear integrated circuit laboratory. 2. Collect datasheets of different op-amp IC’s 3. Collect the information related to different brands, make and specification of op amp 4. Assignments on the design of different circuits using op-amp and timer IC 5. Design, implement and verify any circuit using op-amp IC 741 OR timer IC 555 as a mini

project 6. Collect information related to other linear IC like instrumentation amplifiers, VCO. 7. Prepare a comparative chart of different types of op- amp used in industrial purpose. 8. Collect information regarding different op-amp and timer IC application used in industries. 9. Prepare a report on above information related to industry. 10. Design and implement different circuit using any software like MULTISIM, CIRCUIT

MAKER, LABVIEW or any analog simulation software. 9.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any):

1. Arrange industrial visit. 2. Expert lecture from industrial experts OR academicians. 3. Show videos /power point presentation from renowned experts in the area of linear

electronics stream.


A) Books


1 Linear Integrated circuits

Roy Choudhary and Jain

New age International Publishers ISBN No. 81-224-1470-2

2 Integrated Circuits K. R. Botkar Khanna Publisher, New Delhi ISBN No. 8174092080

3 Operational Amplifiers

Ramakant Gaikwad

Prentice-hall of India, New Delhi ISBN No. 0750656948

4 Operational Amplifiers Graeme and Tobey

Prentice-hall of India, New Delhi ISBN No. 0770649170


Websites: 1. http://www.wisc-online.com 2. http://www.electronics-tutorials.ws/opamp 3. http://www.allaboutcircuits.com/ 4. http://www.electronicdesign.com/ 5. http://www.555-timer-circuits.com/ 6. http://www.electroschematics.com/ 7. http://www.radio-electronics.com/ 8. www.futureelectronics.com 9. http://www.daenotes.com/


1 DC Regulated dual Power supply. 1. O/P voltage – 0 to 30 Volt, 2A in 3 range in both channel 2. Display – 3 ½ digit, 3. Load regulation – 0.5 v % + 10mv, no load full load for each channel 4. Line regulation – 0.05 % + 15 mV for +/-, Variation around 230 volt 5. O/P imp – 15 milliohms, 6. Ripple – less than 1mv rms. 7. I/P supply – 230 V +/- 10 % 50 Hz. 8. Both channel tracking mode

http://www.wisc-online.com/

http://www.electronics-tutorials.ws/opamp

http://www.allaboutcircuits.com/

http://www.electronicdesign.com/

http://www.555-timer-circuits.com/

http://www.electroschematics.com/

http://www.radio-electronics.com/

http://www.futureelectronics.com/

96

2 Function generator 3MHz. 1. Out Put wave form – Sine, Triangle, Square. 2. Frequency range – 0.1 Hz to 3 MHz. 3. Amplitude Range – 30mv to 30 Volt P- P, 4. O/P impedance – 50 V. 5. offset capability, 6. Display – 4 digit LED/ LCD

3 Pulse Generator. 1. Pulse repetition rate – 0.1 Hz to 10 MHz in 8 decade ranges. 2. Rise and fall time – 10 ns - 2 ns 3. Pulse width – 35 ns and 0.1 μsec to 1 sec in y decade range 4. O/P – 40 mV to 5 V across 50 Ω in six step, 5. Power supply – 230 v +/- 10 % 50 Hz.

4 CRO 1. Dual Channel, 4 Trace CRT / TFT based 2. Bandwidth 20 MHz/30 MHz 3. X10 magnification 20 nS max sweep rate, 4. Alternate triggering 05) Component tester 5. Digital Read out0 7) USB interface 6. (Any other Oscilloscope with additional features are also suitable


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H M H M

CO2 H H H M H H

CO3 M H H H M

CO4 H H L H H


97

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Analog Communication (ACO) COURSE CODE : 6249 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 25 -- 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 10 -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

As an electronics and Telecommunication diploma engineer, students should have fundamental knowledge of various communication systems required for transmission and reception. Student should also learn generation, modulation, demodulation, transmission and reception of audio signals.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand the principle of communication system. 2. Understand the concept of modulation and demodulation of AM and FM. 3. Understand different sections in AM and FM transmitters. 4. Understand different sections in AM and FM receivers. 5. Knows principles of radio wave propagation. 6. Understand different parameters of transmission line.


The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes: 1. Identify different modulator and demodulator circuits. 2. Draw and describe operation of different modulator and demodulator circuits. 3. Analyze modulator and demodulator circuits. 4. Trace faults in radio receiver. 5. Name the different propagation methods.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Basics of Electronic Communication

1a. Need of communication system.

1b. Define Analog, Digital, Baseband signal.

1c. Categorize different electronic communication system.

1d. Draw and explain the block diagram of communication system.

1.1 Importance, Definition: Analog signal, Digital signal, Baseband signal

1.2 Block diagram of electronic communication system

1.3 Types of electronic communication Simplex

Duplex- Full and Half 1.4 Analog Communication System 1.5 Digital communication system 1.6 Application of communication 1.7 Electromagnetic spectrum, different

bands and their frequencies. 1.8 Concept of transmission bandwidth

08

Unit-II 2a. Need and types of 2.1 Concept and need of modulation, 10

98




Amplitude Modulation

modulation. 2b. Identify carrier,

modulating signal, modulated signal and calculate modulation index.

2c. Draw circuit and explain operation of generation of AM and Balanced Modulator.

2d. Draw block diagram and explain working of AM transmitter and Suppression of Sideband.

types of modulation (AM, FM, PM) 2.2 Amplitude Modulation- definition,

modulation index, power relations, representation in time and frequency domain. mathematical expression.(simple numerical)

2.3 Generation of AM: circuit diagram, description and waveforms of Class C collector modulator (collector modulation)

2.4 Block diagram and description of : Low level AM Transmitter and High level AM transmitter

2.5 Suppression of carrier: Balanced Modulator (using diode), Suppression of Sideband using filter method

2.6 Simple numerical on AM

Unit-III Frequency Modulation

3a. Identify carrier, modulating signal, modulated signal and calculate bandwidth and deviation ratio.

3b. Draw and explain pre emphasis, de emphasis circuit.

3c. Describe Direct and Indirect method for FM generation.

3d. Draw block diagram and explain working of FM transmitter.

3.1 Frequency modulation: Definition, mathematical representation of FM, Frequency domain representation, Bandwidth, Deviation ratio, maximum deviation ratio.

3.2 Need of pre-emphasis and de- emphasis circuit: definition, diagram and working of circuitry.

3.3 Direct method for FM generation: circuit diagram and working of Transistorized reactance modulator, varactor diode modulator

3.4 Indirect method for FM generation: block diagram and description of Armstrong method

3.5 Block diagram and description of FM transmitter.

10

Unit-IV AM and FM radio receiver

4a. Categorize different types of radio receivers.

4b. Describe characteristics of radio receivers.

4c. State need of AGC 4d. Explain different radio

receivers

4.1 Types of receivers TRF receiver, block diagram and its description, disadvantages

4.2 Super heterodyne receiver, block diagram and its description. Use of antenna in transmitter and receiver.

4.3 Advantages of RF section, definition and explanation of its characteristics: Sensitivity, Selectivity and Fidelity.

4.4 IF frequency concept and factors influencing choice of IF.

4.5 Circuit diagram and operation of IF amplifier circuit.

4.6 Circuit diagram and operation of diode detectors.

4.7 AGC : Necessity, concept and

12

99




characteristics of simple and Delayed AGC.

Unit-V Transmission Line

5a. Explain the theory of transmission line

5b. Calculate characteristic impedance of transmission line.

5c. Define the terms standing wave, SWR, VSWR

5d. Analyze the properties of impedance matching stubs

5.1 Types of transmission lines 5.2 Equivalent circuit of a parallel wire

line, their advantages and disadvantages.

5.3 Coaxial cable: construction advantages and disadvantages.

5.4 Characteristic impedance Losses in transmission line

5.5 Standing waves, SWR, VSWR and Reflection Coefficient

5.6 Transmission line components- single and double stub, balun

12

Unit-VI Wave propagation

6a. Explain the theory of electromagnetic radiation.

6b. State different types of wave propagation.

6c. Define the various atmospheric layers

6d. Define the terms maximum usable frequency, critical frequency, skip distance and fading.

6.1 Fundamentals of electromagnetic wave

6.2 Transverse electromagnetic waves, polarization.

6.3 Ground wave 6.4 Ionosphere 6.5 Sky wave propagation 6.6 Space wave propagation 6.7 Concept of virtual height and actual

height. 6.8 Definition: Critical frequency,

Maximum usable frequency, skip Distance, fading.

12

TOTAL 64


Unit No. Unit Title

Distribution of Theory Marks

R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Basics of Electronic communication 04 04 -- 08

II Amplitude Modulation 08 10 02 20

III Frequency Modulation 02 08 02 12

IV AM and FM radio receivers 06 10 02 18

V Transmission Line 04 06 -- 10

VI Wave propagation 04 08 -- 12

TOTAL 28 46 06 80




100


S. No.

Unit No.



1 I Generate and observe AM wave and measure modulation index. 02

2 II Generate and observe AM wave using Class C modulator 02

3 II To obtain demodulated wave from AM wave. 02

4 II To observe the DSB-SC wave form of balanced modulator using IC1496

02

5 III Generate and observe FM wave. 02

6 III Generate and observe FM wave by using reactance modulator. 02

7 III Demodulate FM signal by using Ratio detector 02

8 IV Trace and identify the super heterodyne radio receiver sections. 04

9 IV Find out faults in radio receivers. 04

10 IV Visit to Akashwani Kendra and study the recording and broadcasting techniques and prepare report.

04

11 IV Find out sensitivity and selectivity of AM receiver. 04

12 V Measure attenuation constant of the transmission line 02

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Download different application based on electromagnetic spectrum. 2. Collect data about AM and FM frequencies from radio stations. 3. Collect the frequencies of different TV channels. 4. Collect the data about types of modulations used in different communication applications.

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Show video to demonstrate the working principles, constructional features, testing and

understandings of different types of modulations. 2. Arrange a visit to any radio station. 3. Arrange expert lecture of an industry person in the area of communication. 4. Arrange faulty electronic circuit and provide to students for repairing. (Case Study) 5. Encourage students to build communication circuits.


A) Books


1 Electronics Communication System George Kennedy Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi

2 Electronics Communication Roddy Collin Prentice Hall India, , New Delhi

3 Electronics Communication System Wayne Tomasi Pearson Publications, New Delhi

4 Communication Electronics Louis E Frenzel TATA McGraw Hill, New Delhi

5 Telecommunication Principle circuits and systems.

S. Rambhadran S. Chand Publication, New Delhi

6 Electronic communication Sanjeev Gupta Khanna Publications, New Delhi

101

B) Software/Learning Websites 1. http://www.nptel.com 2. www.circuitdiagram.net/am-radio-receiver.html 3. http://www.circuitdiagram.org/am-radio-receiver-with-mk484.html


1. Cathode ray oscilloscope 2. Regulated power supply 3. CRO Probes and connecting wires

4. Experimental kit of AM Modulator and Demodulator 5. Experimental kit of FM Modulator and Demodulator 6. Experimental kit of super heterodyne receiver

7. Experimental kit of DSB-SC modulator using IC 1496 8. Experimental kit of AM Modulator


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H M H M

CO2 H H H M H H

CO3 M H H H M

CO4 H H L H H

CO5 H H H M H M


http://www.nptel.com/

http://www.circuitdiagram.net/am-radio-receiver.html

http://www.circuitdiagram.org/am-radio-receiver-with-mk484.html

102

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Industrial Electronics and Applications (IEA) COURSE CODE : 6250 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 04 08 03 Max. 80 20 100 25 -- 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 10 -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

To make students aware & familiar with faults, concepts and techniques of processes in the industrial electronics field. The techniques described in this course are used in all types Industries and in all engineering fields.


The student will be able to, 1. Know operation and specifications of power devices 2. Understand operations like inversion, chopping and controlled rectification using power

devices 3. Understand operation of different industrial control circuits 4. Use power devices to built a power circuit


The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes: 1. Select appropriate power devices required for an industrial application/ power circuit. 2. Assemble industrial/power electronic circuit. 3. Trace the fault in given circuit. 4. Identify faulty component in given industrial circuit/power circuit. 5. Infer from the output regarding probable faults in given circuit.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Thyristor family devices

1a. Categorize different power electronic devices.

1b. Describe construction and operation of SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, Power MOSFET, SCS, SUS, SBS, LASCR, IGBT and GTO.

1c. List the applications of Power MOSFET, SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, SCS, SUS, SBS, LASCR, IGBT and GTO.

1d. Recognize different power devices.

1.1 Power Electronic Devices : Symbol, constructional diagram, operating principle, V-I characteristic, specifications and applications of SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, Power MOSFET, SCS, SUS, SBS, LASCR, IGBT and GTO.

12

1.2 Series and Parallel connection of SCRs

1.3 Static and dynamic equalizing circuits.

1e. Need of series and parallel

connection of SCRs.

1f. Circuit diagram and operation of series and parallel connection of SCRs.

Unit-II 2a. Categorize Turn -ON and Turn 2.1 Principle of high voltage, 12

103



Turn ON and Turn OFF methods of SCR

-OFF methods of SCR 2b. Draw circuit and explain

operation of R, R-C and UJT as a relaxation mode triggering circuit.

2c. Describe the concept of high voltage, radiation, thermal and dv/dt triggering.

2d. Draw circuit and explain operation of class A, B, C, D, E and F commutation method.

radiation, thermal and dv/dt triggering.

2.2 Circuit diagram and operation of R, R-C and UJT triggering circuit.

2.3 Circuit diagram and operation of class A, B, C, D, E and F commutation method.

Unit-III Phase Controlled Rectifiers

3a. Categorize different controlled rectifiers

3b. Explain with the help of a waveform, principle of phase control.

3c. Derive the expression for the output voltage of single phase controlled rectifier with R and R-L load.

3d. Draw circuit diagram and state the operation of single phase controlled rectifier with R and R-L load.

3e. Describe the effect of freewheeling diode.

3f. Draw circuit diagram and explain operation of three phase controlled rectifier with R and R-L load.

3.1 Classification of controlled rectifiers

3.2 Circuit diagram, operation and waveforms for output voltage of single phase half wave controlled rectifier with R and R-L load.

3.3 Circuit diagram, operation and waveforms for output voltage of single phase full wave rectifier with R and R-L load.

3.4 Circuit diagram, operation and wave-forms for output voltage of bridge rectifier with R and R-L load.

3.5 Circuit diagram and operation of three phase controlled rectifier with R and R-L load.

3.6 Effect of freewheeling diode

10

Unit-IV Inverters and Choppers

4a. Describe the principle of inversion and state its need

4b. Categorize inverters. 4c. Draw the circuit diagram and

explain the operation of single phase half bridge inverter

4d. Draw the circuit diagram and explain the operation of series inverter

4e. Draw the circuit diagram and explain the operation of parallel inverter

4f. Describe principle of operation of basic chopper.

4g. Draw the circuit diagram and explain the operation of step up and step down chopper.

4h. Compare inverter and chopper.

4i. State applications of inverters and choppers

4.1 Principle of inverter and its need 4.2 Classification of inverters 4.3 Circuit diagram and operation of

single phase half bridge, series and parallel inverters

4.4 Operating principle of chopper 4.5 Circuit diagram and operation of

step up and step down choppers.

4.6 Chopper configurations: Circuit diagram of single quadrant (Type A and B), Two quadrant (Type C and D)

4.7 Circuit diagram and operation of Jones Chopper

12

Unit-V

5a. Draw circuit diagram and explain operation of Light

5.1 circuit diagram and operation of Light dimmer, SCR flasher,

10

104



Industrial Control Circuits and Applications

dimmer, SCR flasher, temperature controller, DC time delay relay, opto-coupler, batch counter and smoke detector

5b. Draw block diagram of online and offline UPS and explain it.

5c. Draw block diagram of SMPS and explain it.

temperature controller, DC time delay relay, opto-coupler, batch counter and smoke detector

5.2 Block diagram of online and offline UPS and their operation

5.3 Block diagram of SMPS

Unit-VI Speed Control of DC and AC Motors

6a. Draw circuit diagram and explain operation of DC motor speed control using armature voltage control

6b. Draw circuit diagram and explain operation of speed control of induction motor using V/f method.

6.1 Circuit diagram and operation of DC motor speed control using SCR and armature voltage control method.

6.2 Circuit diagram and operation of speed control of induction motor using V/f method.

08

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Thyristor family devices 08 04 04 16

II Turn ON and Turn OFF methods of SCR 04 04 04 12

III Phase controlled Rectifiers 04 04 04 12

IV Inverters and Choppers 04 04 08 16

V Industrial Control circuits and applications 08 -- 08 16

VI Speed control of DC and AC Motors -- 04 04 08

TOTAL 28 20 32 80





105

S.

No. Unit No.



1 I Identify different power electronic devices. 04

2 I Plot V-I characteristics of SCR and Diac/Triac 04

3 II Assemble R triggering circuit on breadboard or PCB. 04

4 II Assemble R-C triggering circuit on breadboard or PCB. 04

5 III Assemble UJT relaxation oscillator triggering circuit on breadboard or PCB.

04

6 II Assemble the circuit of Class C commutation method on breadboard or PCB.

04

7 III Test and measure the output of single phase half wave controlled rectifier with R-L load on CRO.

04

8 III Test and measure the output of single phase full wave controlled rectifier with R- load on CRO.

04

9 IV Test and measure performance of series inverter circuit on experimental kit.

04

10 IV Test and measure performance of step-up chopper 04

11 V Assemble the circuit of light dimmer using Triac on breadboard or PCB.

04

12 V Test and measure performance of DC time delay relay using SCR on experimental kit.

04

13 V Test and measure performance of SMPS 04

14 V Test and measure performance of UPS 04

15 VI Measure the speed of a DC motor for different armature voltages using SCR.

04

16 VI Test and measure performance of induction motor speed control circuit.

04

TOTAL 64


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Download data sheets of Power MOSFET, SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, SCS, SUS, SBS, LASCR, IGBT

and GTO. 2. Collect data about prices, specifications, of power devices from local market. 3. Build R- triggering circuit for SCR. 4. Collect catalogues of AC and DC drives from market. Do comparative study. 5. Visit to UPS industry and collect data.


1. Show video/animation film to demonstrate the working principles, constructional features, testing and maintenance of different types of power electronic devices and circuits.

2. Arrange a visit to process control industry which uses power electronic circuits. 3. Arrange expert lecture of an industry person in the area of industrial electronics.


A) Books


1 Thyristor & its Applications

Ram Murty PHI Learning

2 Power Electronics P. C. Sen Tata McGraw-Hill Education ISBN:0-07-462400-8

3 Power Electronics M. D. Singh, K. Tata McGraw-Hill Education (Second

106


B. Khanchandani

Edition) ISBN:13-978-0-07-058389-4

4 Power Electronics M. H. Rashid PEARSON Education, (Second Edition) ISBN:13-978-0-12-068479-7

5 Power Electronics Devices Circuits and Applications

V. R. Moorthi Oxford University Press ISBN:13-978-0-19-567092-9

6 Industrial Electronics G. K. Mittal Khanna Publication


1. http://www.powerguru.org/power-electronics-design-simulation-analysis-tools 2. http://powersimtech.com/products/psi


1. Cathode ray oscilloscope 2. Regulated power supply 3. Power scope 4. V-I Characteristics of SCR – Experimental kit 5. SCR triggering using DC voltage – Experimental kit 6. SCR triggering using RC-network – Experimental kit 7. Commutation methods of SCR – Experimental kit 8. Single phase half controlled full wave rectifier with R-load– Experimental kit 9. Single phase half wave controlled rectifier with R- load – Experimental kit

10. Series Inverter– Experimental kit

11. Light dimmer – Experimental kit 12. Time delay relay using UJT and SCR.


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H H H M

CO2 H H H

CO3 H H H

CO4 H H H H

CO5 H H H


http://powersimtech.com/products/psi

107

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : C Programming (CPG) COURSE CODE : 6251 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 -- 02 05 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- 25 125

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

C is general purpose structural language that is powerful, efficient and compact, which combines features of high level language and low level language. It is closer to Man and Machine both. Due to this inherent flexibility and tolerance it is suitable for different development environments. Due to these powerful features C has not lost its importance and popularity in recently developed and advanced software industry. C can also be used for system level programming, C is still considered as first priority programming language.


The student will be able to, 1. Describe the concepts of constants, variables, data types and operators. 2. Develop programs using input and output operations. 3. Write programs using different looping and branching statements. 4. Write programs based on arrays and strings handling functions. 5. Write programs using user-defined functions, structures and union. 6. Apply knowledge pointer in C Programming.



1. Explain the concept of c. 2. Explain operators& data input and output functions 3. Implement and understand decision making and looping. 4. Explain concept of array and string. 5. Learn how to create a functions and structure. And understand the categories of function. 6. Implement the basic concept of pointers.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Introduction to C

1a. Introduction and history of C

1b. Basics structure of c

1.1 History of C 1.2 Basics of Algorithm and Flowchart in C,

Steps for executing a C program 1.3 Character set, tokens, constants,

variables, keywords C operators, C expressions, data types in c, keywords, c Operators, declaration, constants.

1.4 Structure of C program, Rules for writing a C program

1.5 Compilation & Execution

08

1c. compilation and execution

Unit-II

2a. Operators 2b. Input and Output

2.1 Arithmetic Operators Assignment Operator 2.2 Unary operators

08

108




Operators and I/O Library Functions

Library Functions

2.3 Relational & Logical Operators, 2.4 Conditional & Comma Operator 2.5 printf() 2.6 scanf() 2.7 getchar() 2.8 putchar() 2.9 gets() 2.10 puts()

Unit-III Decision Making

3a. Basic of decision making and branching.

3b. loops

3.1 Decision making and branching 3.2 if Statement(if, if-else, if-else ladder,

nested if-else) 3.3 Switch, break, continue, go-to statement 3.4 Decision making and looping 3.5 While, do – while, for Statements 3.6 Nested loops

10

Unit-IV Arrays and Strings

4a. basic of array 4b. basic of string

4.1 Declaration and initialization of one dimensional, two dimensional and character arrays, accessing array elements.

4.2 Declaration and initialization of string variables, string handling functions from standard library (strlen(), strcpy(), strcat(), strcmp()).

10

Unit-V Functions and Structures

5a. basic of functions 5b. basic of structures

5.1 Need of functions, scope and lifetime of variables, defining functions, function call (call by value, call by reference), return values, storage classes, Category of function (No argument No return value, No argument with return value, argument with return value), recursion.

5.2 Defining structure, declaring and accessing structure Members, initialization of structure, arrays of structure.

08

Unit-VI Pointers

6a. To learn basic of pointers

6b. Implement pointers by call by value and call by reference

6.1 Understanding pointers, declaring pointer variable, initialization of pointer variable, accessing address of a variable

6.2 Comparison of call by value & call by reference

04

TOTAL 48


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I INTRODUCTION TO C 04 04 04 12

II Operators and I/O Library Functions 05 10 05 20

III Decision making 04 04 04 12

IV Arrays and string 05 06 05 16

V Functions and Structures 04 04 04 12

VI Pointers 02 04 02 08

TOTAL 24 32 24 80

109




S. No.

Unit No.



1 I Installation and study of Turbo C editor and draw Flowchart algorithm of simple program.

02

2 II Program for standard I/O library functions 02

3 III To find greatest/ smallest of 3 numbers. (use if, if else, nested if) 04

4 III To find even or odd numbers. 02

5 III Display menu 1. Addition 2. Subtraction 3. Multiplication 4. Division and execute it using switch case.

02

6 IV To display all even numbers from 1-100. 02

7 IV To find smallest / largest number from array elements 02

8 IV To sort array elements in ascending order. 02

9 V To enter elements for 3X3 matrix and display them. 04

10 V To calculate addition of 2 dimensional matrix. 02

11 V To calculate area of circle using function. 04

12 VI program to access address of variable using pointer 04

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Visit industry to understand the c programming projects. 2. Prepare Seminar on File handling in C programming

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Demo lectures with power point presentations using LCD projector should be arranged to

develop programming concepts of students.


A) Books


1 Programming in ’C’ E. Balgurusamy Tata McGraw Hill

2 Let us ‘C’ Yashavant Kanetkar BPB

3 Complete reference C Herbert Shildt Tata McGraw Hill

4 The C Programming Language

Brian Kernighan and Dennis Ritchie Paperback

110

B) Software/Learning Websites 1. http://www.iu.hio.no/~mark/CTutorial/CTutorial.html 2. http://apex.vtc.com/c-programming.php 3. http://www.eskimo.com/~scs/cclass/cclass.html 4. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c/lesson1.Html


Hardware Intel Pentium Processor N3700 (2M Cache, up to 2.40 GHz), Windows 10 Home 64bit English, 2GB (1x2GB) 1600MHz DDR3L Memory, 500GB 5400 rpm Hard Drive, 19.5-inch HD+ (1600 x 900) Anti-Glare LED-Backlit Display, 2GB (1x2GB) 1600MHz DDR3L Memory, 500GB 5400 rpm Hard Drive, Intel HD Graphics, Tray load DVD Drive (RW to DVD/CD), Ports Side 2 USB 3.0 Rear 2 USB 2.0, 45 – RJ 10/100/1000 Gigabit, Wireless Keyboard and Mouse-KM636 - US International (QWERTY) – Black, Wireless mouse included with Keyboard

Software Borland Turbo C Compiler/Editor 10.0 MAPPING MATRIX OF PO’S AND CO’S:

Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 L M H M

CO2 M H H H M L

CO3 M H H M L M

CO4 M H H M M L

CO5 L H M M M L

CO6 M H M M M M


111

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE COURSE : Applied Mathematics (AMT) COURSE CODE : 6301 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 00 -- 03 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- -- 100

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- -- --

1.0 RATIONALE:

The study of mathematics is necessary to develop in the students the skills essential for new technological development. This course introduces some applications of engineering, through which the students can understand mathematics with engineering principles.


The student will be able to, 1. Acquire knowledge of mathematical terms, concepts, principles and different methods. 2. Develop ability to apply mathematical method to solve engineering problems. 3. Acquire sufficient mathematical technique necessary for practical problems. 4. Apply the relation between mathematics and applications in engineering.


The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to solve engineering and applied mathematical problems using

1. Methods of integration 2. Definite integral and its application 3. Differential equation and its application 4. Numerical methods for solving algebraic and simultaneous equations 5. Laplace’s transform. 6. Probability distribution.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Topics and Sub-topics

Hours

Unit-I Integration

1a. Solve integration problem using rules and formulae

1b. Apply method of integration for solving problem

1.1 Definition of integration, integral as anti- derivative, integration of standard functions.

1.2 Rules of integration (Integral of sum or difference of functions, scalar multiplication)

12

1.3 Methods of integration. a. Integration by method of

substitution & by using trigonometric transformation

b. Integration of rational functions & by method of partial fraction

c. Integration by parts

112




Hours

Unit-II Definite Integration And Its Application

2a. Apply definite integration to solve engineering problems, area Volume and R.M.S. value.

2.1 Definite Integration a. Definition of definite integral b. Properties of definite integral with

simple problems c. Application of definite integration

Area under curve, area bounded by two curves. Volume generated by revolution of curve, RMS value & mean value.

08

Unit-III Differential Equations

3a. To form and solve Differential Equation

3b. Apply various method to solve differential equations

3c. Solve engineering problems using differential equation.

3.1 Definition of differential equation, order and degree of differential equation. Formation of differential equation for function containing single or double constants.

3.2 Solution of differential equations of first order and first degree such as a. Variable separable form b. Reducible to variable separable c. Homogeneous differential equation d. Linear differential equation e. Bernoulli’s differential equation.

3.3 Applications of differential equations.

08

Unit-IV Numerical Methods

4a. Solve algebraic equations by using Bisection method and Newton Raphson Method

4b. Solve simultaneous Equations by using Gauss-Seidel method and Jacobi’s method

4c. Apply Lagrange’s interpolation formula and Newton forward interpolation formula

4.1 Solution of algebraic equations using iterative method a. Bisection method b. Newton-Raphson method.

4.2 Solution of simultaneous equations containing three unknowns – iterative methods a. Gauss-Seidel method b. Jacobi’s method

4.3 Interpolation a. Lagrange’s interpolation formula b. Newton’s forward difference

4.4 Interpolation formula

08

Unit-V Laplace transform

5a. Acquire knowledge of Laplace transform and Inverse Laplace transform.

5b. Apply Laplace Transform to solve Differential Equations.

5.1 Definition of Laplace transform and standard formulae of Laplace transform

5.2 Properties of Laplace transform (linearity, first & second shifting, multiplication by tn, division by t )

5.3 Inverse Laplace transform, using partial fraction

5.4 Laplace transform of derivatives 5.5 Application of Laplace transform for

solving differential equation.

06

Unit-VI Probability

6a. Apply Binomial Distribution

6b. Apply Poisson’s

6.1 Binomial distribution 6.2 Poisson’s distribution 6.3 Normal distribution (simple examples)

06

113




Hours

Distribution Distribution 6c. Apply Normal

Distribution

TOTAL 48


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Integration 04 08 08 20

II Definite Integration and its application 04 04 04 12

III Differential Equations 04 08 04 16

IV Numerical Methods 04 04 08 16

V Laplace Transform 02 04 02 08

VI Probability distribution. 02 04 02 08

TOTAL 20 32 28 80

6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/PRACTICALS/TASKS: Unit wise home assignment, containing ten problems. 7.0 STUDENT ACTIVITIES:

Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Teacher guided self learning activities. 2. Applications to solve identified Engineering problems and use of Internet. 3. Learn graphical software: Excel, DPlot, Graph etc.


Not Acceptable 9.0 LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) Books


1 Mathematics for polytechnic student (III) S. P. Deshpande Pune Vidyarthi Gruha

2 Applied Mathematics Kumbhojkar Phadake Prakashan

3 Numerical Methods S. S. Sastry Prentice Hall Of India

4 Text book of Applied Mathematics, Volume I&II

P. N. Wartikar, J. N. Wartikar

Pune Vidyarthi Gruha Pune


1. http://www.mathsisfun.com/calculus/integration-definite.html 2. http://www.intmath.com/applications-integration/applications-integrals-intro.php 3. http://www.maths.surrey.ac.uk/explore/vithyaspages/differential.html 4. http://tutorial.math.lamar.edu/Classes/DE/LaplaceIntro.aspx 5. http://library2.lincoln.ac.nz/documents/Normal-Binomial-Poisson.pdf


1. Scientific Calculator 2. Computer system with Printer and Internet system. 3. LCD Projector.

114


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M L

CO2 H M L

CO3 H M L

CO4 H M L

CO5 H M L

CO6 H M L


115

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE / DD / ID COURSE : Environmental Studies (EVS) COURSE CODE : 6302 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


-- -- 02 02 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing a grave environmental crisis. It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to protect the environment. The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology, Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources and mining, forests.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand and realize nature of the environment, its components and inter-relationship

between man and environment. 2. Understand the relevance and importance of the natural resources in the sustainability of

life on earth and living standard. 3. Comprehend the importance of ecosystem and biodiversity. 4. Identify different types of environmental pollution and control measures. 5. Correlate the exploitation and utilization of conventional and non-conventional resources.


1. Explain uses of resources, their overexploitation and importance for environment 2. Describe major ecosystem 3. Suggest measurers for conservation of biodiversity 4. Identify measures for prevention of environmental pollution 5. Describe methods of water management 6. Identify effects of Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain and Ozone layer 7. Explain Concept of Carbon Credits 8. State important provisions of acts related to environment

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:

There are no separate classes for theory. The relevant theory has to be discussed before the practical during the practical sessions.

116



Unit-I

Importance of Environmental Studies

1a. Define the terms related to Environmental Studies

1b. State importance of awareness about environment

1.1 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies

1.2 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues

Unit-II Natural Resources

2a. Define natural resources 2b. Identify uses of natural

resources, their overexploitation and importance for environment

2.1 Uses of natural resources, overexploitation of resources and importance for environment

2.2 Renewable and Non-renewable resources

2.3 Forest Resources 2.4 Water Resources 2.5 Mineral Resource 2.6 Food Resources

Unit-III Ecosystems

3a. Define Ecosystem 3b. List functions of ecosystem 3c. Describe major ecosystem

in world

3.1 Concept of Ecosystem 3.2 Structure and functions of ecosystem 3.3 Major ecosystems in the world

Unit-IV Biodiversity and its Conservation

4a. Define biodiversity 4b. State levels of biodiversity 4c. Suggest measurers for

conservation of biodiversity

4.1 Definition of Biodiversity 4.2 Levels of biodiversity 4.3 Threats to biodiversity 4.4 Conservation of biodiversity

Unit-V Environmental Pollution

5a. Classify different types of pollution

5b. Enlist sources of pollution 5c. State effect of pollution 5d. Identify measures for

prevention of pollution

5.1 Definition, Classification, sources, effects and prevention of

Air pollution Water Pollution Soil Pollution Noise Pollution

5.2 E- waste management

Unit-VI Social Issues and Environment

6a. Describe methods of water management

6b. Identify effects of Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain and Ozone Layer

6c. Explain Concept of Carbon Credits

6.1 Concept of sustainable development 6.2 Water conservation, Watershed

management. Rain water harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits.

6.3 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer Depletion,

6.4 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages

Unit-VII Environmental Protection

7a. State important provisions of acts related to environment

7.1 Importance of the following acts and their provisions:

Environmental Protection Act Air (Prevention and Control of

Pollution) Act Water (Prevention and Control of

Pollution) Act Wildlife Protection Act Forest Conservation Act Population Growth: Aspects,

importance and effect on environment

Human Health and Human Rights ISO 14000

117

5.0 SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH MARKS (THEORY): Not Applicable



SR. No.

Unit No.

Practical Exercises Approx. Hrs.

required

1 I Report on Importance and public awareness of Environmental Studies.

04

2 II Report on Use of natural resources and overexploitation of Resources

04

3 II Visit /Video Demonstration to Renewable / Non-renewable (wind mill, hydropower station, thermal power station)/ resources of energy.

04

4 II Visit to polyhouse and writing report on its Effects on agriculture food production.

04

5 III Assignment/Report on structure and functions of ecosystem. 04

6 IV Visit to a local area to environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain and writing report on it.

04

7 V Group discussion on Environmental Pollution (Air pollution/Water pollution/Soil pollution/Noise pollution/E-waste)

04

8 V Visit to study recycling of plastic and writing a report on it. 04

9 VI Visit to Water conservation site / Watershed management site / Rain water harvesting site and writing a report on it.

04

10 VI Visit to study organic farming/Vermiculture/biogas plant and writing a report on it.

04

11 VI Video Demonstration /Expert Lecture Report on Climate Change and Global warming

04

12 VII Write important provisions of Acts related to Environment/ Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act/Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act/ Wildlife Protection Act/ Forest Conservation Act

04

TOTAL 32

Note: Any Four Visits/ Video Demonstration and Four Reports/Assignments from above list to be conducted.


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1) Collect articles regarding Global Warming, Climate Change 2) Collect information regarding current techniques, materials etc. in environmental system. 3) Tree plantation and maintenance of trees in the Campus. 4) Cleanliness initiative (Swachhata Abhiayan)

118


1. Course Video 2. Expert Lectures


A) Books


1 Environmental Studies

Erach Bharucha Universities Press (India) Private Ltd, Hyderabad

2 Environmental Studies

Dr. Suresh K Dhameja

S K Kataria & Sons New Delhi

3 Basics of Environmental Studies U K Khare Tata McGraw Hill


Not Applicable



Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M M H M

CO2 H M M H M

CO3 H M M M H M M

CO4 H M M M H M M M

CO5 H M M H M

CO6 H M M H M M

CO7 H M M H M

CO8 H M M H M


119

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE / DD COURSE : Industrial Organization and Management (IOM) COURSE CODE : 6303 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 -- -- 03 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- -- 100

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- -- --

1.0 RATIONALE:

Diploma engineer has to work in organization. One must know how organization works, structure of organization, departments & their roles in organization. One should be familiar with concept of organization & its importance in management.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand the concepts of organization. 2. Resolve the major challenges in the design of an effective organizational structure. 3. Develop critical thinking, research, oral and written communication skills. 4. Promote an understanding to create organizational values and satisfy their stakeholders. 5. Know the preventive measures for accidents and safety. 6. Apply the various tools for scientific management.


The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes: 1. Identify the organization and its types with ownerships. 2. State the principles of management with different levels. 3. Describe the types of accidents and its measures. 4. Work as a production supervisor and store officer. 5. Co-ordinate the functions of HRM and Marketing departments. 6. Use the practices of CPM/PERT and Supply Chain Management.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I

Organization and Ownerships

1a. Describe organization and its types

1b. State various types of ownership firms

a. Organization 1.1 Concept of organization 1.2 Types of organization structures as line,

line and staff, functional organizational structures, their merits and demerits.

08

b. Ownerships 1.3 Proprietorship 1.4 Partnership, Types of partners,

Partnership deed. 1.5 Joint stock companies, Private Limited,

Public Limited, Joint Ventures. 1.6 Govt. departments, Govt. undertaking,

Public corporation 1.7 Cooperative Organizations 1.8 Merits & demerits of all above

mentioned types of ownership.

120




Unit-II Scientific Management

2a. Explain functions of scientific management

2b. State the principles of management.

2c. Describe different levels of management.

Scientific Management 2.1 Concept and importance of scientific

management. 2.2 Principles of Management, Taylor,

Fayol’s Theories of management. 2.3 Functions of Management, Levels of

Management and skills at different levels

06

Unit-III Industrial Developments in India and Industrial Acts

3a. Explain the major areas of Indian industries

3b. Describe types of accidents & safety measures

3c. State provisions of industrial acts.

a. Industrial Developments in India 3.1 Major areas of industry in India

(Automobile, Cement, Steel and Agro industries)

3.2 Introduction of WTO and GATT b. Industrial Acts 3.3 Safety Management

Causes of accidents Types of Industrial Accidents Preventive measures Safety procedures

3.4 Industrial Legislation - Necessity of Acts, Provisions of following acts: Indian Factory Act Workman Compensation Act Minimum Wages Act

08

Unit-IV Production and Material Management

4a. Explain the types of production systems

4b. Describe the material management techniques

4c. State use of ERP and MRP

a. Production Management

4.1 Concept of production management

4.2 Types of production systems – job, batch and mass

4.3 Merits and demerits of all above production systems

b. Material Management

4.4 Inventory Concept, its classification, functions of inventory

4.5 ABC Analysis - Necessity & Steps

4.6 Economic Order Quantity Concept, graphical representation, determination of EOQ

4.7 Standard steps in Purchasing

4.8 Modern Techniques of Material Management- JIT, KANBAN, VSM, LEAN.

4.9 Material Resource Planning (MRP) - Functions of MRP, Input to MRP, Benefits of MRP

4.10 Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) - Concept, advantages & disadvantages of ERP

10

Unit-V Marketing and Human Resource Management

5a. Explain the functions of marketing management

5b. Describe selection procedure by HRM

a. Marketing Management 5.1 Concept of marketing management and

importance 5.2 Functions of marketing promotion of

sales, market segmentation, marketing mix, 4P’s and Physical distribution.

08

121




dept. 5c. Importance of

Employee training

b. Human Resource Management 5.3 Recruitment selection procedure,

Functions of HRM Dept. 5.4 Training of human resources- objectives,

importance and methods of training

Unit-VI CPM/PERT and Supply Chain Management

6a. Explain the importance of CPM/PERT

6b. Describe the need of SCM in industry

a. CPM/PERT 6.1 CPM & PERT – definitions of node,

activity, dummy activity, resources, duration, network, earliest start time, earliest finish time, latest start time, latest finish time, float.

6.2 Drawing of network and determination of critical path.

6.3 Analysis of network. b. Supply Chain Management 6.4 Definition and Concept of SCM 6.5 SCM practices- Relational, Vendor

Managed Inventory (VMI), Agile Manufacturing and Postponement.

6.6 Green SCM 6.7 Concept of cross docking 6.8 Case study of Wall Mart and Dell

Computer

08

TOTAL 48


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I a. Organization -- 04 -- 04

b. Ownerships 02 04 -- 06

II Scientific Management 02 04 02 08

III a. Industrial Developments in India 02 04 -- 06

b. Industrial Acts 04 04 -- 08

IV a. Production Management 02 04 02 08

b. Material Management 02 04 02 08

V a. Marketing Management -- 08 -- 08

b. Human Resource Management 02 06 -- 08

VI a. CPM/PERT 02 02 04 08

b. Supply Chain Management 02 02 04 08

TOTAL 20 46 14 80




Not Applicable

122


1. Collect the organization structures of manufacturing, cement, pharmacy, electrical, govt. Sectors.

2. Find out the information of above mentioned industries by internet. 3. Collect the rules of industrial acts by ILO websites. 4. Gather information about chain structures of material management by logistics’ industries. 5. Collect the information about WTO and GATT by online resources.

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (IF ANY):

1. Show organization structures of different industries, govt. sectors, private firms etc. 2. Arrange a visit to industries, govt. offices located at nearby areas. 3. Arrange expert seminar/lectures by a resource person from industry in the area of

manufacturing, HRM, Logistics etc. 9.0 LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) Books


1 Industrial Engineering & Management Dr. O. P. Khanna Dhanpat Rai & Sons New Delhi

2 Industrial Engineering & Management Banga & Sharma Khanna Publication

3 Business Administration & Management

Dr. S. C. Saksena Sahitya Bhavan Agra

4 The process of Management W. H. Newman E. Kirby Warren Andrew R. McGill

Prentice- Hall

5 Entrepreneurship Development & Management

Dr. R. K. Singal S. K. Kataria & Sons, New Delhi

6 Production Planning & Control Dr. R. K. Singal S. K. Kataria & Sons, New Delhi


1. http://www.wto.org/ 2. http://www.gatt.org/ 3. http://www.worldtradelaw.net/ 4. http://www.supplychainbrain.com/ 5. http://www.legallyindia.com/


Not Applicable 10.0 MAPPING MATRIX OF PO’S AND CO’S:

Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 M

CO2 L M

CO3 M L

CO4 L H

CO5 L L

CO6 M


https://www.wto.org/

http://www.gatt.org/

http://www.worldtradelaw.net/

http://www.supplychainbrain.com/

http://www.legallyindia.com/

123

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE COURSE : Supervisory Skills (SSL) COURSE CODE : 6305 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 -- -- 03 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- -- 100

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- -- --

1.0 RATIONALE:

A diploma engineer working in the industry has to co-ordinate and supervises a group of workers. An engineer should have a leadership attitude. This course will help to develop requisite traits in the diploma engineer.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand importance of scientific management. 2. Understand the controlling performance of process & people. 3. Know organizing, staffing and training of worker. 4. Understand the importance of leadership. 5. Know industrial psychology and human relation. 6. Know safety awareness and health administration in the industry. 7. Understand role of supervisor in industry.



1. Explain the importance of scientific management. 2. Describe controlling performance of process & team of worker. 3. Explain the methods to train the worker. 4. State the qualities of leader. 5. Describe progressive disciplinary action to worker. 6. Enlist causes of accident and prevention of accident. 7. Explain the role of supervisor towards management and worker.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I

Scientific Management and Management

1a. Define the term management.

1b. Differentiate between management, administration and organisation.

1.1 Management-definition, its job, Difference between management, administration and organization. Levels and its functions of management.

06

of Job 1c. Explain the necessity and steps of scientific management.

1d. Describe handling complexity and its steps.

1.2 Definition, Necessity and, procedure of scientific management

1.3 Handling complexity and its steps. 1.4 Optimization and its steps.

Unit-II 2a. Explain objective of 2.1 Planning by supervisor, necessity, 06

124




Supervisory Management

planning by supervisory

2b. Describe the different types of budget.

2c. Explain the controlling of performance of team of worker in term of quantity & cost.

steps and objectives 2.2 Budgeting at supervisory level,

objective and its advantages. Types of budget.

2.3 Deciding mental & physical activities of workers.

2.4 Controlling the performance of process & team of worker in term of quantity / quality/ time/ cost.

Unit-III Organising, Staffing and Training.

3a. Define organising. 3b. State physical

resources needed for production.

3c. Explain staffing with human resources.

3d. Define Merit rating. 3e. Explain methods of

merit rating. 3f. Describe needs &

objectives of training. 3g. List types of training. 3h. Explain types of

training.

3.1 Organizing effectively the department, provision of physical resources, matching human need with job need, allotment of to individual and establishing relationship among person working in a group.

3.2 Staffing with the human Resources. 3.3 Appraisal of Employee performance

or merit rating and its types. 3.4 Training-definition, needs and

objectives its types –induction and orientation, by skill & old worker, on job training, apprentice training, by special schools.

06

Unit-IV Activating the Work Force

4a. Define-Motivation. 4b. Explain the

motivating factors. 4c. State qualities of

leader. 4d. Explain democratic

leadership. 4e. Explain need of

effective communication.

4.1 Motivation –definition, types and motivating factors.

4.2 Leadership-definition, qualities of leader, Role of leadership, methods- authoritarian, democratic and lassez- faire or free rein.

4.3 Effective employee communication.

08

Unit-V Managing Problem Performance

5a. State symptoms of troubled employee.

5b. Explain causes of industrial dispute.

5c. Describe collective bargaining.

5d. State the causes of substandard performance.

5e. Explain progressive disciplinary action.

5.1 Counselling troubled employees-symptoms, need and guidelines for counselling.

5.2 Industrial dispute-causes, strikes, settlement of industrial dispute, collective bargaining, conciliation & mediation and arbitration.

5.3 Disciplining-definition, Substandard performance, progressive disciplinary action.

06

125




Unit-VI Employee Health and Safety under OSHA

6a. Define accident. 6b. List causes of

accident. 6c. Explain the effect of

accident to industry, worker and society.

6d. Describe role of OSHA

6.1 Accident-definition, Causes of accident, Prevention of accident, effect of accident to industry, worker and society, Preparation of accident report and investigation.

6.2 Occupational diseases, hazards, safety awareness.

6.3 Role of OSHA. (Occupational safety & health administration), industrial health.

06

Unit-VII Supervisor’s Role in Labour Relation.

7a. Explain role of supervisor towards management and work.

7b. Describe function of labour union.

7.1 Role of supervisor in management/ worker/fellow Supervisor/work.

7.2 Labour or trade union-function, right and liabilities.

04

Unit-VIII Moving up in your Organisation

8a. Explain activities to be done at end of shift by supervisor.

8b. Describe sort of attitude and action by supervisor while moving up in organization.

8.1 Taking charge of career to know organization, Department & Worker etc. Planning the day work, activities to be done before shift start, beginning, during and end of shift.

8.2 Moving up –sort of attitude and action by supervisor

06

TOTAL 48


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Scientific Management and Management of Job

04 04 04 12

II Supervisory Management 04 04 04 12

III Organizing, staffing and Training. 04 06 -- 10

IV Activating the work force. 06 04 -- 10

V Managing problem performance. 04 04 04 12

VI Employee Health and safety under OSHA 04 02 04 10

VII Supervisor’s role in Labour Relation. -- 06 - 06

VIII Moving up in your organisation. 04 04 -- 08

TOTAL 30 34 16 80




Not Applicable

126


1. Prepare safety charts and slogan. 2. Exhibition of safety charts and slogan.


1. Show video clips on management and motivation.

2. Arrange expert lecture of industry person in the area of safety awareness in industry.

3. Show video clip on safety in industry. 9.0 LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) Books


1 Industrial Engineering and management O. P. Khanna Dhanpat Rai & Sons

2 Industrial organization & Engineering Economics

Banga & Sharma Khanna Publication

3 Industrial management Shrinivasan Dhanpat Rai & Sons


1. http://www.management.com

2. www.safety.com



Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 M H M M

CO2 H M L M M

CO3 M H M M M M

CO4 H M H M M

CO5 M M M M

CO6 M M M M M

CO7 M M M M M M


http://www.management.com/

http://www.safety.com/

127

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE COURSE : Marketing Management (MKM) COURSE CODE : 6306 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 -- -- 03 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- -- 100

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- -- --

1.0 RATIONALE:

The Marketing of product is the most important aspect of each industry. It needs to be systematically surveyed and planned as in the increasing competitive situation. An organization should have a profit for its existence. An engineer as entrepreneur, marketing set up of a company should have knowledge of marketing management. The job opportunities for an engineer in the marketing are increasing due to essentiality of person to deal the technical matter and give related feedback for improvement of product marketing function.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand various elements of market survey and design its methodology. 2. Understand the duties of marketing personal. 3. Learn the concept of pricing, branding, product mix etc. 4. Understand various marketing strategies. 5. Study various sales Forecasting methods and product diversification. 6. Acquire knowledge of various tools/techniques of Market research and product

promotion. 3.0 COURSE OUTCOMES:


1. Assess market opportunities by analyzing customers, competitors, collaborators, considering strengths and weaknesses of a company.

2. Develop effective marketing strategies to achieve organizational objectives. 3. Design a strategy implementation program to maximize its chance of success. 4. Assess scope for international marketing. 5. Use various tools/techniques of Market research and product promotion. 6. Apply various innovative ideas of advertisement for enhancing the sales.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Marketing Management Concept

1a. Explain the needs, wants and demands of customers.

1b. Describe the concept of marketing management.

1c. Explain the functions of marketing management.

1.1 Needs, wants and Demands, Types of market demands, Products (Goods, services and Ideas), cost and satisfaction.

1.2 Markets, Marketers and prospects, primary purpose of marketing management.

1.3 Simple marketing system, value exchange and transaction, functions of marketing.

10

128




1d. Differentiate between selling and marketing.

1e. Explain the techniques of maximizing, consumption, customer choice and satisfaction.

1.4 The product, production and selling concept.

1.5 The marketing concept, difference between marketing and selling, the social marketing concept.

1.6 Maximize consumption, satisfaction, choice, product life, quality, customer value and consumer satisfaction, Customer – delight, life time customer.

1.7 Marketing environment – value, macro and micro environment.

1f. Distinguish between macro and micro environment.

1g. Explain techniques of maximizing consumer satisfaction, choice, product life etc.

Unit-II Marketing Management Process

2a. Explain various types of market segmentation.

2b. Explain product life cycle.

2c. Describe 4P’s of marketing.

2d. Explain the significance of different techniques in product promotion.

2e. Differentiate between Direct and Indirect marketing.

2.1 Market segmentation: Basis for segmentation- Geographic / Demographic / psychographic segmentations, benefits of Market segmentation.

2.2 Product: Concept of Product, New product development process.

2.3 Product Life cycle, Stages in PLC and Marketing Strategies.

2.4 Marketing mix: 4 P’s, significance of 4P’s.

2.5 Methods of marketing- Direct and Mass marketing.

2.6 Product promotion- Role of advertisement, personnel selling and internet in marketing promotion, mail marketing.

08

Unit-III Price Decisions

3a. Explain the significance of pricing in marketing management.

3b. Describe the different pricing methodologies.

3.1 Importance of pricing, price setting in practice

3.2 Cost oriented pricing- mark-up pricing, target pricing.

3.3 Demand oriented pricing, price discrimination.

3.4 Competition oriented pricing- going rate pricing, sealed bid pricing.

06

Unit-IV Marketing Research

4a. Explain the concept, scope, objectives, importance and limitation of market research.

4b. Explain various methods of data collection.

4c. Describe the market research tools and techniques.

4d. Differentiate between primary data and secondary data.

4.1 Market research – Introduction, Nature, Scope, objective, importance, limitations and issue formulation.

4.2 Source and collection of marketing data- primary data, secondary data.

4.3 Methods of collection of primary data- observation, mail, personal interview, television etc.

4.4 Market Research Techniques- National Readership survey, consumer panel, test marketing.

08

129




Unit-V Advertising and sales management

5a. Explain the concepts of marketing communication.

5b. Explain the different types of sales promotions.

5c. Describe the concepts of sales management.

5d. Describe the various types of advertising media.

5.1 Concept and the process of marketing communication.

5.2 Concept of Sales promotion and its types.

5.3 Advertising media – objectives and functions, Types of media, advertising budget, functions of advertising agency.

5.4 Sales management: Concept, objectives, sales forecasting.

5.5 Personnel selling- concept, salesmanship, qualities of salesman.

08

Unit-VI Strategic marketing

6a. Describe the concepts of strategic marketing management.

6b. Explain the concept of Strategic marketing

6.1 Objectives and concept of strategic marketing management,

6.2 Strategic marketing Analysis-SWOT Analysis, BCG Matrix.

04

Unit-VII International and Export marketing

7a. Explain the concept, scope, opportunities and challenges of international marketing.

7b. Describe the Multi-National Enterprises with examples.

7c. Explain the role of Indian Trade Promotion Organization.

7d. State and explain the benefits to exporters.

7.1 Concept, scope, challenges and opportunities in international marketing.

7.2 Foreign market entry strategies. 7.3 Concept of Multi-National

Enterprises (MNE) with examples. 7.4 Institutional support from

government to promote export. 7.5 Role of I.T.P.O. ( Indian Trade

Promotion Organization) 7.6 Benefits offered to exporters by

Central government.

04

TOTAL 48


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Marketing Management concept 06 08 -- 14

II Marketing Management Process 04 08 04 16

III Price Decisions 04 04 -- 08

IV Marketing Research 04 04 04 12

V Advertising and sales management 04 08 04 16

VI Strategic marketing 02 04 -- 06

VII International marketing – Export 02 02 04 08

TOTAL 26 38 16 80



130

6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/PRACTICALS/TASKS: Not Applicable


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Group discussion on Brand Strategies of any one company. 2. Assignment / Report writing on:

(a) Distribution strategy of any one company. (b) Promotional tools (communication mix) adopted by any one company. (c) Comparative advertising strategies of any two companies. (d) Sales promotions offered by FMCG companies/brands (Minimum two

companies/brands). 8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any):

Not applicable 9.0 LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) Books


1 Introduction to Marketing science Lal G. K. Pearson edition international

2 Marketing Dale Timge Prentice hall

3 Marketing Engineering Lillen Gary Pearson edition international

4 Marketing Management Phillip Kolter Pearson edition international

5 Modern Marketing Management Francis G. K. S. Chand & Company

6 Advertising Marketing Sales Management Thakur D. D&D Publication

7 Marketing Management Mr. S. A. Sherlekar

Everest Publications.

8 How to Export NABHI NABHI Publication


1. http://www.business-standard.com/ 2. http://studymarketing.org/ 3. http://salesandmarketing.com/


Not Applicable


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 L M H M L

CO2 H H H H

CO3 M M M M M L

CO4 M H L M

CO5 L L M M M H

CO6 L M M M L H H H L


http://studymarketing.org/

131

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / ME / PS / EE / IF / CM / EL / AE / DD / ID COURSE : Entrepreneurship Development (EDP) COURSE CODE : 6309 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


01 -- 02 03 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

Globalization, liberalization & privatization along with revolution in Information Technology, have thrown up new opportunities that are transforming lives of the masses. On the global scenario we have abundant physical and human resources which emphasizes the importance and need of entrepreneurship. Talented and enterprising personalities are exploring such opportunities & translating opportunities into business ventures such as- BPO, Contract Manufacturing, Trading, Service sectors etc. The student community also needs to explore the emerging opportunities. It is therefore necessary to inculcate the entrepreneurial values during their educational tenure. This will help the younger generation in changing their attitude and take the challenging growth oriented tasks instead of waiting for white- collar jobs. This course will help in developing the awareness and interest in entrepreneurship and create employment for others.


The student will be able to, 1. Identify entrepreneurial opportunity. 2. Develop entrepreneurial personality, skills, values and attitude. 3. Analyze business ideas- project selection. 4. Develop awareness about enterprise management. 5. Take help of support systems like banks, Government, DIC etc. 6. Prepare preliminary project report.

3.0 COURSE OUTCOMES::-


1. Develop Entrepreneurial skill by brainstorming games, SWOT analysis, Risk taking games 2. Collect information by Visiting to DIC and Nationalised Banks 3. Interview of successful entrepreneur 4. Learn the success stories from successful entrepreneur. 5. Select product after market survey for product comparison, specifications and feasibility

study 6. Prepare preliminary project report

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Entrepreneurship, Creativity and Opportunities

1a. Conduct self analysis

1b. Overview of Entrepreneurship

1.1 Concept, Classification & Characteristics of an Entrepreneur

04

132




1c. Generating business idea

1d. Search business opportunities

1.2 Creativity and Risk taking. 1.3 Concept of Creativity, brainstorming

Risk Situation, Types of risk & risk takers.

1.4 Trade Related opportunities 1.5 Business Idea -Methods and

techniques to generate business idea.

1.6 Transforming Ideas in to opportunities

1.7 SWOT Analysis 1.8 Scanning Business Environment

Unit-II Business Terminology, Information and Support Systems

2a. Understand Classification of business sectors

2b. Acquiring help from support systems

2c. Planning of business activities

2.1 Types of business and industries, forms of ownership, Franchisee, Export, Network/Multilevel Marketing

2.2 Sources of Information. Information related to project, support system, procedures and formalities

2.3 Support Systems 1. Small Scale Business Planning,

Requirements. 2. Statutory Requirements and

Agencies. 3. Taxes and Acts

02

Unit-III Market Assessment

3a. Conducting Market survey

3b. Selection of product

3.1 Marketing - Concept and Importance 3.2 Market Identification, Survey Key

components 3.3 Market Assessment

02

Unit-IV Business Finance

4a. Understanding terminology of finance

4b. Search and analyse sources of finance

4c. Financial ratio and profitability study

4.1 Cost of Project 4.2 Sources of Finance 4.3 Assessment of working capital 4.4 Product costing 4.5 Profitability 4.6 Break Even Analysis 4.7 Financial Ratios and Significance 4.8 Various govt. /bank schemes of

finance (long term and short term)

04

Unit-V Business Plan and Project Appraisal

5a. Prepare a project report.

5b. Conduct feasibility study.

5.1 Preliminary project report preparation. 5.2 Project Appraisal & Selection

Techniques

Meaning and definition Technical, Economic feasibility Cost benefit Analysis Checklist

04

TOTAL 16


Not Applicable

133

6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/PRACTICALS/TASKS: The tutorial/practical/assignments/tasks should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the competencies.


Sr. No.

Unit No.


Hours

1 I Entrepreneurship Awareness- Who am I?/ EOI/ Micro lab Exercise 04

2 I Creativity Exercises/games 02

3 I Risk taking Exercises/games 02

4 II Brainstorming/group discussion/problem solving exercises 04

5 III Business Games and Related Exercises 04

6 II Interview of an entrepreneur 02

7 IV Event/task/activity management-group of 4-6 students will work together 04

AND/OR

1 to 7 I-IV 3 day Achievement Motivation Training workshop /Entrepreneurship Awareness Program

22

8 V Visit to DIC/Bank/MSSIDC/MIDC/MPCB/Industry 04

9 V Prepare a preliminary project report and study its feasibility 06

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Assess yourself – are you an entrepreneur? (Self Analysis) 2. Report on

Interview of successful entrepreneurs (minimum two) Interaction with the support systems

Visit to small scale industry 3. Product survey - select one product and collect all its related information i.e. specification,

price, manufacturer from at least three suppliers/ manufacturers 4. Prepare list of identified opportunities


1. Conduct 3 days awareness camp for entrepreneurship by professional bodies 2. Arrange a visit to SSI/DIC 3. Arrange Interview / Expert lecture of an entrepreneur


A) Books



E. Gorden K. Natrajan

Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai


Colombo plan staff college

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi.

3

A Manual on How to Prepare a Project Report

J. B. Patel D. G. Allampally

EDI STUDY MATERIAL Ahmadabad 4 A Manual on Business Opportunity J. B. Patel

134


Identification & Selection S. S. Modi

5 National Directory of Entrepreneur Motivator & Resource Persons.

S. B. Sareen H. Anil Kumar

6 A Handbook of New Entrepreneurs P. C. Jain

7 The Seven Business Crisis & How to Beat Them.

V. G. Patel

8 Entrepreneurship Development of Small Business Enterprises

Poornima M. Charantimath

Pearson Education, New Delhi

9 Entrepreneurship Development Vasant Desai Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai

10 Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice

J. S. Saini B. S. Rathore

Wheeler Publisher, New Delhi

11 Entrepreneurship Development -- TTTI, Bhopal / Chandigarh

12 Entrepreneurship Management Aruna Kaulgad Vikas Publication


Websites- 1. http://www.ediindia.ac.in 2. http://www.dcmsme.gov.in/ 3. http://www.udyogaadhaar.gov.in 4. www.smallindustryindia.com 5. www.sidbi.com 6. www.tifac.org.in

C) Video Cassettes /CDs

Sr. No.

SUBJECT SOURCE

1 Five success Stories of First Generation Entrepreneurs

EDI STUDY MATERIAL Ahmadabad (Near Village Bhat, Via Ahmadabad Airport & Indira Bridge), P.O. Bhat 382428, Gujarat, India P.H. (079) 3969163, 3969153 E-mail : [email protected] [email protected] Website : http://www.ediindia.org

2 Assessing Entrepreneurial Competencies

3 Business Opportunity Selection and Guidance

4 Planning for completion & Growth

5 Problem solving-An Entrepreneur skill

6 Chhoo Lenge Aasman

7 Creativity

D) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications

Not applicable


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 L L M M

CO2 M M H M M H

CO3 L M L H L M

CO4 L M M M M H M

CO5 H M M H H M M

CO6 L M M M M M H H M H H


http://www.ediindia.ac.in/

http://dcmsme.gov.in/

http://udyogaadhaar.gov.in/

http://www.smallindustryindia.com/

http://www.sidbi.com/

135

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in CE / PS / EE / EL / AE COURSE : Renewable Energy Sources (RES) COURSE CODE : 6310 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


01 -- 02 03 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20

1.0 RATIONALE:

Modern society relies on stable, readily available energy supplies. Renewable energy is an increasingly important component of the new energy mix. The course covers energy conversion, utilization and storage for renewable technologies such as wind, solar, biomass, fuel cells and hybrid systems. Thermodynamics concepts (including the first and second law) form the basis for modelling the renewable energy systems. The course also touches the environmental consequences of energy conversion and how renewable energy can reduce air pollution and global climate change.


1. List various sources of energy and their applications in India and around the world. 2. Describe the challenges and problems associated with the use of various energy sources,

with regard to future supply and the environment. 3. Determine potential solutions to the supply and environmental issues associated with

energy sources. 4. Understand Emerging Energy Technologies. 5. Collect and organize information on renewable energy technologies as a basis for further

analysis and evaluation.

3.0 COURSE OUTCOMES: The theory should be taught and practical should be carried out in such a manner that students are able to acquire different learning out comes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes:

1. Enlist various energy sources and state their present scenario in India 2. State the solar energy applications and functions of system components. 3. Apply the basics of wind and ocean energy for electricity generation. 4. Describe the conversion process of biomass energy. 5. State and apply the various Emerging Energy Technologies

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I

Energy Science and Sources

1a. Define energy conservation law

1b. Identify various sources of energy and compare them.

1.1 Concept of energy, Law of conservation of energy

1.2 Introduction to conventional energy sources and renewable energy sources

02

1c. Understand the present energy situations and schemes for renewable energy promotion.

1.3 Comparison between energy sources 1.4 Present scenario in energy crises in

India and world 1.5 Government schemes to promote use

of renewable energy sources

136




Unit-II Solar Energy

2a. Define the basic conversation principle of solar energy.

2b. Describe the solar system used in water heating.

2c. State the applications of solar energy

2.1 Introduction to solar energy 2.2 Physical principles of conversion of

solar radiation into heat 2.3 Flat plate collectors and concentric

collectors 2.4 Solar energy storage system 2.5 Applications of solar energy in Water

heating, Space heating and cooling, Greenhouses and electricity generation

04

Unit-III Wind and Oceans Energy

3a. Understand the concept of electrical wind generation.

3b. State basic components of WECS.

3c. Distinguish Wind and Oceans Energy

3d. Explain ocean thermal electric power generation

3e. Describe the principle of tidal power generation.

3.1 Basic principles of wind energy conversion

3.2 Site selection considerations 3.3 Basic components of a wind energy

conversion system (WECS). 3.4 Advantages and disadvantages of

WECS. 3.5 Applications of Wind energy. 3.6 Introduction of Oceans energy 3.7 Methods of ocean thermal electric

power generation 3.8 Open cycle and closed cycle Ocean

thermal energy conversion (OTEC) system

3.9 Basic principle of tidal power

05

Unit-IV Bio mass Energy

4a. State resources of Biomass energy.

4b. Describe the biomass conversion process.

4c. Know Bio Diesel and Bio Mass plant

4d. State information of Government schemes to promote use of biomass energy.

4.1 Introduction to biomass energy 4.2 Biomass energy resources 4.3 Biomass conversion process : Direct

combustion, thermo chemical conversion, bio chemical conversion

4.4 Introduction to bio gas plant 4.5 Introduction to Bio Diesel, Bio Mass

plant 4.6 Government schemes to promote use

of biomass energy

03

Unit-V Emerging Energy Technologies

5a. Define the Hydrogen Energy.

5b. Describe properties of hydrogen and its sources.

5c. Know the hydrogen handling.

5.1 Hydrogen Energy 5.2 Properties of hydrogen 5.3 Hydrogen as source of renewable

energy 5.4 Sources of hydrogen 5.5 Production of hydrogen 5.6 Storage and transportation 5.7 Introduction to Carbon Capture and

Storage (CCS)

02

TOTAL 16




137


A. SUGGESTED EXERCISES/PRACTICALS

S. No.

Unit No.



1 I Group discussion on benefits of renewable energy sources. 02

2 II

Visit solar water heating system demonstrate and write report on demonstration of solar water heater

04

3 II Report on demonstration of solar light with the connection diagram. 04

4 II Visit to the solar power plant write report and draw layout of solar power plant.

06

5 III

Visit to the wind power plant write report and draw a layout of Wind power plant

06

6 IV Report on demonstration of bio mass gasifier 04

7 IV Case study of Bio gas plant and tidal power plant 04

8 V Group discussion on Emerging Energy Technologies and their future 02

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like

1. Collect renewable energy information from web source.

2. Collect and analyse information from web site of BEE (Bureau of Energy Efficiency) and MEDA (Maharashtra Energy Development Agency) on energy.

3. Prepare a report on Government schemes to promote use of renewable energy sources.

4. Identify and collect different manufactures of solar water heater. 8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any):

1. Show video demonstration of solar water heater system. 2. Visit to solar plant to understand the working of solar generation. 3. Arrange expert lectures on new trends in renewable energy.


A) Books


1 Renewable energy sources and conversion technology

Bansal Keemann, Meliss,

Tata McGraw Hill

2 Renewable energy resources and emerging technologies

Kothari D. P. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.

3 Non-Conventional energy Sources Rai G. D. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.

4 Nonconventional Energy Ashok V. Desai New Age International Publishers Ltd

138

B) Learning Websites 1. Website of bureau of energy and efficiency: www.bee-india.nic.in 2. www.betterenergy.org 3. www.mahaurja.com Maharashtra Energy Development Agency (MEDA): 4. www.worldenergy.org 5. www.renewableenergyworld.com


1. Solar water heating system

2. Solar lighting system


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 M L H

CO2 H M

CO3 M H

CO4 H

CO5 M H


http://www.worldenergy.org/

139

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL)

COURSE : Professional Practices (PPR) COURSE CODE : 6410

TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


-- -- 04 04 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or competitive tests. While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, attitude and ability to communicate and attitude in addition to basic technological concepts. The purpose of introducing professional practice is to provide opportunity to students to undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Information search, Industrial visits, expert lectures and case study will increase participation of students in learning process.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand techniques of data collection. 2. Study professional techniques through industrial visits and expert lectures. 3. Understand and find solutions for technical problems.



1. Collect technical information from different sources. 2. Write industrial visit reports. 3. Acquire technical knowledge through expert lecture. 4. Develop problem solving techniques through case studies.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:

Note: There are no separate classes for theory as given below. The relevant theory has to be discussed before the practical during the practical sessions.



Unit I Information search and data collection

1a. List different tools used in electronic workshop

1b. Explain the procedure of installation of electronic panels.

1c. State various soft-wares used in electronics

1d. Make a comparative chart of specifications of different electronic tools/equipments.

1e. Make a pictorial process flow of IC manufacturing.

1.1 Information search( Any Four) Collection of information about tools/equipments used in electronic industries/workshops

a. Software and simulators used in electronics for circuit and PCB making

b. Market survey for motors used in electronic application

c. Non-Conventional Energy Sources with focus on solar energy

d. installation and maintenance of electronic panels, PLCs

e. CDMA

140



f. GPS g. Manufacturing process of ICs h. WLL Technology i. Nano Technology j. Image processing

1.2 Any other suitable areas

Unit II Industrial visit

2a. Develop technical report writing skills on industrial visits

2.1 Industrial visits and report writing of : (Any Two) a. Telephone Exchange b. Television Relay station c. Industrial automation unit d. Data Acquisition System e. Sugar Mill, Paper Mill, Cement

Industry f. Satellite Earth Station, g. Radar Establishment. h. MTSO. i. Any other relevant area.

Unit III Expert lectures

3a. Write report on the expert lecture to obtain the professional knowledge.

3.1 Expert lectures from professionals/ industries on. (Any Two) a. Emerging Technology b. Fiber optics communication system c. Bluetooth Technology d. Mobile communication e. Software debugging f. Computer security systems g. Digital Inverters h. Soft computing i. Wi-Fi, Wi-Max, WLAN, BAN

technologies j. Neural network. k. Total Quality Management l. Carrier guidance and interviewing

techniques. m. Self-employment. n. Any other relevant topic.

Unit IV Mock Interview

4a. Demonstrate oral communication skill and confidence

4.1 The student should give mock interview before panel of three experts.

Unit V Group Discussion and SWOT analysis

5a. Participate in group discussion on specified topic

5b. Express opinion and share views about the specified topic

5c. Make the report of group discussion

5.1 The students should discuss in group of six to eight students and write a brief report on the same as a part of term work. The topic of group discussions may be selected by the faculty members.


Not Applicable

141


1. Collect specifications and rates for different Electronic Instruments, PLC, devices and systems.

2. Collect working standards of WLL, Wi-Max, WLAN, Bluetooth technologies. 3. Observe a video on expert lectures from internet on electronic engineering topic and draft

a report on it.

7.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Show CAI computer software; arrange industrial visits, expert lectures, case studies

related to civil engineering. 8.0 LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) National and international Journals and Magazines viz IETE Journal of Research, IETE Technical Review, Journal of IE(I), Electronics For You, Elector Electronics etc.


1. www.ieee.org.in 2. www.iete.org 3. www.ieindia.org


Not Applicable 9.0 MAPPING MATRIX OF PO’S AND CO’S:

Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H H H M

CO2 H M H M

CO3 H M M M M

CO4 H H H H M M H


http://www.ieee.org.in/

http://www.iete.org/

http://www.ieindia.org/

142

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Seminar (SEM) COURSE CODE : 6411 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


-- -- 02 02 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

An engineering technician has to face number of problems / situations in his professional life and he has to convey his ideas through presentation. Knowledge of scientific way of solving the problems and increase ability to apply it, to find alternative solutions for solving such problems will help a technician in his professional life. The involvement of student in the seminar work will help him to develop this competency, combine the theoretical and practical concepts studied into useful applications, develop planning and execution skills and perform analyzing and trouble shooting of their respective projects, develop skills in interacting with others, to work in team, search for obtaining the information and materials from number of sources and present the work in neatly documented report and present.


The student will be able to, 1. Develop abilities to search information. 2. Convey ideas through seminar. 3. Collect data, information from various resources. 4. Develop planning of seminar activities. 5. Develop skill to communicate the problems and solutions. 6. Develop skill to prepare reports. 7. Develop presentation skills.


The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes as applicable to seminar:

1. Know and select seminar topic or problem statement in engineering field. 2. Familiar with maintaining diary for progress of seminar activities. 3. Carry out literature survey from various resources. 4. Provide ideas in problem solving. 5. Develop document preparation skills. 6. Use of presentation skill for seminar delivery. 7. Keep updated with latest trends of knowledge and skills in professional life.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:

Activity No Activities Hours

1 Briefing about selection for seminar topics in class: Discussion in class 02

2 Search seminar topics and approval of topic from guide from searched topics.

04

3 Preparation of Seminar Diary for writing progress --

4 Collection of data and literature for seminar from: internet / visit / Journals /Books/EBooks

04

5 Preparation of synopsis of seminar topic: print draft copy 04

6 Submission of seminar synopsis to guide (Printed copy) --

143


7 Guidance about preparation of document by guide 02

8 Preparation of document by students 06

9 Editing document 04

10 Submission of Seminar and presentation document: Hard copy & Soft copy of power point

02

11 Submission of diary --

12 Seminar Presentation 04

TOTAL 32

5.0 AREAS FOR SELECTION OF SEMINAR:

S. No. Areas For Selection

1 Image processing

2 FPGA

3 CPLD

4 Industrial Automation

5 New Trends in Electric Drives

6 LASIX

7 SCADA

8 Mobile communication

9 Robotics/Bio-Mechatronics

10 Automation and Control of drives

11 Biomedical Instrumentation.

12 Microcontroller and microprocessor based applications

13 DSP & its applications.

14 Communication-Blue tooth, Mobile communication (GSM, CDMA), Optical communication, Satellite communication.

15 PC based applications

6.0 INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES:

Classroom Teaching, Industrial visit, Library Assignment, Home Assignment, Group Discussion, Case Studies.


Magazines, Journals, Papers: National & international Reference Books, Internet, Previous seminars, Text Books, Codes of Practices e. g. IS Codes, Video Cassettes, Audio Cassettes, Compact Discs, Charts, Transparencies, Software, Models, Industrial visits, expert lectures/workshops

8.0 GUIDELINES FOR SEMINAR:

1. Selection of topic for seminar: a. The student shall search various from resources and get the topic approved b. Topic of seminar should not be part of programme curriculum but will be based on

curriculum with new developments. c. Topic of seminar should not be from the project taken by the group or by individual. d. Selection of topic should be finalised in consultation with teacher guide allotted for the

seminar. 2. Submission of Seminar Document:

a. The student shall get the seminar draft approved from Guide and complete final document.

b. Each student shall prepare two hard copies of final seminar document and retain one copy with student and submit one hard copy to library and soft copy for department.

144

c. The structure of the seminar document shall be as per the following format: Certificate / Acknowledgement / Index / Introduction / Detailed content / Conclusion / References. The photos, charts, animations, certificates from supporting agencies.

d. Modify format suitably as per requirement of the seminar. e. The seminar report shall be of minimum 10 pages and Max. 20 pages with 1.5 line

spacing. Font: New Times Roman, left margin 3 cm, right margin 1.5 cm, top margin 2 cm, bottom margin 2 cm, header & footer 1.5 cm, page numbers, size of font 12 pt, paragraphs left and right justified. It should be certified by seminar Guide and Head of department.

3. Evaluation of Seminar:

Evaluation of seminar will consist of Progressive Assessment, Presentation i. Progressing Assessment:

1. Progressive assessment will be based on attendance, searching of various seminar topics, selection of title, collection of data from internet, Journals, Literatures, organization of data and preparation of document.

2. The student has to get seminar document assessed from guide regularly.

3. Head of department will sign once in a month. 4. The attendance of the student shall carry 05 marks as follows

a. Below 75 % : 00 marks b. 75 % and below 80 % : 02 marks c. 80 % and below 85 % : 03 marks d. 85 % and below 90 % : 04 marks e. 90 % and above : 05 marks

ii. Presentation of Seminar:

1. The time for presentation shall be 7 to 10 minutes per student 2. the question answer session time shall be 2 to 3 minutes per student 3. Evaluation of presentation of seminar will be carried out by a panel of

teaching staff from institute based on the following point a. Confidence and courage b. Technical knowledge acquired c. Presentation skill d. Use of presentation medium e.g. AV aids, animation

iii. Marking scheme for Seminar.

Progressive assessment

Confidence and courage

Technical knowledge

Presentation skill

Use of presentation medium

Total

25 05 05 10 05 50


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H

CO2 M H

CO3 H M

CO4 H M L

CO5 H M

CO6

CO7 H


145

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Project (PRO) COURSE CODE : 6412 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


-- -- 04 04 -- Max. -- -- -- -- 50 50* 100

Min. -- -- -- -- 20 20 --

* Indicates TW to be assessed by external & internal examiners.

1.0 RATIONALE:

An engineering technician has to face number of problems / situations in his professional life. Knowledge of scientific way of solving the problems and increased ability to apply it to find alternative solutions for solving such problems will help a technician in his professional life. The involvement of the student in the project work will help the student to develop this competency, combine the theoretical and practical concepts studied into useful applications, develop planning and execution skills and perform analysing and trouble shooting of their respective projects, develop skills in interacting with others, to work in team, search for obtaining the information and materials from number of sources and present the work in neatly documented report.


The student will be able to, 1. Integrate the knowledge of engineering program 2. Develop the skill to identify the problem, define the problem statement 3. Develop scientific attitude for stepwise solutions to the problems 4. Develop attitude to work in team and act as leader of project 5. Develop planning, execution skills 6. Build multidisciplinary concept with cost considerations 7. Understand recent developments in engineering fields and prepare report


The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate some of course outcomes as applicable to project

1. Participate effectively in group work 2. Collect, analyse and synthesise the data 3. Conduct a survey and investigate the activities 4. Make appropriate decision 5. Act as leader for group task 6. Develop cost consideration 7. Prepare technical reports

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:


1 Formation of Group --

2 Selection of Project: Individual/Group discussions 02

3 Define Problem statement for project work 02

4 Decide Strategies/Methodology to carry out project 02

5 Literature Survey/data survey 04

6 Submission of synopsis: by each group 02

7 Project activity plan-Defining activities, strategy, duration 02

8 Allocation of work responsibility to individual/team 02

146


9 Visits to Industries / Institutions / Market/field work/sites 04

10 Collection of Data /Survey/Analysis 06

11 Design of Components, preparation of drawing, estimates wherever required, printed circuits design, its checking,

10

12 Fabrication, Assembling, Model/Prototype development, Testing as per project requirements

08

13 Progressive presentation of work and recording in diary --

14 Consolidation of work allotted to individual or team 06

15 Presentation of initial draft: pre submission draft 06

16 Final Project Report: Printed: Submission: soft & Hard copy 04

17 Seminar on presentation of project work by team/group 04

TOTAL 64

The Project is also included with Seminar with the aim to develop certain set communication skills (preparation of report, writing survey report, writing laboratory experiment results, writing conclusions of the work done and physical phenomenon observed, participating in group discussions, verbally defending the project in the form of Seminar etc.)

5.0 AREA OF SELECTION FOR PROJECT:

These are only guidelines; any project related to Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering depending upon the availability of projects may be included. Preference should be given to practical oriented projects according to the local needs.

Some of suggested projects are given below:

S. No. Areas For Selection

1 DC/AC drives

2 Microcontroller based applications

3 PC based applications

4 Communication-(Blue tooth, Mobile communication (GSM, CDMA), Optical communication.

5 Biomedical Applications

6 Projects based on power electronics devices.

7 Industrial Automation-( PLC based, Robotics, Home automation)

8 Projects for Agricultural applications.

9 VLSI / Embedded Systems

10 DSP based projects

11 Antenna and microwaves

6.0 GUIDELINES FOR PROJECT:

A. Group Formation: 1. The department Head / Officer Incharge should make sure that the project groups are

formed within one week of the beginning of academic term and assign a faculty as project guide.

2. The students may be asked to work individually or in groups of five students. The group size may be varied in accordance with the effective compliance of project work.

3. The group can decide the leader and distribute work and prepare the group management structure.

147

B. Finalization of Project Title: 1. The students are expected to take up a project with the guidance of a Project Guide

from the institute / Industry Expert / Sponsored by industry, Institute, society, self. 2. The project shall be as far as possible industrial project useful to society. 3. The students can seek help from TPO / HOD / Guide. 4. The group of students / Project guide / authority shall see the viability / feasibility of

project over the duration available with the students and capabilities and setup available.

C. Note: 1. The group / student shall prepare Project Diary with Name of Project, Name of Students

in group, their attendance and daily progress and get assessed from guide from time to time during project hours.

2. Each student shall maintain individual progressive assessment sheet and get assessed from guide from time to time during project hours.

3. The title of the project should be finalized within two weeks after the group formation and a synopsis of the project should be submitted to the guide.

4. An abstract (synopsis) not exceeding 100 words, indicating salient features of the work should be submitted to guide

5. Modify format suitably as per requirement of the project.

D. Project Execution: 1. Guide shall monitor the work and help the students from time to time. 2. The progress shall be presented before the guide every week during project hours. The

group shall take the signature of guide on Project Diary and Individual Progressive Assessment Sheet.

3. Head of department will sign once in a month. 4. The students shall design parts, prepare their drawing showing all details and

manufacture within the institute / sponsoring industry / workshop in local areas. 5. The guide should maintain a record of progressive / continuous assessment of project

work and observe the progress of each group member on weekly basis. 6. The same shall be kept ready for submission to the external examiner before the final

examination.

E. Evaluation of Project: 1. The evaluation of individual progress shall be followed as per the chart given. 2. External examiner and guide shall jointly evaluate the project. 3. The project can be evaluated on site if it is difficult to bring or demonstrate the trials in

the institute 4. The attendance of the student shall carry 05 marks as follows

i. Below 75 % : 00 marks ii. 75 % and below 80 % : 02 marks iii. 80 % and below 85 % : 03 marks iv. 85 % and below 90 % : 04 marks v. 90 % and above : 05 marks

5. The details of project assessment are mentioned in Annexure II

F. Project Report: 1. The student shall get the initial draft copy of the project approved from the Project

Guide. 2. Structure: It shall be as follows

Title page, Inner title page (white), Certificate, Certificate from industry, Synopsis, Acknowledgment, Table of Contents, List of table & figures (optional), Introduction, Objectives of the Project, Methodology used, Design, Drawing of the part and assembly, Testing, Costing, Result, Conclusions & Scope for future, Merits, Demerits, Applications, Bibliography

148

Annexure consists of various designed parts and assembly drawings, photographs, charts, statistical data

CD of video clips /Power Point presentation 3. Each group has to submit one copy of project report to the library and one soft and hard

copy to the department apart from the individual copy. 4. The project report will be of 40 to 50, A4 Size pages with 1.5 line spacing. Font: New

Times Roman, left margin 3 cm, right margin 1.5 cm, top margin 2.5 cm, bottom margin 1.5 cm, header & footer 1.5 cm, page numbers, size of font 12 pt, paragraphs left and right justified.

5. Chapters (to be numbered in Arabic) containing Introduction-which usually specifies scope of work and the present developments. Main body of the report divided appropriately into chapters, sections and subsections. The chapters, sections and subsections may be numbered in the decimal form for e.g. Chapter 2, sections as 2.1, 2.2 etc. and subsections as 2.2.3, 2.5.1 etc.

6. The chapter must be left or right justified (font size 16). Followed by the title of chapter centered (font size 18), section/subsection numbers along with their headings must be left justified with section number and its heading in font size 16 and subsection and its heading in font size 14. The body or the text of the report should have font size 12.

7. The figures and tables must be numbered chapter wise. 8. The last chapter should contain the summary of the work carried, contributions if any,

their utility along with the scope for further work. 9. Reference OR Bibliography:

The references should be numbered serially in the order of their occurrence in the text and their numbers should be indicated within square brackets for e.g. [4]. The section on references should list them in serial order in the following format.

a. For textbooks – Dr. V.L. Shah & Veena Gore, Limit State Design of Steel Structures, Structures Publications, 1 Edition, 2009.

b. For papers - David, Insulation design to combat pollution problem, Proc of c. IEEE, PAS, Vol 71, Aug 1981, pp 1901-1907. d. Only SI units are to be used in the report. Important equations must be numbered

in decimal form e. All equation numbers should be right justified.

10. Each student from group shall have one copy with individual certificate only. 11. The project report and progressive assessment sheets are to be submitted before the

end of term declared in the Academic Calendar of the institute. 7.0 MAPPING MATRIX OF PO’S AND CO’S:

Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H

CO2 H

CO3 M

CO4 M L

CO5 L M

CO6 H H

CO7 H


149

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and telecommunication Engineering(EL) COURSE : Applied Electronics (AET) COURSE CODE : 6441 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 04 08 03 Max. 80 20 100 25 -- 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 10 -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

To make the students familiar with basic facts, concepts, principles and characteristics of electronic devices used in industry. For effective operation and maintenance of electronic devices used in industry technician should have sound knowledge of working principles and facts of electronic circuits.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand principles and terminology of electronics. 2. Understand the use of semiconductor devices in electronic circuits 3. Interpret characteristics of electronic devices 4. Understand the working of basic circuits such as power amplifiers, tuned amplifiers, FET,

MOSFET etc. 5. Build and test simple circuits 6. Compare and classify power amplifiers, oscillators, time base generators.



1. Draw and explain principle of operation of wave shaping circuits, power amplifiers, Tuned amplifiers, time base generator and oscillators

2. State applications of wave shaping circuits, power amplifiers, Tuned amplifiers and oscillators

3. Assemble Simple electronic circuits. 4. Trace the fault in given circuit using voltage and waveform methods. 5. Identify faulty component in given electronic circuit.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Wave shaping circuits and multipliers

1a. State necessity of different types of wave shaping circuits.

1b. Classify different types of wave shaping circuits.

1c. Draw the circuit and explain working of RC integrator and differentiator

1d. Draw the circuit and explain working of diode as clipper

1e. Draw the circuit and explain working of clamper

1.1 Necessity of wave shaping circuits. 1.2 Linear circuits – RC integrator and

differentiator – input /output waveforms and frequency response.

1.3 Non-linear circuits – Clipper- diode series and shunt, positive and Negative, biased and unbiased and combinational clipper.

08

1.4 Clampers – necessity and types - positive and negative

1.5 Voltage multiplier-Necessity and types - Doubler, Tripler

150



1f. State need of voltage multiplier

1g. Draw the circuit and explain working of Voltage doubler.

Unit-II Power Amplifiers

2a. Differentiate between voltage and power amplifier.

2b. Explain working of different types of power amplifiers and their applications.

2c. Determine the efficiency of Class A and Class B power amplifier.

2d. Explain working of class B Push-Pull amplifier.

2e. Compare different types of power amplifiers.

2.1 Comparison of voltage and power amplifiers

2.2 Definitions of collector efficiency, distortion and power dissipation capability.

2.3 Circuit diagram, operating principle, characteristic features, advantages, disadvantages, applications and efficiency of class A, B, C and AB amplifiers.

2.4 Circuit diagram, operating principle, characteristic features, advantages, disadvantages and applications of Class B push-pull amplifier

2.5 Comparison of class A & B amplifiers.

2.6 Crossover distortion and use of Complementary symmetry power amplifiers. Thermal runaway and use of heat sink (No mathematical analysis)

12

Unit-III FET Amplifier and Tuned Amplifiers.

3a. Explain construction and working principle of JFET

3b. Describe Configurations of JFET amplifier

3c. Explain construction and working principle of enhancement type MOSFET

3d. Compare JFET and MOSFET

3e. Types of MOSFET: Define and explain MOSFET

3f. Compare JFET and MOSFET as amplifiers.

3g. Differentiate BJT and JFET 3h. Draw and explain the

operation of single, double tuned circuit.

3i. List Advantages and disadvantages of single tuned amplifier.

3.1 JFET: Introduction Construction, operation, Characteristics, Parameters of JFET – rd, gm, μ

3.2 n-channel and p- channel JFET 3.3 FET configurations: common source,

drain and gate 3.4 Comparison of BJT and JFET 3.5 Symbol, construction, working and

applications of Depletion and Enhancement type MOSFET

3.6 Necessity of tuned amplifier. Basic tuned circuits, series and parallel resonance in tuned circuits.

3.7 Resonant frequency, resonance curve, band width and selectivity of parallel resonant circuit.

3.8 Circuit diagram, working and frequency response of single tuned, double tuned circuits

3.9 Circuit diagram, working & frequency response of stagger tuned Circuits

3.10 Advantages and disadvantages of tuned voltage amplifiers

12

Unit-IV Feedback

4a. Describe different types of feedback.

4b. List the merits and

4.1 Concept of feedback: negative and positive

4.2 Merits and demerits of negative

12

151



amplifier and oscillators

demerits of negative feedback

4c. Explain voltage series and voltage shunt type of feedback in amplifier circuits.

4d. Justify the use of positive feedback in oscillator

4e. Explain the working principle of different types of oscillators.

4f. List applications of various types of oscillators.

feedback 4.3 Negative feedback In amplifiers:

Derivation of equation for overall gain of negative feedback amplifier

4.4 Characteristics: Gain, input and output impedance, stability, bandwidth, frequency response, sensitivity, distortion and noise

4.5 Block and circuit diagram of Voltage series and shunt amplifier, current series and shunt amplifier

4.6 Positive feedback in oscillators 4.7 Barkhausen’s criteria for oscillation,

Overall gain of positive feedback amplifier, Tank circuit

4.8 Operating principles of RC and LC oscillator

4.9 Circuit diagram, equation for frequency of oscillation and frequency stability General applications of RC oscillators - RC phase shift, Wien bridge (using BJT) LC oscillators – Colpitts and Hartley oscillator(using BJT) Piezoelectric effect, Crystal oscillator

Unit-V Multi-vibrators

5a. Describe working of Transistor as a switch.

5b. Draw and explain operation of astable multivibrator.

5c. Differentiate between Astable, Monostable and Bistable multivibrators

5d. List applications of Schmitt trigger

5.1 Transistor as switch Definition and graphical Representation of different time periods.

5.2 Multivibrators- Circuit diagram, operation, waveforms and Applications of Astable, Monostable and Bistable multivibrator.

5.3 Circuit diagram, operation, waveforms, Hysteresis and applications of Schmitt trigger.

5.4 Comparison of multivibrators

10

Unit-VI Time base generator

6a. Explain UJT Relaxation Oscillator.

6b. Draw and explain miller sweep generator.

6c. Draw and explain bootstrap circuit

6.1 Voltage time base Generator, exponential sweep generator

6.2 UJT: Construction, equivalent circuit, I-V characteristics, UJT as relaxation Oscillator: circuit diagram, working and waveforms.

6.3 Transistorised current time base generator, bootstrap and Miller sweep generator

6.4 Comparison of Miller sweep and bootstrap circuit, applications of current sweep circuit

10

TOTAL 64

152


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Wave shaping circuits and multipliers 02 08 04 14

II Power Amplifiers 02 08 04 14

III FET amplifier and Tuned amplifier 02 12 -- 14

IV Feedback Amplifiers and oscillators 06 04 04 14

V Multivibrators 04 08 -- 12

VI Time base generator 04 04 04 12

TOTAL 20 44 16 80




The tutorial/practical/assignment/task should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the desired programme outcome/course outcome. Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in the mapping matrix for this course. Faculty should ensure that students also acquire Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes related to affective domain.

S. No.

Unit No.



1 I Design of unbiased positive and negative clipper circuit using diode and observe the waveforms for sine wave input.

04

2 I Design of positive and negative unbiased clamper circuit using diode. Observe the waveforms for sine wave input

04

3 II Assemble and test the performance of voltage doubler circuit. 04

4 II Assemble and test voltage tripler circuit. 04

5 II Build and test class-A Power amplifier. 04

6 III Trace the circuit and Plot Frequency response of FET amplifier 04

7 II Determine the efficiency of Class-B push-pull power amplifier. 04

8 III Trace the circuit and Plot the frequency response of single tuned amplifier. 04

9 IV Trace the circuit and Plot Frequency response and bandwidth of negative feedback amplifier.

04

10 IV Build the circuit and measure the output frequency of RC Phase shift oscillator.

04

11 IV Trace the circuit and Measure the output frequency of Colpitts oscillator. 04

12 IV Trace the circuit and measure the output frequency of Hartley oscillator. 04

13 V Assemble and study the circuit of transistor as switch on breadboard 04

14 V Trace the circuit and measure time period and frequency of astable multivibrator

04

15 V Trace the circuit and Calculate the time period of pulse of monostable multivibrator.

04

16 VI Trace the circuit and observe the waveforms of UJT relaxation oscillator 04

TOTAL 64

153


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Download data sheets of BJT, FET and MOSFET. 2. Collect data about specifications and ratings of electronic devices from the datasheets. 3. Collect data about prices of BJT, FET and MOSFET from local market.


1. Show video to demonstrate the working principles, constructional features, testing and maintenance of different types of electronic active components, devices and circuits.

2. Arrange expert lecture of an industry person in the area of electronics. 9.0 LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) Books


1 A text book of Applied Electronics S. Sedha S. Chand Publisher ISBN-9788121927833

2 Electronic Devices and Circuits David A. Bell Oxford

3 Electronic Devices And Circuits G.K. Mittal Khanna

4 Electronics Circuit and Circuit Theory Robert L. Boylestead Louis Neshelsky

Pearson

5 Electronic Principles Malvino McGraw Hill

6 Electronic Devices and Circuits A. Motershed PHI ISBN-9788120301245

7 Basic Electronics and Linear circuits N.N. Bhargava S.C. Gupta

Tata McGraw Hill Education


1. http://www.nptl.com 2. http://www.electronictutorial.com 3. http://www.allaboutcircuit.com


SN Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications

1. Cathode ray oscilloscope Dual Channel, 4 Trace CRT / TFT based, Bandwidth 20 MHz/30 MHz, X10 magnification 20 nS max sweep rate, Alternate triggering, Component tester and with optional features such as Digital Read out, USB interface

2. Function Generator 1 MHz, sine, square, triangular, ramp and pulse generator Freq range 0.01Hz to 1 MHz, Output amplitude 20V open circuited, Output impedance 50 ohms. Facility to indicate output frequency and amplitude on display.

3. Regulated power supply 0 to 30 V 2A/3 A dual DC regulated power supply with SC protection digital output meters for current and Voltage

4. CRO Probe

5. Phase shift oscillator-Experimental kit

6. Colpitts oscillator- Experimental kit

7. UJT relaxation oscillator- Experimental kit

8. Breadboard

9. Digital multimeter


http://www.electronictutorial.com/

http://www.allaboutcircuit.com/

154


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H M H

CO2 H H H M H

CO3 H H H H

CO4 H H H H

CO5 M H H H H


155

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Audio Video Engineering (AVE) COURSE CODE : 6442 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 -- 02 05 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 -- 125

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 -- --

1.0 RATIONALE:

The field of television engineering and video system has witnessed rapid growth especially in digital TV broadcast and recording system. Thus with widespread use of advanced audio and video equipments, the course audio and video engineering is introduced in this curriculum.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand operation of audio amplifiers. 2. Understand CD/DVD player mechanism. 3. Analyse quality of reception of various sound systems and graphic equalizer. 4. Understand principle of operation of various advanced TV systems



1. List and explain different types of audio amplifiers and distinguish between them. 2. Identify and state different components used in CD /DVD player. 3. Identify and list different types of loudspeakers and microphones. 4. Define and explain various terms and standards used in TV systems. 5. Draw and illustrate different types of advanced TV systems. 6. Identify faults in various sections of a color TV. 7. Test different section of audio / video system.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Audio fundamentals and devices

1a. Describe the

fundamental audio

signal characteristics:

sound intensity, pitch,

fidelity and loudness

1b. Explain optical sound

recording and MP3

standard.

1c. Distinguish between

different types of audio

amplifiers.

1d. Draw labelled sketch of

Hi-Fi amplifier.

1e. Explain operation of

1.1 Basic characteristics of sound signal: sound intensity, level and loudness, pitch, frequency response, fidelity, linearity and reverberation

1.2 Sound recording: Optical recording, stereophony and multichannel sound, MP3 standard, Dolby NR recording system

1.3 Introduction to amplifiers, types, mono, stereo, difference between stereo amplifiers and mono amplifiers,

1.4 Public address system-necessity and working block diagram of Hi-Fi amplifiers and its working. Controls available on it and their function,

08

156




graphic equalizer.

1f. List types of speakers

and microphones.

1g. Explain cross-over

network circuit

Graphic equalizer concept-circuit diagram and its operation(5 point circuit diagram)

1.5 Microphone-types, wireless microphone

1.6 Types of speaker –woofer, midrange, tweeter, cross-over network circuit and its function

Unit-II CD/DVD player

2a. Explain the principle of detection mechanism of CD /DVD player

2b. List the components used in CD/DVD mechanism.

2c. State the function of remote control used in CD player.

2d. Compare DVD with Blue Ray Disc.

2.1 CD- material used, size and capacity 2.2 Block diagram and operation of CD

player. 2.3 Components used for CD mechanism,

CD pick up assembly, gear system. Drive motors, CD lens. Function of front panel control.

2.4 Function of remote control, transmitter and receiver unit used in CD player.

2.5 DVD player- working principle and operation.

2.6 Blue ray disc-storage capacity, technology used and difference between blue ray and DVD.

08

Unit-III Colour Television Systems and Signals

3a. Define various terms used in TV systems

3b. Draw and Explain composite video system

3c. Explain CCIR-B standards and channel allocation for band I and III.

3.1 Colour fundamentals: Primary Colours, Secondary Colours.

3.2 Grass man’s Law, Additive Colour mixing, Subtractive colour mixing and colour perception, mixing of colour, hue, saturation and luminance.

3.3 Aspect ratio, Persistence of vision, Scanning Types-Interlace, progressive, vertical and horizontal resolution, vestigial side band transmission, Compatibility.

3.4 Composite Video Signal- explanation with waveform.

3.5 CCIR-B Standards for Colour Signal Transmission and Reception, TV channel allocation for BAND-I and BAND-III, Frequency interleaving, color burst signals, choice of subcarrier frequency.

08

Unit-IV Transmitter and Receiver

4a.Identify modulation technique used for audio and video signal transmission and list the features of audio signals.

4b.Distinguish between positive and negative modulation

4c. Describe various TV

4.1 Audio and video signal transmission using AM and FM Modulation, Positive and Negative Modulation, Merits and Demerits of Negative modulation.

4.2 TV camera tubes: principle and working of vidicon, plumbicon and solid state camera based on CCD.

4.3 TV Transmitting antennas 4.4 Block diagram of colour TV

transmitter, Block diagram and

08

157




transmitting antennas. 4d.Describe various TV

camera tubes 4e.Explain the function of

color TV transmitter and receiver

4f.Explain SDI and HDMI.

operation of colour TV receiver, specifications of colour TV receiver.

4.5 SDI and HDMI-serial digital interface/high definition serial digital interface, high definition multimedia interface/video interface.

Unit-V Colour Television system

5a. Draw and explain different colour TV systems.

5b. Differentiate between NTSC, PAL and SECAM

5c. Explain HDTV, LCD and LED TV.

5.1 NTSC colour television transmitter system, NTSC colour receiver, NTSC coder and decoder.

5.2 Limitations of NTSC. 5.3 PAL colour system, PAL burst, PAL

coder, decoder. 5.4 Merits and Demerits of PAL. 5.5 SECAM colour system, merits and

demerits of SECAM, SECAM coder and decoder.

5.6 Characteristics and comparison of all three colour systems.

5.7 HDTV-Development of HDTV. 5.8 LCD and LED technology-working

principle of LCD and LED systems.

10

Unit-VI Cable Television

6a.List specifications of various components used in cable TV.

6b.Expalin construction of DTH system.

6c.Explain working of MATV, CATV and CCTV.

6.1 Constructional details working and radiation pattern of dish antenna

6.2 Working principle of following components-LNBC, Diplexer, attenuators, connectors (two ways, three ways) amplifiers and cables.

6.3 Direct to home systems-Introduction and block diagram

6.4 MATV, CATV and CCTV: Block diagram, working and applications.

06

TOTAL 48


Unit No.

Unit Title


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Audio fundamentals and devices 04 04 04 12

II CD/DVD player 04 04 04 12

III Colour Television systems and Signals 02 08 04 14

IV TV Transmitter and Receiver 04 08 04 16

V Colour Television System 04 08 04 16

VI Cable Television 02 04 04 10

TOTAL 20 36 24 80


158

6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/PRACTICALS/TASKS: The tutorial/practical/assignment/task should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the desired programme outcome/course outcome. Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in the mapping matrix for this course. Faculty should ensure that students also acquire Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes related to affective domain.

S.

No. Unit No.


Hours.

1 I Trace output stage of Hi- Fi amplifier. Draw component layout of it. 02

2 II Identify various controls on front panel of CD player 02

3 III To obtain composite video signal by using TV pattern generator and measure its dimensions

02

4 IV To visualize / compare the various patterns of colour TV pattern generator for fault finding

02

5 IV Trace the circuit diagram of colour TV receiver. 02

6 IV Trace the tuner section. 02

7 IV Trace colour chroma section. 02

8 IV Trace video IF and sound IF section. 02

9 IV To trace and explain horizontal oscillator and sync separator section. 02

10 IV To trace vertical oscillator and output section. 02

11 IV To observe waveforms at various sections of colour TV. 02

12 IV To locate the different faults at various sections of colour TV receiver. 02

13 V Verify the performance of LED TVs. Compare performance parameters of at least three brands.

04

14 Industrial visit to Doordarshan Kendra and prepare a report 04

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Collect information about LED, LCD displays used in TV. 2. Visit to TV station and write a report. 3. Estimate cost and layout of cable TV. 4. Download from internet/website different ICs and their specification used in color TV

system. 5. Collect the information about Set Top box used for cable TV at home and installation of

DTH system. 6. Conduct market survey for latest Audio Video systems and compare specifications of

reputed brands and prepare a report.

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Show video to demonstrate the working principles, constructional features, testing and

fault finding of different types of TV circuits. 2. Arrange a visit to TV relay centre and cable network station. 3. Arrange expert lecture of an industry person in the area of TV. 4. Arrange workshop to demonstrate fault finding and repairing in TV circuit

159


A) Books


1 Television and video Engineering A. M. Dhake TMH, ISBN 0-07-460105-9

2 Colour Television and video tech. Maini PHI

3 Modern TV Engineering Gulathi Wiley Publication

4 Basic TV and video system Barnad Grob TMH

5 Television Engineering and Video System

R. G Gupta TMH, ISBN 0074601059 97800-74601051

6 Audio video systems R. G Gupta TMH, ISBN 0070699763

7 Modern CD player servicing manual Manohar Lotia BPB PUBLICATION

ISBN 0-07-044555-9

8 Audio video systems : principle practices and troubleshooting

Bali R and Bali S.P.

Khanna Book Publishing Co. (P) Ltd., 2010Delhi, India, latest edition

B) Software/Learning Websites 1. http://www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Compact_Disc_player 2. http://www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/High-defination_television 3. http://www.howstuffworks.com

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications 1. CRO (100MHz). 2. Multimeter (3and1/2 digit digital). 3. Pattern generator. 4. Microphone of Different Types. 5. Loudspeaker. 6. Digital TV trainer. 7. Continuity tester.


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H

CO2 H H H M

CO3 H H H M

CO4 H H H H

CO5 H H H

CO6 H H H H

CO7 H H H H H


160


COURSE : Digital Communication (DCO) COURSE CODE : 6443



Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 -- 02 05 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

Digital communication systems are finding extensive use in all walks of life hence an electronics and telecommunication engineer should familiar with basic concepts, systems and modulation methods used in digital communication. This course aims at familiarizing him/her with the same.


The student will be able to, 1. Compare Digital and Analog communication system 2. Explain different analog modulation techniques. 3. Explain different pulse code modulation techniques 4. Describe different digital carrier modulation methods. 5. Describe coding methods 6. Explain SS systems



1. Compare different types of pulse code modulation techniques. 2. Select the relevant digital modulation technique for specific application. 3. Choose the coding technique for minimum errors in transmitting information. 4. Choose the relevant data transfer technique for various types of data transfer. 5. Use the relevant techniques of digital communication.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Introduction to Digital Communication

1a. State advantages of digital communication over analog communication

1b. Draw and explain block diagram of digital communication system.

1.1 Digital communication system, block diagram

1.2 Channel capacity- definition, Hartley’s law,

1.3 Shannon Hartley theorem, 1.4 Channel capacity equation, 1.5 Channel noise and its effect

04

1c. State Shannon Hartley theorem and Channel capacity equation

1d. Define channel noise and explain its effect.

1e. Define entropy 1f. Numerical based on

entropy and channel

1.6 Entropy(definition and equation) 1.7 Advantages and disadvantages of

digital communication 1.8 Comparison between analog and

digital communication

161




capacity equation 1g. Advantages of digital

communication

Unit-II Analog Pulse Modulation

2a. State Sampling theorem and explain its different types

2b. Explain errors in sampling

2c. Explain with sketch, generation and detection of PAM, PWM & PPM signals.

2d. Compare PAM, PWM & PPM.

2.1 Sampling theorem, aliasing, Niquist rate, natural and flattop sampling

2.2 Errors in Sampling 2.3 Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) 2.4 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) 2.5 Pulse Position Modulation (PPM) 2.6 Generation, detection and

comparison of PAM, PWM, PPM.

06

Unit-III Pulse Code Modulation

3a. State the need for digital transmission

3b. Explain the process of uniform and non-uniform quantization

3c. Explain companding 3d. Explain inter symbol

interference 3e. Explain with diagram

PCM, DPCM, DM & ADM transmitter and receiver

3.1 Need for digital transmission 3.2 Quantizing, Uniform and Non-

uniform Quantization 3.3 Quantization Noise 3.4 Companding 3.5 Inter symbol interference 3.6 Pulse code modulation, block

diagram of transmitter and receiver

3.7 Differential Pulse Code 3.8 Modulation 3.9 Delta Modulation block diagram,

slope overload and granular noise 3.10 Adaptive Delta Modulation block

diagram and working

08

Unit-IV Digital Carrier Modulation Techniques

4a. Definition of bit rate and baud rate

4b. Explain with diagram generation and reception of ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK, QPSK and QAM

4.1 Block diagram of digital transmission and reception.

4.2 Information capacity, Bit Rate, Baud Rate and M-ary coding.

4.3 Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK) 4.4 Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)

08

4c. Comparison of ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK, QPSK and QAM

4.5 Phase Shift Keying (PSK) 4.6 Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) 4.7 Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

(QPSK) and Differential Phase Shift Keying (DPSK)

4.8 Quadrature Amplitude modulation (QAM)

4.9 Bandwidth for each modulation techniques and their comparison

Unit-V Coding Methods and Error Control

5a. State need of line coding 5b. Explain with the help of

waveforms different types of line coding methods and problems based on the same

5.1 Line coding – Unipolar, bipolar- NRZ, RZ, Manchester Codes

5.2 Source coding viz ASCII, EBCDIC and baudot code

5.3 Channel coding: errors, causes of errors and its effects

08

5c. State the need of source 5.4 error detection and correction

162




coding and explain different source coding methods.

5d. State types of errors 5e. Detection and correction of errors using parity, Hamming and CRC code

using parity, Hamming and CRC code

5.5 Simple numerical based on it

Unit-VI Multiplexing & Multiple Access Techniques

6a. State the need of multiplexing.

6b. Describe with diagram different multiplexing techniques

6c. Compare different multiplexing techniques.

6d. Describe with a sketch different accessing techniques.

6.1 Need of Multiplexing 6.2 TDM, FDM definition, block

diagram and comparison 6.3 Introduction to WDM 6.4 Concept of Frequency Division,

Multiple Access (FDMA) 6.5 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) 6.6 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) 6.7 advantages of TDMA over FDMA

08

Unit-VII Spread Spectrum Modulation

7a. Define PN sequence. 7b. Define ML sequence and

state its properties. 7c. Differentiate between

direct sequence and frequency hopping spread spectrum systems.

7d. Describe with a sketch direct sequence spread spectrum and frequency hopping spread spectrum system.

7e. State applications of spread spectrum system.

7.1 Introduction 7.2 PN sequence and its generation 7.3 Model of Spread spectrum System 7.4 Direct sequence Spread spectrum

signal 7.5 Frequency Hop Spread spectrum,

slow frequency hopping and fast frequency hopping

7.6 Applications of spread spectrum system

06

TOTAL 48


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Introduction to Digital Communication 04 02 02 08

II Analog Pulse Modulation 04 02 02 08

III Pulse Code Modulation 04 04 04 12

IV Digital Carrier Modulation Techniques 06 06 04 16

V Coding Methods and Error Control 04 04 04 12

VI Multiplexing & Multiple Access Techniques 04 04 04 12

VII Spread spectrum modulation 04 04 04 12

TOTAL 30 26 24 80


163




S. No.

Unit No.



1 II

Check the performance of Pulse Amplitude modulator and Demodulator circuit

02

2 II

Check the performance of Pulse Width modulator and Demodulator circuit

02

3 II

Check the performance of Pulse Position modulator and Demodulator circuit

02

4 III Check the performance of Pulse code modulator and Demodulator circuit

02

5 III Check the performance of Delta Modulator circuit 02

6 III Check the performance of Adaptive Delta Modulator circuit 02

7 III Check the performance of DPCM modulator circuit 02

8 IV Check the performance of Amplitude Shift Keying modulation and demodulation

02

9 IV Check the performance of Frequency Shift Keying modulation and demodulation

02

10 IV Check the performance of Binary Phase Shift Keying modulation and demodulation

02

11 IV Check the performance of Quadrature Phase Shift Keying modulation and demodulation

02

12 IV Check the performance of Quadrature Amplitude modulation and demodulation

02

13 IV Check the performance of Time Division Multiplexer and Demultiplexer circuit

02

14 IV Check the performance of Frequency Division Multiplexer modulation and Demultiplexer circuit.

02

15 V Observe the performance of Manchester coding method. 02

16 VI To generate P-N Sequence using shift register 02

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Design sample and hold Circuit 2. Compare ranges of Bluetooth communication of various mobile 3. Collect technical specifications of Bluetooth headphone. 4. Industrial visit to telephone exchange and mobile switching centre

164

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Animation/video films showing the Principle of working, Waveforms and features of

PCM/DM/ADM/DPCM and Digital Modulation Techniques should be shown to students while teaching the concerned topic.

2. Demonstrate how to transfer data through Modem, USB and Bluetooth using Mobile, Computers.


A) Books


1 Digital Communication (2nd Edition) R.N. Mupagi Oxford University Press, New Delhi, Latest edition

2 Analog and Digital Communication T. L. Singal Tata McGraw Hill, India Latest edition

3 Modern Digital and Analog Communications Systems (3rd Edition)

B.P. Lathi Oxford University Press, New Delhi, Latest edition

4 Communication System(Analog and Digital)

Sanjay Sharma S.K. Kataria and Sons, New Delhi, Latest edition

5 Digital Communication M. Kulkarni

Umesh Publications New Delhi


1. PCM/DM/ADM/DPCM and Digital Modulation Techniques generation using any simulation software.

2. MATLAB software/ Electronics work bench software for the simulation

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications 1. Digital Communication trainer kits 2. Dual trace oscilloscope 3. Function Generator


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H

CO2 M H H H H

CO3 H H H H H

CO4 H H H H M

CO5 H H H H L


165

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Advance Communication Systems (ACS) COURSE CODE : 6444 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 -- 02 05 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

The development in telecommunication network based on Radar, Satellite, Microwave and Optical fiber technology has occurred with rapid growth. The course contents deal with basics of advanced communication systems and their maintenance.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand concepts and applications of microwave and optical spectrum. 2. Understand construction and working of microwave components and devices. 3. Understand basic principle and operation of radar systems. 4. Understand the construction, working and uses of optical communication system

components. 5. Know the concept, working and application of satellite communication system.



1. Describe the construction and operation of microwave devices. 2. State the applications of microwave devices. 3. Explain with block diagram and operation of different types of radar and satellite

communication system. 4. Explain construction and working principle of different types of optical sources and

detectors used in optical fiber communication. 4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Basics of Microwaves and Wave Guides

1a. Need of microwave communication system.

1b. Compare waveguide and two wire transmission line.

1c. Explain propagation of wave in rectangular waveguide.

1d. Define TEM/TE/TM, cut off frequency of a waveguide, guide wave length, phase velocity, group velocity.

1.1 Introduction to TEM/TE/TM wave. 1.2 Comparison between wave guide

and two -wire transmission line. 1.3 Propagation of waves in

rectangular wave guide only. (Introduction to wave guide only)

1.4 Construction and applications of Circular waveguide and rectangular waveguide.

1.5 Definition and interpretation of cut off frequency of a waveguide, guide wave length, phase velocity, group velocity. (Simple Numerical)

06

Unit-II Microwave

2a. State principle and draw construction of two cavity Klystron, Reflex

2.1 Construction, working Principles and Applications of: Two cavity klystron amplifier, Reflex Klystron

10

166



Components and Devices

Klystron amplifier and travelling wave tube (TWT).

2b. Draw constructional sketch and explain working of PIN and Tunnel and Gunn diode.

2c. Explain bends and corners, Twists.

2d. Draw and explain working of H- plane TEE, E-Plane and E-H-Plane TEE, directional coupler, waveguide, circulator and Isolator.

amplifier, travelling wave tube. 2.2 Construction and working principle

and Applications of microwave Diodes: PIN, Tunnel and Gunn.

2.3 Construction, Working principle and applications of: H- plane TEE, E-Plane TEE, E-H Plane TEE, Multihole directional coupler, wave guide bends, corners, Twists, circulator and isolator.

Unit-III RADAR

3a. Explain operation of pulse radar, MTI and CW radar system.

3b. Draw and explain working principle of Duplexer.

3c. Significance of Doppler effect

3d. Enlist applications of RADAR.

3.1 Fundamentals: Basic concept of Radar, Block diagram of an elementary pulsed Radar, Duplexer concept

3.2 Concept of continuous Wave Radar, Doppler effect and Speed Measurement

3.3 Block diagram and operation of Moving target indicator (MTI) radar

3.4 Applications of Radar

08

Unit-IV Satellite Communication System

4a. Draw and explain generalized block diagram of satellite communication system.

4b. Draw block diagram of various subsystems of satellite.

4c. State uplink-downlink frequencies for various bands

4d. Draw and explain operation of transponder.

4e. Enlist the applications of satellite.

4.1 Introduction to satellite communication system

4.2 Generalized block diagram of satellite communication system. Concept of orbit and its types

4.3 Communication link : uplink and downlink frequency, look angle altitude, elevation angle, Azimuth angle footprint and station Keeping

4.4 Block diagram and Principle of subsystem of satellite : Power subsystem, Communication channel subsystem (Block diagram of typical transponder), Attitude control subsystem, Telemetry tracking and command subsystem, Main and auxiliary propulsion subsystem, Antenna subsystem

4.5 Satellite applications

08

Unit-V Fundamentals of Fiber Optic Communication

5a. Draw constructional sketch of fiber optic cable.

5b. Classify and explain optical fibers.

5c. State advantages and disadvantages of optical fiber cable.

5d. Enlist applications of

5.1 Block Diagram of Fiber Optic Communication.

5.2 Construction of Fiber Optic Cable 5.3 Fiber Classification: Single- Mode

Step Index, Multi -mode Step-Index, Multi-mode Graded Index

5.4 Advantage and disadvantages of fiber optic communication.

5.5 Applications of FOC.

06

167



FOC.

Unit-VI Fiber Optic Communication system

6a. Define reflection, dispersion, diffraction, absorption, scattering, Snell’s Law, Numerical Aperture / Acceptance angle, acceptance cone, critical Angle.

6b. Explain construction and operation of LED and Laser

6c. Explain construction and operation of PIN and avalanche Photo diode.

6d. Explain splicing Techniques

6e. Know causes of losses in fiber optic system and minimize them.

6f. Draw and explain block diagram of OTDR.

6.1 Definition and Concept of Reflection, dispersion, diffraction, absorption and scattering with the help of light theory

6.2 Definitions of Snell’s Law, Numerical Aperture / Acceptance angle, acceptance cone, Critical Angle (Numerical)

6.3 Optical Sources: Construction and working Principle of LED and LASER

6.4 Optical Detectors: Construction and working principle of PIN Diode, Avalanche photodiode (APD)

6.5 Splicing Techniques: Fusion, Mechanical.

6.6 Losses in optical fiber: Absorption, Scattering, Dispersion, Radiation, Coupling.

6.7 Block diagram and working of OTDR

10

TOTAL 48


Unit No.

Unit Title


R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Basics of Microwaves and Waveguides 06 02 02 10

II Microwave Components and Devices 06 06 02 14

III RADAR 04 06 02 12

IV Satellite Communication System 06 08 02 16

V Fundamentals of Fibre Optic Communication 06 06 00 12

VI Fibre Optic Communication system 06 08 02 16

TOTAL 34 36 10 80


168

6.0 ASSIGNMENTS/PRACTICALS/TASKS: The tutorial/practical/assignments/tasks should be properly designed and implemented with an attempt to develop different types of cognitive and practical skills (Outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain) so that students are able to acquire the competencies. Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in a common list at the beginning of curriculum document for this programme. Faculty should refer to that common list and should ensure that students also acquire those Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes related to affective domain.

S.

No. Unit No.



1 II Assemble microwave bench using microwave components. 04

2 II Measure VSWR for given microwave loads 04

3 IV Transmit audio over satellite link. 02

4 IV Transmit data over satellite link. 02

5 V Plot V-I characteristic of photo-diode (Detector) at different luminance 02

6 V Plot (i) V-I characteristic of LED (ii) Characteristics of the output light

intensity against forward current of LED 02

7 V Assemble and verify analog link using optical fiber. 02

8 V Assemble and verify digital link using optical fiber. 02

9 VI Calculate the Numerical Aperture(NA) of given optical fiber by using

Trigonometric method (visual method) 02

10 VI Measure the bend loss and attenuation in given fiber optic cable using

OTDR 04

11 VI Industrial visit to Telephone exchange. 06

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Prepare chart showing various microwave components. 2. Prepare/Download a dynamic animation to illustrate the following:

a. Microwave tubes. b. EM waves propagation.

3. Visit any one of the following where waveguides are used for microwave communication. (Airport, earth station, Telephone exchange, Microwave link repeater, TV broadcast).

4. Download various information about satellite launched with their applications. 5. Collect information about RADAR used by Indian military and navigation operation. 6. Visit a place where optical fibers are used for various applications. (Collect information

about OTDR at their locations). 8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any):

1. Show video to demonstrate the working principles, constructional features, testing and understandings of different types of microwave devices, OFC, RADAR, Satellite.

2. Arrange a visit to any communication exchange. 3. Arrange expert lecture of an industry person in the area of advance communication. 4. Encourage students to build communication circuits.

169


A) Books

Sr. No.

Title of Book Author Publication

1 Microwave Engineering Gupta Sanjeeva Khanna Publication, New Delhi

2 Electronics communication system

Kennedy George Tata McGraw hill, New Delhi

3 Microwave engineering Das Annapurna and Das S. K

McGraw Hill, New Delhi,

4 Microwave Devices and Circuits Liao Samuel Y. PHI Learning, New Delhi

5 Microwave and RADAR Engineering

Gautam A. K S K Kataria Publications, New Delhi

6 Optical Fiber Communications Senior PHI Learning, New Delhi,

7 Optical Fiber Communication Gred Keiser Tata McGraw Hill


1. RF Tool box: MATLAB and SIMULINK: 2. http://www.rfmw.org/transmission_lines_and_distributed_systems_trans

mission_lines_transmission _lines.html 3. http://www.rfmw.org/transmission_lines_and_distributed_systems_transmission_line

s_transmission _lines_video_lectures.html www.nptel.ac.in


a. Transmission line trainer.

b. Gunn / klystron power supply ‘X’ band

c. VSWR meter Resonated at 01 KHZ

d. Microwave bench( Gunn / klystron) ‘X’ band component.

e. Microwave accessories BNC to BNC cables, Main Chords.

f. Microwave components ‘X’ band

g. Radar trainer kit Microwave X band frequency range


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H H M

CO2 H M M

CO3 H H H H M

CO4 H H H H M


http://www.rfmw.org/transmission_lines_and_distributed_systems_trans%20%20%20%20%20%20%20mission_lines_tr

http://www.rfmw.org/transmission_lines_and_distributed_systems_trans%20%20%20%20%20%20%20mission_lines_tr

http://www.rfmw.org/transmission_lines_and_distributed_systems_transmission_lines_tr


http://www.nptel.ac.in/

170

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : .NET Technology (NTT) COURSE CODE : 6445 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


01 -- 04 05 -- Max. -- -- -- -- -- 50 50

Min. -- -- -- -- -- 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course introduce the “Rapid Application Development (RAD) for the common business application, using Graphical User Interface (GUI)


The student will be able to, 1. Understand the terms related to VB.NET Development and VB.NET applications. 2. Understand the data types, loops and importance of the Error Handling, its methods and

event. 3. Importance of OOO’s concept and describe its classes. 4. Define windows forms and State the different controls 5. Define database concept 6. Define Database Connections



1. State importance of VB.NET Development and applications. 2. Explain data types and uses of loops and importance of theError Handling, its methods

and event. 3. Suggest OOO’s concept and describe its classes. 4. Describe windows forms and State the different controls 5. Explain Concept of database concept 6. Explain Concept of Database Connections

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Introduction to VB.net

1a. Define the terms related to VB.NET Development Environment Studies

1b. State importance of creating VB.NET applications

1.1 Event Driven Programming 1.2 .NET Framework 1.3 .NET Architecture 1.4 The Just-In-Time Compiler 1.5 .NET Framework class library introduction 1.6 VB.NET Development Environment - Creating

Applications - Building Projects - Using simple components - Running VB.NET applications

Unit-II Implementation of VB.NET

2a. Define data types, loops

2b. Importance of Error Handling, it’s methods and event

2.1 Features 2.2 VB.NET IDE 2.3 Data types 2.4 Operators 2.5 Loops

171




2.6 Control Structures 2.7 Cases 2.8 Error Handling 2.9 methods and events

Unit-III Object Oriented Programming in VB.NET

3a. Define OOO’s concept 3b. Describe it’s classes

3.1 Introduction to OOP - Advantages & Disadvantages

3.2 Basic Concept Of OOP - Classes & Objects - Constructors and Destructors - Method overloading - Overloading and Overriding. - Inheritance - Indexer - Access modifiers: - Public, Private, Protected, Friend.

Unit-IV Windows Applications in VB.NET.

4a. Define forms 4b. State the different

controls

4.1 Windows Forms 4.2 Controls - Text Boxes, Buttons, Labels, Check

Boxes and Radio Buttons - List Boxes, Combo Boxes. Picture Boxes, Scrollbars, Splitters, Timer - Menus, Built-in Dialogs - Image List, Progress bars.

Unit-V Databases in VB.NET

5a. Define database concept

5b. Define Database Connections

5.1 Database - Connections - Data adapters - Datasets - Data Reader,

5.2 Connection to database with server explorer 5.3 Multiple Table Connection 5.4 Data binding with controls like Text Boxes,

List Boxes, Data grid etc. 5.5 Navigating data source 5.6 Data Grid View





S. No.

Unit No.

Practical Exercises (Any Five Visits and Five Reports/Assignments)

Approx. Hrs.

required

1 I-IV Create a simple Console Application using VB.NET(addition of two no, select case)

06

2 I-IV Create Windows Application using VB.NET controls (simple calculator) 08

3 I-IV Create Window Application using Class. 06

4 I-IV Create Window Application using Built in Dialogs 06

5 I-IV Apply Interface on Windows Application Form 08

6 I-IV Create Window Application using combo box 06

7 I-IV Create Window Application using list box 06

172

S. No.

Unit No.

Practical Exercises (Any Five Visits and Five Reports/Assignments)

Approx. Hrs.

required

8 I-IV Create Window Application using Timer 06

9 I-IV Create Window Application using Progress bar 06

10 I-V Create Window Application for access database. 06

TOTAL 64


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Create console application using VB.NET and its different controls 2. Create a user friendly application.


1. Course Video 2. Expert Lectures


A) Books


1 Programming Microsoft Visual Basic.NET Francesco Balena Microsoft Press

2 The Complete Reference -Visual Basic NET Jefrey R. Shapiro Osborne/McGraw Hill

3 Murach‘s VB.NET database programming with ADO.

Anne Prince and Doug Low

Murach

4 The Visual Basic.NET COACH Jelf Salvage Addison Wesley

5 Visual Basic.NET 2003 in 21 Days Steven Holzner SAMS Publications


1. http://www.vbtutor.net/vb_sample/sample.html 2. http://www.worldbestlearningcenter.com/index_files/VB.NET-variables-exercises.htm 3. http://www.homeandlearn.co.uk/NET/nets1p24.html


1. VB.Net min requirement 2008 and onwards versions 2. Computers -HDD: 40GB Processor: PIV or above Min RAM: 2GB or above OS: 32 bit

or 64 bit


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 M M

CO2 H L M

CO3 H H L

CO4 H M M M

CO5 H M M H M M

CO6 L M


173

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Microcontroller-8051 (MIC) COURSE CODE : 6552 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 04 08 03 Max. 80 20 100 25 -- 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 10 -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

An electronics engineer working in an industry is required to make use of micro controller programming for various applications. The objective of this course is to enable the student to use micro controller for variety of industrial application. The technology of microprocessor has led to a single chip Microcontroller technology MCS- 51 family architecture, details of 8051 Microcontroller and its programming is covered in this course use of assembler and simulator for programming of Microcontroller will make the students equipped for the development of embedded systems.


The student will be able to, 1. Compare Microprocessor and Microcontroller. 2. Describe architecture and operation of microcontroller 8051. 3. Know various program development tools. 4. Develop assembly language programs using instruction set of 8051. 5. Interface peripheral with microcontroller 8051.



1. Select appropriate version of microcontroller for different application. 2. Use software program development tool. 3. Write and execute assembly language program for specific application. 4. Interface input/output peripherals with microcontroller 8051. 5. Develop small microcontroller based application.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Introduction to Microcontroller

1a. Compare microprocessor and microcontroller.

1b. Differentiate between microcontroller architectures.

1c. Compare versions of microcontrollers.

1d. Explain generalized block diagram of microcontroller.

1.1 Introduction and History of microcontroller.

1.2 Comparison of Microprocessor, Microcontroller.

1.3 Evaluation of Microcontroller 1.4 Terminology: RISC, CISC, Harvard

and Von-Neumann Architecture and their comparison.

1.5 Generalized functional block diagram of microcontroller.

1.6 Specification and comparison of 8051, 8751 and 8951

08

Unit-II

2a. State features of 8051 microcontroller.

2.1 Features and Pin diagram with function of all pins of 8051.

12

174




8051 Hardware

2b. Draw pin diagram and architecture of 8051.

2c. Explain pin functions and architecture of 8051.

2d. Interface external memory with microcontroller.

2e. Draw internal port structure of 8051.

2f. Explain operation of input/output ports of 8051.

2.2 Architecture of 8051. 2.3 Function of program counter and

data pointer, A and B registers, Program status word (PSW) register, concept of Stack and stack pointer register, List of special function registers with address

2.4 Internal Memory: Concept and Structure of 128 byte internal RAM, Structure of 4kb EPROM.

2.5 Connections of external memory. 2.6 Port Structure: Internal diagram

and working of all four ports.

Unit-III Addressing modes and instruction set

3a. Define addressing modes of instructions.

3b. Explain functions of all assembly language instructions of 8051.

3c. Develop assembly language program for different operations.

3.1 8051 Addressing modes-Definition and types.

3.2 Assembly language instruction format.

3.3 8051 Instruction Set-Data transfer, Arithmetic, Logical, Branch-jump and Call Instructions, Boolean variable manipulation instructions.

3.4 Simple Programming: 8-bit addition, subtraction, multiplication, division (using external memory) largest number, ascending order, block transfer (external to internal memory), to find even and odd numbers.

14

Unit-IV Assembly program development tools

4a. Differentiate between different software development tools.

4b. Define different data types and explain assembler directives.

4c. Explain various files in software tools.

4d. Use different software simulators.

4.1 Development systems tools- Editor, Assembler, Linker, Debugger

4.2 8051 data types-Decimal, Hex and Binary.

4.3 Directives (DB, DW, BIT, ORG, EQU, END)

4.4 Creating various files to run the 8051 program (asm, obj, lst, abs and hex files)

4.5 Software Simulators of 8051 (MIDE-51, Keil’s Tool, µvision debugger)

10

Unit-V SFR format and programming

5a. Draw format of all special function registers.

5b. Explain function of each bit of each special function register.

5c. Write program to generate a square wave.

5d. Explain serial communication with simple program

5.1 Interrupts- IE and IP SFRs study. 5.2 Study of Timer SFR’s (TMOD,

TCON, TLX, THX) 5.3 Timer modes of 8051 5.4 Programming of 8051 timers-

Generation of square wave using timer modes, calculation of count and assembly program.

5.5 Serial communication. (SCON), simple program for serial communication.

5.6 Power saving mode of 8051 study

08

175




5e. Explain power saving options of microcontroller.

of PCON

Unit-VI Peripheral Interfacing and Programming

6a. Draw Interface diagram and explain interfacing of peripherals with 8051 such as ADC, DAC, Keyboard, LEDs, 7-segment and LCD display, DC and Stepper Motor.

6b. Develop assembly language program to use peripherals with 8051 such as ADC, DAC, Keyboard, LEDs, 7-segment and LCD display, DC and Stepper Motor.

6.1 ADC 0808/0809 interfacing and programming

6.2 DAC 0808 Interfacing -Generation of Square wave, Triangular wave

6.3 Keyboard Interfacing (simple program)

6.4 Interfacing and programming of LEDs.

6.5 Interfacing and programming of 7-segment.

6.6 LCD interfacing- Initialization, programming.

6.7 DC and Stepper motor interfacing with Programs.

12

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Introduction to Microcontroller 04 04 00 08

II 8051 Hardware 08 04 00 12

III Addressing modes and instruction set 04 04 08 16

IV Assembly program development tools 02 04 04 10

V SFR format and programming 04 04 08 16

VI Peripheral Interfacing and Programming 02 04 12 18

TOTAL 24 24 32 80





176

S.

No. Unit No.



1 II Study of Pin diagram and architecture of 8051. 02

2 III Write and execute assembly program using simulator 8-bit addition and 8-bit subtraction using internal memory.

04

3 III Write and execute assembly program using simulator 8-bit Multiplication and 8-bit Division using external memory.

04

4 III Write and execute assembly program to find largest number from group of 10 numbers using simulator

02

5 III Write and execute assembly program to find smallest number from group of 10 numbers using simulator

02

6 III Write and execute assembly program to find Even and odd number from group of 10 numbers using simulator (two separate programs)

04

7 III Write and execute assembly program to arrange 5 numbers in descending using simulator

02

8 III Write and execute assembly program to arrange 5 numbers in ascending using simulator

02

9 III Write and execute assembly program to transfer 10 numbers from external memory to internal memory using simulator.

02

10 III Write and execute assembly program to transfer 10 numbers from external memory to external memory (overlapped) using simulator.

02

11 V

Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to generate square waveform using internal timers.

02

12 VI Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to interface and blink LEDs on I/O ports.(two different patterns of blinking)

04

13 VI Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to interface (16x2) LCD and display message on it.

04

14 VI Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to interface 7-segment and display BCD-counter on it.

04

15 VI Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to interface DAC0808 and Generate Triangular waveform.

04

16 VI Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to interface stepper motor and to rotate it in clockwise and anticlockwise direction.

04

17 VI Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to interface and rotate DC motor in forward and reverse directions.

04

18 VI Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to interface 4-keys and display it on LEDs.

04

19 VI Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to implement simple traffic light control system.

04

20 VI Write, execute and download on kit assembly program to interface ADC809 and display digital value.

04

TOTAL 64


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Prepare a chart of architecture of 8051. 2. Prepare a chart showing all instructions of 8051. 3. Prepare chart to represent the interfacing diagram of microcontroller with different

peripherals. 4. Develop a practical application using 8051 Microcontroller 5. Prepare/Download a dynamic animation to illustrate the following

177

a. Data transfer operation b. Keypad Interfacing c. LCD Interfacing d. Stepper / DC Motor Interfacing


1. Show video/animation film to demonstrate the working of microcontroller. 2. Arrange expert lecture of a person in the area of Microcontroller. 3. Arrange visit to relevant industry.


A) Books


1 The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Application

Kennneth J. Ayala Thomson and Delmar Learning. (PRI), Second Edition.

2 The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded systems

Mazidi, Mazidi and Mckinlay

Pearson Publication, Second Edition.

3 Microcontrollers

Ajay Deshmukh Tata-McGraw Hill Publication, first Edition.

4 Programming and Customizing the 8051 microcontroller

Myke Predko Tata-McGraw Hill Publication 1999.


1. www.8052.com 2. www.nptel.iitm.ac.in


1. 8051 Microcontroller Trainer Kit.

2. 8051 Simulator Software (Web version)

3. Computer system (Latest version)

4. Peripheral interface kits

5. 8051 microcontroller programmer.


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H L

CO2 H

CO3 L H L

CO4 L L H

CO5 L H L L




http://www.asic-world.com/digital/tutorial.html

http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/

178

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Control System and PLC (CSP) COURSE CODE : 6553 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


03 -- 02 05 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- -- 25 125

Min. 32 -- 40 -- -- 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE: This course deals with basic mathematical concepts in designing and maintaining the control system, control system components & basics of PLC.


1. Understand the concept of control and control system 2. Understand Steady state, time domain and frequency domain analysis of control system 3. Understand the concept of stability 4. Know the concept of different Servo Systems and control system component 5. Understand the basic concept of PLC


1. Develop transfer functions of 1st and 2nd order of system 2. Interpret functionality of different control system components 3. Calculate time response specifications for different control system 4. Identify the significance of standard test inputs and apply them in analysis of control

system 5. Compute stability of a control system using analytical and graphical methods 6. Explain the major components of PLC

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Introduction of Control System

1a. Define control system 1b. Differentiate open loop and

close loop system, Linear and nonlinear system, Time varying and time in- varying Systems

1.1 Definitions of control system 1.2 Classification of control systems 1.3 Open loop and closed loop

systems – definition, block diagram, practical examples and Comparison

10

1c. Design transfer function of electronic circuits

1d. Plot pole and zeros on s-plane for a transfer function

1e. Develop and solve block diagram of a closed loop control system

1f. Apply signal flow graph reduction rules to closed loop control system

1.4 Linear and nonlinear system, Time varying and time in- varying Systems

1.5 Laplace transform – Significance in Control System.

1.6 Transfer function – definition, derivation of transfer Function for close loop control system, Transfer functions of simple RC and RLC electrical circuits. Laplace transform of transfer function.

1.7 Poles and zeros: Definition, S-

179



plane representation 1.8 Order of a system – definition,

0, 1, 2 order system standard equation, practical examples

1.9 Block diagram reduction technique: Need, reduction rules, Numericals.

Unit-II Control System Components and Servo Systems

2a. Define servo system

2b. Draw the block diagram of servo system

2c. Explain principle and basic concept of AC and DC servo systems

2d. Compare AC and DC servo system

2e. Explain different servo components

2f. Describe the operation of variable reluctance type Stepper motor

2g. Explain the operation of AC/DC servo motors

2h. Compare armature controlled and field controlled DC servo motors

2i. Interpret the characteristics of servo system, servo components, AC/DC servo motors

2.1 Servo system –definition, block diagram

2.2 AC and DC servo systems- concept and principle, comparison, practical example, schematic diagram

2.3 Servo components Potentiometer as error

detector

Synchro as error detector Rotary encoder

2.4 Stepper motor- variable reluctance type

2.5 DC servo motor- characteristic, comparison between armature controlled and field controlled DC servo motors (no TF)

2.6 AC servo motor- characteristic of AC Servo motor (no TF)

08

Unit-III Time Domain Analysis of Control System

3a. State different standard inputs and their Laplace transform

3b. Compute time response of first order system

3c. Analyze steady state error and error coefficients

3d. Define time response specifications

3e. Solve numericals on time domain analysis

3.1 Standard test inputs: Step, ramp, parabolic and impulse, Need, significance and corresponding Laplace representation

3.2 Time response of first order system for step input, ramp input, parabolic input.

3.3 Analysis of steady state error and error coefficients.

3.4 Time response specification like delay time, rise time, peak time, peak overshoot, damping ratio, steady state error. (no derivations)

3.5 Numericals based on above topics

08

Unit-IV Stability Analysis of Control System

4a. Define stability

4b. Explain conditions for stability

4c. Differentiate Stable, unstable, critically stable and conditionally stable system

4d. Determine stability of system using Hurwitz and Rouths

4.1 Stability: Definition of stability, Necessary condition for stability.

4.2 Analysis of Stable, unstable, critically stable and conditionally stable system, Relative stability, Root locations in s-plane.

4.3 Hurwitz stability criterion 4.4 Rouths stability criterion 4.5 Numericals based on above topics

06

180



stability criterion.

Unit-V Frequency domain Analysis of Control System

5a. Explain advantages and disadvantages of frequency response analysis

5b. State frequency response Specifications

5c. Develop Bode plot method for standard function for calculation of gain and phase margin

5d. Compare time domain and frequency domain analysis.

5.1 Introduction, Advantages and Disadvantages of Frequency Response Analysis

5.2 Frequency Response Specifications.

5.3 Bode Plot method for Standard Function: Introduction of Bode plot, Gain plot, Phase plot.

5.4 General Procedure for Constructing Bode Plot.

5.5 Comparison between time domain and frequency domain analysis.

5.6 Numericals based on above topics

08

Unit-VI Introduction to programmable logic controllers

6a. Draw block diagram of PLC.

6b. Describe PLC architecture.

6c. Explain the working of PLC.

6d. List the steps to configure the PLC.

6e. List out peripherals for PLC

6f. Draw basic symbols used for PLC.

6g. Describe selection criteria for PLC.

6h. State advantages and Disadvantages of PLC.

6i. List out PLC applications in industries and automation systems.

6.1 Introduction to PLC

6.2 Configuration of PLC (components of modularized PLC )

6.3 Architecture of PLC

6.4 Working of PLC

6.5 PLC peripherals

6.6 PLC symbols

6.7 Selection criteria of PLC

6.8 Advantages and disadvantages of PLC

6.9 PLC applications.

08

TOTAL 48

5.0 SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH MARKS (THEORY):

Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Introduction of Control System 06 06 06 16

II Control System Components and Servo Systems 04 04 06 14

III Time Domain Analysis of Control System 04 06 04 14

IV Stability Analysis of Control System 04 04 04 12

V Frequency domain Analysis of Control System 04 04 04 12

VI Introduction to programmable logic controllers 04 02 06 12

TOTAL 26 26 28 80




181


S. No.

Unit No.


Hours

1 I Check the performance of any close loop control system 02

2 I Verify and analyze the Step response of first order R-C circuit 02

3 I Verify and analyze the Step response of R-L-C second order circuit 02

4 II Assemble and check the performance of potentiometer as error detector 02

5 II Assemble and check the performance of Synchro as error detector 02

6 II Test the performance of DC position control system 02

7 II Test the performance of AC servomotor 02

8 II Test the performance of DC servomotor 02

9 II Test the performance stepper motor 02

10 III Assemble and determine time response specifications of first order control system (using passive components)

04

11 V Calculate gain and phase margins for a transfer function using Bode plot method

02

12 VI Identify the different subsections of PLC architecture 04

13 VI Assemble various modules of PLC to make PLC system 04

TOTAL 32


1. Identify different examples of control systems used in day-to-day life. 2. Collect the specifications of different control system components. 3. Interface different transducers to the available PLC module in the laboratory. 4. Collect the information and specifications of PLCs of different manufacturers.

8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any): 1. Arrange industrial visit. 2. Expert lecture from industrial experts OR academicians. 3. Show videos /power point presentation from renowned experts in the area of control

system & PLC.


A) Books


1 Control System Engineering I.J. Nagrath, M. Gopal Wiley Eastern

2 Modern Control Engineering K. Ogata Prentice Hall

3 Intro. To Programmable logic control Gary Dunning Cenage Learning

4 Programmable logic controllers F.D. Petruzella Tata- McGraw-Hill(Third edition)


1. http://www.pacontrol.com 2. http://en. wikipedia.org/wiki/Control_system 3. www.learningpit.com-for PLC simulation software downloading. 4. www.plctutor.com - for PLC tutorials

http://www.pacontrol.com/

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Control_system

182

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications 1 DC Regulated dual Power supply.

1. O/P voltage – 0 to 30 Volt, 2A in 3 range in both channel 2. Display – 3 ½ digit, 3. Load regulation – 0.5 V % + 10 mV, no load full load for each channel 4. Line regulation – 0.05 % + 15 mV for +/-, Variation around 230 volt 5. O/P imp – 15 milliohms, 6. Ripple – less than 1mV rms. 7. I/P supply – 230 V +/- 10 % 50 Hz. 8. Both channel tracking mode

2 Function generator 3MHz. 1. Out Put wave form – Sine, Triangle, Square. 2. Frequency range – 0.1 Hz to 3 MHz 3. Amplitude Range – 30mV to 30 Volt P- P, 4. O/P impedance – 50 V. 5. offset capability, 6. Display – 4 digit LED/ LCD

3 Pulse Generator. 1. Pulse repetition rate – 0.1 Hz to 10 MHz in 8 decade ranges. 2. Rise and fall time – 10 ns - 2 ns 3. Pulse width – 35 ns and 0.1 μsec to 1 sec in y decade range 4. O/P – 40 mV to 5 V across 50 Ω in six step, 5. Power supply – 230 V +/- 10 % 50 Hz.

4 CRO 1. Dual Channel, 4 Trace CRT / TFT based 2. Bandwidth 20 MHz/30 MHz 3. X10 magnification 20 nS max sweep rate, 4. Alternate triggering 5. Component tester 6. Digital Read out0 7. USB interface 8. (Any other Oscilloscope with additional features are also suitable)

5 Demonstration kits 1. Demonstration kit for potentiometer as error detector 2. Demonstration kit for Synchro as error detector 3. Demonstration kit for DC position control system. 4. Demonstration kit for AC servomotor 5. Demonstration kit for DC servomotor 6. Demonstration kit for Stepper motor 7. PLC trainer kit


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H M M

CO2 H M M H M

CO3 H M H H

CO4 H M H H M

CO5 H H H M

CO6 H H H M


183

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Computer Hardware and Networking (CHN) COURSE CODE : 6554 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 50 175

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 20 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

The aim of the course is to teach the basic working of the computer motherboard, peripherals and add-on cards. The course helps the students to do the maintenance of the Computer, peripherals and its add-on cards. The students will be able to select the proper peripheral as per their specification and requirement. The student will be able to do assemble a Computer and also he/she is able to install software like Operating System, Application Packages and Device Drivers. The main aim of this course to make a student having well known knowledge of all Hardware devices and their functions, Troubleshooting & Repairing of Faults.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand principle, construction, working of computer peripherals. 2. Select cost effective, good quality reliable peripherals and equipment. 3. Identify the problem as hardware or software related. 4. Identify and repair the simple faults in computer systems. 5. Plan, analyze, design, install, configure, test, implement and maintain networking systems



1. Explain motherboard and its peripherals. 2. Explain different types of power supply and its interfaces. 3. Solve, diagnose, test and maintenance of pc. 4. Explain basic concept of networking. 5. Explain all networking devices and reference models.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Motherboard And Peripherals

1a. Identify different components and their function on motherboard

1b. Identify and compare storage devices.

1.1 Different types of PC configurations and their comparison. Chipset basic, Architecture of Intel 945 G

1.2 Overview and features of ISA, PCI-X, PCI-Xpress

10

1c. Write specifications, select appropriate monitor and compare LCD and CRT monitors

1d. Understand principle, construction and working of peripherals

1.3 Overview features and types of DDR RAMs, Concept of cache memory : Internal cache, External cache (L1, L2, L3 cache), BIOS Basics

1.4 CD/DVD ROM drive : Construction, recording, comparison

1.5 LCD monitor: functional block diagram of LCD monitor, working principle, Types-

184




Passive matrix and Active matrix. Important characteristics - Resolution, Refresh rate, Response time. Comparison of CRT display and LCD display

1.6 Construction, working & Installation of Keyboard, mouse, scanner and printer. Keyboard: Membrane and mechanical only. Mouse: Optical only, Scanner: Flatbed only, Printer: Dot matrix, Inkjet and Laser only

Unit-II Power Supply And Interfaces

2a. Select, identify, measure and troubleshoot power related problems

2b. Differentiate online and offline UPS.

2c. Identify, select and use different interfaces

2.1 Block diagram and working of SMPS, Signal description and pin diagram of ATX power supply.

2.2 UPS : Block diagram working, Types, Rating

2.3 USB features and operation, RS232: Voltages & 9 pin Signal description.

08

Unit-III Diagnostic, Testing And Maintenance

3a. Identify importance of preventive maintenance

3b. Realize the need of practices of preventive Maintenance of peripheral

3.1 Maintenance : Preventive and passive maintenance

3.2 Preventive maintenance of peripherals of PCs: Mouse, keyboard, hard disk, CDROM drive, laser printer, scanner.

3.3 PC problems and troubleshooting, POST.

10

Unit-IV Introduction To Networks

4a. Classify types of networks

4b. Plan and design network 4c. Install, configure and use

networking devices 4d. Test and maintain

networks

4.1 Network classification: LAN, WAN, MAN. Peer to peer and client server networks

4.2 Network topology, Benefits of networks 4.3 Network cables- coaxial, UTP, STP, fiber

optics their comparison and characteristics

4.4 Network standards- Ethernet, Ring, Token, wireless

10

Unit-V Networking Devices And Reference Models

5a. Understand layered approach

5b. Compare TCP-IP and OSI models

5c. Setup and configure network in laboratory environment

5.1 OSI Reference Model - Interlayer Communication – Data Encapsulation, Functions of each layer.

5.2 TCP/IP Reference Model - Link, Internet, Transport, Application layer.

5.3 Comparison of the OSI and TCP/IP reference models

10

5.4 TCP/IP Protocols - IP, ICMP, ARP, TCP, FTP and UDP.

5.5 IP Addressing - IP Address Assignments, IP Address Classes, Subnet Masking.

5.6 TCP/IP Configuration - Installing the TCP/IP Protocol; Configuring TCP/IP - Configuring Basic TCP/IP Properties, Configuring Advanced TCP/IP Properties

TOTAL 48

185


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Motherboard And Peripherals 05 05 06 16

II Power Supply And Interfaces 05 05 06 16

III Diagnostic, Testing And Maintenance 05 05 06 16

IV Introduction To Networks 05 05 06 16

V Networking Devices And Reference Models 05 05 06 16

TOTAL 25 25 30 80





S.

No. Unit No.


Hrs. required

1 I Drawing the motherboard layout of Pentium IV and studying the chipset through data books or Internet.

02

2 I

Understand different components of Hard Disks drive as a storage device & terms related to it.

02

3 I Understand formatting and partitioning of Hard Disk. 02

4 II Identify and Install various types of Display Adapters. 02

5 II Installation of Scanner, Printers and Modems. 04

6 III Understand the ATX Power Supply and SMPS. 04

7 III Use of Diagnostic Softwares. (Any one) 04

8 IV Indentify and understand different types of Network Cable. 04

9 IV Installation of Client Server Network in Lab. 04

10 V RS232C communication between two computers 04

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Visit to industry and collect data about PC and Hardware 2. Collect information about and hardware of PC and other resources 3. PC Assembling


1. Show Computer hardware parts 2. Arrange visit to hardware industry 3. Arrange expert seminar of industry person in the hardware area.

186


A) Books


1 The Complete PC Upgrade & Maintenance Guide

Mark Minasi Willey Publication

2 Upgrading & Repairing PCs Scott Mueller Pearson Education

3 Bigelow's Troubleshooting, Maintaining & Repairing PCs

Bigelow Tata McGraw Hill

4 Local and metropolitan Area Networks 6/e William Stalling Pearson

5 Computer Networks and Internet Douglas E Comer & M S Narayanan

Pearson


1. http://ccna.com/ccna-training 2. http://learningnetwork.cisco.com 3. http://www.mcse-training.com 4. http://www.microsoft.com/learning/en/us/certification/mcse.aspx 5. http://www.intel.com/products/processor 6. http://www.intel.com/products/desktop/motherboard 7. http://www.seagate.com 8. http://www.scsisource.com 9. http://www.w3schools.com/tcpip 10. http://www.protocols.com 11. http://www.karbosguide.com/ 12. http://www.karbosguide.com/books/pcarchitecture/start.Htm 13. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Computer_hardware


Sr. No. Equipments Specifications

1

Hardware:

Desktop Computer Processor: intel core i5 Memory: at least 4GB RAM Hard drive: at least 320GB hard disk

2 LCD Projector Display Type: LCD Light Output: 3200 Lumens

3

Software:

Windows Windows 7, 10 or Higher

4 Linux Linux

5 Drivers Drivers for Desktop Computers


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H M

CO2 H M L L

CO3 H M M

CO4 M H L L

CO5 H M L


http://www.karbosguide.com/

http://www.karbosguide.com/books/pcarchitecture/start.Htm

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Computer_hardware

187

PROGRAMME

: Diploma Programme in Electronics and telecommunication Engineering (EL)

COURSE : Data Communication and Networking (DCM) COURSE CODE : 6555 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

After understanding basic communication system it is worth to discuss Data Communication & Networking. Telecommunication & Data communication is fastest growing technology & undoubtedly has strong growth in future so we should know data transfer from one system to another system through different communication networks like WAN, MAN & different switching techniques.


The student will be able to, 1. Draw OSI model and explain each layer 2. Explain TCP/IP model and functions of the different layers 3. Describe different topologies 4. Describe concept of Routing and switching 5. Describe IPv4 and IPv6 in detail



1. Draw OSI model and explain each layer 2. Use TCP/IP model and functions of the different layers 3. Select appropriate topology 4. Apply concept of Routing and switching 5. Implement IPv4 and IPv6 protocol in detail

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Networking Fundamentals

1a. Differentiate between data and information.

1b. Different forms of data 1c. Characteristics of data

communication 1d. Components of a data

communication system 1e. Classification of computer

networks.

1.1 Data and Information 1.2 Data Communication 1.3 Characteristics of Data

Communication 1.4 Components of Data

Communication 1.5 Data Representation 1.6 Data Flow : Simplex, Half

Duplex, Full Duplex

08

1f. Explain protocols in details.

1.7 Computer Network and its Categories

1.8 Protocol and its Elements 1.9 Concept of Standard In

Networking 1.10 Standard Organizations in

188



field of Networking

Unit-II Network Models

2a. Explain the concept of layered task.

2b. OSI model and its layers and explain their responsibility.

2c. Communication between layers of OSI model.

2d. Describe encapsulation of data in OSI model.

2e. Differentiate between the working of Data link layer, Network layer and Transport layer.

2.1 Concept of Layered task 2.2 Introduction to OSI Model

and its layers 2.3 Layered Architecture of OSI

Model 2.4 Communication and

Interfaces 2.5 Encapsulation of Data 2.6 Description of Layers in the

OSI Model

08

Unit III: TCP/IP Model, Addressing in TCP/IP – IPv4

3a. Explain the structure of TCP/IP protocol

3b. Explain in short the functions of every layer of TCP/IP

3c. Explain the function of every protocol of the IP layer

3d. Explain the concept of IP addresses in detail

3e. State need of sub-netting 3f. Define NAT. State its need 3g. Explain the header of IPv4

Packet.

3.1 TCP/IP Model 3.2 Addressing In TCP/IP 3.3 IPv4

IP addresses Address Space Notations used to express

IP address

Class full Addressing Sub-netting CIDR NAT IPv4 Header

12

Unit-IV Network Topologies

4a. Define: Network 4b. Differentiate between LAN,

MAN, WAN 4c. State advantages of installing

a network 4d. State disadvantages of

installing a network 4e. Define network topology. 4f. State the types of network

topologies 4g. Describe different network

topologies

4.1 An Overview of network 4.2 Types of network

Local Area Network Wide Area Network, MAN

4.3 Comparing types of network coverage

4.4 An Illustrated Example of a College University Network

4.5 Topologies: The Technical Connotation of Topology Basic Types of Topology? Classification of Topology

08

Unit-V Introduction to Routing

5a. Explain concept of routing 5b. Explain concept of switching 5c. Discuss design goals of

routing algorithms 5d. Explain routing algorithms 5e. Explain Routing metrics

5.1 Routing 5.2 Path Determination 5.3 Switching 5.4 Routing algorithms

Design Goals Routing Algorithm Types

5.5 Routing Metrics

08

Unit-VI Switching Methods

6a. Define Circuit Switching 6b. Explain working of a

switching Node 6c. Explain concept of Time

Division Switching

6.1 Switching Methods

Circuit Switching Time Division Switching Packet Switching

08

189



Unit-VII IP Version 6 (IPv6) Configurations and Transitions

7a. Explain IPv6 auto configuration

7b. Explain DHCP using IPv6

7.1 An Overview 7.2 Address Auto configuration 7.3 Types of Auto configuration 7.4 Auto Configuration Process 7.5 IPv6 Transition Technologies 7.6 IPv6 - Auto Configuration vs

DHCPv6 7.7 DHCPv6 7.8 Summary of Benefits of IPv6

in a nutshell

12

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Networking fundamentals 04 04 -- 08

II Network Models 06 04 02 12

III TCP/IP Model, Addressing in TCP/IP – IPv4 06 06 04 16

IV Network Topologies 04 04 -- 08

V Introduction to Routing 06 06 04 16

VI Switching Methods 04 04 -- 08

VII IP Version 6 (IPv6) Configurations and Transitions

06 06 -- 12

TOTAL 36 34 10 80





S. No.

Unit No.



1 I Observe Components of Network in your Computer Network Lab. (To know your Network Lab.)

02

2 I Observe and describe network features 02

3 II Connect and explain different Transmission Media and Network Control devices.

04

4 II Prepare a Straight Cable and Network Cross over Cable and test by Line Tester.

04

5 Install a network interface card 02

190

S. No.

Unit No.



6 IV Connect Computers in Star Topology using Wired Media and any Network control Device

04

7 VI Connect two hubs/switch by creating crossover connection 04

8 IV Configure Peer-to-Peer Network 04

9 Share Printer and Folder in Network 02

10 III and VII

Install TCP/IP Protocols (Version 4 and version 6) and configure advanced features of TCP/IP Protocols

04

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Find from internet list of manufacturers who develop networking components 2. Find from local market cost of networking components 3. Find specifications of networking components


1. Internet videos 2. Visit to a large network installation center / site. 3. Power point presentation


A) Books


1 Data communications and Networking B. A. Forouzan McGraw Hill, Fourth Edition

2 Data communications and Networks Achyut Godbole Tata McGraw Hill, India

Latest edition

3 TCP/IP Dr. Sidnie Feit Second Edition, TMH

4 Data and Computer Communications W. Stallings Eighth Edition, Pearson

Education.

5 Michal Miller Data and Network Communication

Thomson Delmar Learning


1. www.nptel.ac.in 2. www.tutorialspoint.com/data_communication_computer_network/

freevideolectures.com › Networking › IIT Kharagpur

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications 1. Windows PC 2. Router 3. Switch


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M M M

CO2 H M M M

CO3 M H H M

CO4 H M M M

CO5 M H H H


191

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Advanced Microcontrollers (AMC) COURSE CODE : 6556 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course deals with design programming and troubleshooting of microcontroller systems using advanced microcontrollers like PIC microcontrollers using which students will be able to design, implement and troubleshoot microcontroller based systems for different applications.


The student will be able to, 1. Interface peripherals to PIC microcontroller. 2. Develop logic for assembly language programming. 3. Understand the principles of working of present day microcontroller systems in various

fields. 3.0 COURSE OUTCOMES:


1. Design a microcontroller based system using PIC microcontroller. 2. Write an assembly language program for different tasks. 3. Select suitable version of PIC microcontroller for given application.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Architecture of PIC Microcontrollers

1a. Compare CISC and RISC architecture.

1b. List RISC features of PIC microcontrollers.

1c. Draw pin diagram of PIC18F. 1d. Describe program memory

organization of PIC18F458. 1e. Describe data memory

organization of PIC18F458. 1f. Explain bank switching in PIC C.

1.1 Architectural features of PIC microcontrollers

1.2 Feature of PIC 18f series microcontrollers

1.3 Pin diagram 1.4 Architecture : W Register,

status register, special function registers

1.5 PIC µC file register 1.6 PIC µC data format &

directives 1.7 Bank Switching in PIC µC

08

Unit-II PIC : Instruction Set and Assembly Language Programming

2a. Explain addressing modes of PIC18Fxx

2b. Describe different instructions of PIC18F458

2c. Write simple assembly language programs for PIC18FXX

2.1 Instruction size of PIC µC

2.2 Addressing Modes

2.3 Instruction set: Data

transfer instructions,

Arithmetic instructions,

logical instructions, Control

instruction using branch &

Call, Bit oriented

12

192



instructions, Table

processing instruction

2.4 Simple programs

Unit III: PIC : I/O and Timer / Counter Programming

3a. Write an assembly language program to generate time delay.

3b. State instructions for I/O port handling

3c. Write a program for I/O bit manipulation.

3d. Write a program for timer / counter programming.

3.1 I/O port Programming 3.2 I/O bit manipulation

Programming 3.3 Timer Programming :

Timer0, Timer1, Timer3 Timer4

3.4 Counter Programming

12

Unit-IV PIC : Serial Port and CCP, ECCP Programming

4a. List major interrupts of PIC18. 4b. Program PIC18 timers using

interrupts. 4c. Write a program for serial

communication using interrupts. 4d. Explain, compare and capture

feature of CCP and ECCP module. 4e. Write a program for compare and

capture features. 4f. Explain PWM in CCP and ECCP

mode. 4g. Describe different network

topologies.

4.1 Interrupt Programming

4.2 Serial Port Programming

4.3 Stand & enhanced CCP

module

4.4 Compare mode

4.5 Capture mode

4.6 ECCP mode Programming

12

Unit-V PIC : External Interfaces I

5a. Draw interfacing circuit and write assembly language program for ADC interfacing DAC interfacing LCD interfacing Keyboard interfacing RTC interfacing.

5.1 A to D converter

interfacing.

5.2 D to A converter

interfacing.

5.3 LCD interfacing

5.4 Keyboard interfacing

5.5 DS 1306 RTC interfacing

10

Unit-VI PIC : External Interfaces II

6a. Draw interfacing circuit and write assembly language program for DC motor interfacing Stepper Motor interfacing Relay interfacing.

6.1 DC motor interfacing

6.2 Stepper motor interfacing

6.3 Relay interfacing

6.4 DC motor with CCP

10

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Architecture of PIC Microcontrollers 04 04 04 12

II Instruction Set & assembly Language Programming

04 02 08 14

III I/O & Timer / counter Programming 06 04 04 14

IV Serial Port & CCP, ECCP Programming 04 02 08 14

V External Interfaces I 02 04 08 14

VI External interfaces II 04 04 04 12

TOTAL 24 20 36 80

193




S.

No. Unit No.



1 II To observe and get acquainted with advanced microcontroller laboratory

02

2 II To write and execute assembly/C language program for Addition & subtraction of 8 bit numbers

02

3 II To write and execute assembly/C language program for Addition & Subtraction of 16 bit numbers

02

4 II To write and execute assembly, C language program for Addition of 2 digit & 4 digit BCD numbers

02

5 II To write and execute assembly/C language program for Multiplication of 8 bit number

02

6 II To write and execute assembly/C language program for Block transfer in forward & reverse direction

02

7 II To write and execute assembly/C language program for Block exchange

02

8 II To write and execute assembly/C language program for Addition of hexadecimal number in an array

02

9 II To write and execute assembly/C language program for Addition of BCD number in an array

02

10 II To write and execute assembly/C language program to Find smallest number in an array

02

11 II To write and execute assembly/C language program to Find largest number in an array

02

12 II To write and execute assembly/C language program to Find positive & negative numbers in an array

02

13 V To write and execute assembly/C language program for DAC interfacing.

02

14 VI To write and execute assembly/C language program for DC motor interfacing.

02

15 VI To write and execute assembly/C language program for stepper motor interfacing.

02

16 VI To write and execute assembly/C language program for interfacing DC motor with CCP

02

TOTAL 32

194


1. Find from internet list of manufacturers who develop PIC microcontroller dev. boards, cost of boards and their specifications

2. Collect list of projects, which can be done by using PIC microcontroller 8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any):

1. Internet videos 2. Visit to a microcontroller dev. Board manufacturing industry 3. Power point presentation


A) Books


1 PIC Microcontroller & embedded systems

Muhammad Ali Mazidi Pearson Education 3rd edition

2 Programming PIC Microcontrollers

Peatmann

Tata McGraw Hill, India Latest edition


1. www.nptel.com 2. www.datasheet.com 3. www.pic.com


1. PIC microcontroller development boards 2. Interfacing circuits 3. SMPS


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H M M

CO2 H H H H H M

CO3 H M H H M M


https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8&sqi=2&ved=0ahUKEwjp0ee53IHNAhWFqY8KHYSmAq8QFggwMAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.instructables.com%2Fid%2FProgramming-PIC-Microcontrollers%2F&usg=AFQjCNFgqgoKkfWxC6c10RkL1w8wU0wb7A&bvm=bv.123325700,d.c2I

https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8&sqi=2&ved=0ahUKEwjp0ee53IHNAhWFqY8KHYSmAq8QFggwMAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.instructables.com%2Fid%2FProgramming-PIC-Microcontrollers%2F&usg=AFQjCNFgqgoKkfWxC6c10RkL1w8wU0wb7A&bvm=bv.123325700,d.c2I

195

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Process Control and SCADA System (PCS) COURSE CODE : 6557 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course is newly introduced in the curriculum as per feedback from industries. This course covers controllers, process characteristics and applications of different control actions in process control. This course consists of fundamental aspects of process control & SCADA. In present global scenario of manufacturing, industries are moving towards more and more automation. Various industries require DAS & SCADA technology; hence it is necessary for electronics engineers to have knowledge of process control & SCADA. This course provides basic functional knowledge of these technologies to develop operational competency.


The student will be able to, 1. Know about process control systems in industry. 2. Understand operation of different types of control modes and advance control actions 3. Understand operation of different controllers 4. Understand operations of SCADA 5. Know the operation of RTU and MTU



1. Identify and describe different process control systems used in industry 2. Explain different control modes and advance control actions 3. Design different electronic controllers using op-amp 4. Identify and explain different elements of DAS, data logger and SCADA 5. State functionality of various elements of SCADA 6. Interpret the functionality of RTU and MTU

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Introduction to Process Control

1a. Define process control 1b. Explain concept of process

control 1c. Classify different types of

process control 1d. Identify process control

elements 1e. List advantages of process

control

1.1 Concept of process control 1.2 Block diagram of process control

system, 1.3 Types of process control

Continuous Process Control Discrete-state Process Control

Composite Process Control 1.4 Identification of process control

elements 1.5 Advantages of process control

08

Unit-II Control

2a. State output equations of PI, PD and PID

2b. Explain operation of

2.1 Control modes Discontinuous modes: ON OFF

controllers: equation, neutral

12

196



Modes

Discontinuous mode control action

2c. Explain operation of continuous mode control action

2d. Explain operation of Composite modes control action

2e. Compare different types control modes

zone

Continuous modes: PROPORTIONAL, INTEGRAL and DERIVATIVE controllers; o/p equations, corresponding Laplace Transforms and their Response, comparison

Composite modes: PI, PD and PID controllers- O/P Equations, their Response and Comparison

Unit-III Controllers and Advance Control Actions

3a. Design and draw different types of Electronic controllers

3b. Explain the operation of advance control action

3c. Compare advance control actions

3.1 Electronic controllers Two position controller, P, PI, PD

and PID using op-amp 3.2 Pneumatic controllers

Two position controller, P, PI, PD, PID using nozzle-flapper

3.3 Advance control Actions Block/schematic diagrams, operation and Examples of Feed forward control-comparison

with feedback control

Cascade control Ratio control Selective control Adaptive control Split range control

3.4 Comparison of above control action

12

Unit-IV Introduction to SCADA

4a. Define DAS 4b. Classification of different

types of DAS 4c. Draw block diagram of

single channel and multichannel DAS

4d. Explain data logger 4e. Define SCADA 4f. Draw and explain Block

diagram of SCADA 4g. List out Advantages,

limitations and Applications of SCADA

4.1 Data acquisition system (DAS): Block diagram and operation of

Single channel DAS Multichannel DAS

4.2 Data logger: Block diagram and operation

4.3 Definition of SCADA 4.4 Block diagram and operation of

SCADA 4.5 Major elements of SCADA 4.6 Application area of SCADA 4.7 Advantages and limitations of SCADA

10

Unit-V Real Time Systems and SCADA Software

5a. Definition of real time control

5b. Explain Communication Access and Master-Slave concept

5c. Describe SCADA software components

5d. Explain FBD technique 5e. Compare centralized and

distributed processing

5.1 Definition and Introduction of real time control

5.2 Real time control for Continuous process

5.3 Communication Access and Master-Slave concept

5.4 Determination of Scan Interval 5.5 SCADA software components 5.6 Concept of FBD technique 5.7 Comparison of centralized and

distributed processing

10

Unit-VI

6a. State the components of RTU

6.1 Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)

Structure of RTU

12

197



SCADA Hardware

6b. Draw structure of RTU 6c. Explain test and

maintenance procedures of RTU

6d. List out requirement of RTU 6e. State the functions of MTU 6f. State components of MTU

CPU Analog I/O Pulse I/P Digital I/Os Communication Interface Power supply

RTU Rack and Enclosure Test and maintenance of RTU Requirements for RTU system

6.2 Master Terminal Unit(MTU)

Hardware structure Functions of MTU Configuration of MTU Redundant MTU system

TOTAL 64

5.0 SPECIFICATION TABLE WITH MARKS (THEORY):

Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Introduction to Process Control 06 04 02 12

II Control Modes 04 04 06 14

III Controllers and Advance Control Actions 04 04 08 16

IV Introduction to SCADA 06 04 02 12

V Real Time Systems and SCADA Software 02 04 06 12

VI SCADA Hardware 04 04 06 14

TOTAL 26 24 30 80





S.

No. Unit No.


Hours

1 I Identify the elements of Process Control System 02

2 II, III Test and verify the operation of ON-OFF control action using op-amp 02

3 II, III Test and verify the operation of proportional control action using op-amp 02

4 II, III Test and verify the operation of proportional-integral control action using op-

amp 04

5 II, III Test and verify the operation of proportional-derivative control action using 04

198

S. No.

Unit No. Practical Exercises

(Outcomes in Psychomotor Domain) Hours

op-amp

6 II.III Test and verify the operation of proportional-integral-derivative control

action using op-amp 04

7 III Test and verify the operation of Pneumatic controllers (any one control

action ) 02

8 III Test and verify the working of cascade control/feedback control 02

9 IV Testing of I/O devices with SCADA system 02

10 IV, V Develop ladder logic and graphics for SCADA applications for boiler control 02

11 IV, V Develop ladder logic and graphics for SCADA applications packing

Systems 02

12 IV, V Develop ladder logic and graphics for SCADA applications materials handling

system 02

13 IV, V, VI Interfacing SCADA with ladder logic 02

TOTAL 32

7.0 SUGGESTED STUDENT ACTIVITIES:

Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Prepare laboratory journal based on practicals performed. 2. Collect the data related to controlling parameters for different process control system and

how they affect the performance of plant. 3. Collect the information regarding different controllers used in industries 4. Analyze the specifications for various types of DCS and SCADA. 5. Make the list of automation systems implemented in the nearby industries. Also collect the

information related to manufacture and their specifications 8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES (If any):

1. Arrange visits to industries based on automation systems. 2. Arrange expert lecture from industry person OR academician on topics: automation, DCS

and SCADA 3. Show videos /power point presentations on different control actions and process control

systems. 4. Assign mini projects to group of students


A) Books


1 Process Control Instrumentation Technology

C. D. Johnson

Prentice Hall of India

2 Computer Based Industrial Control

Krishna Kant Prentice Hall of India

3 Mechatronics M. D. Singh, J. G. Joshi PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

4 Process Control Bela Liptak Chilton Book Company

5 SCADA: supervisory control and data acquisition

Stuart A. Boyer ISA Publication II Edition

6 Practical SCADA for Industry

David Bailey, Edwin Wright Newnes, (an imprint of Elsevier), 2003


1. www.controleng.com 2. www.electrical4u.com/types-of-controllers-proportional-integral-derivati... 3. www.scada.com/

http://www.controleng.com/

http://www.electrical4u.com/types-of-controllers-proportional-integral-derivati

http://www.scada.com/

199

4. www.controlsystemworks.com/ 5. www.automationworld.com/scada/web-based-scada 6. docs.cs-cart.com/4.2.x/core/controllers/index.html 7. http://aboutinstrumentation.blogspot.co.uk/2010/12/dcs.html 8. http://www.instrumentationengineers.org/2012/02/plc-dcs-scada-hmi-for-

beginners.html

C) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications 1 DC Regulated dual Power supply.

1. O/P voltage – 0 to 30 Volt, 2A in 3 range in both channel 2. Display – 3 ½ digit 3. Load regulation – 0.5 V % + 10 mV, no load full load for each channel 4. Line regulation – 0.05 % + 15 mV for +/-, Variation around 230 volt 5. O/P imp – 15 milliohms 6. Ripple – less than 1mV rms 7. I/P supply – 230 V +/- 10 % 50 Hz 8. Both channel tracking mode

2 Function generator 3MHz. 1. Out Put wave form – Sine, Triangle, Square. 2. Frequency range – 0.1 Hz to 3 MHz. 3. Amplitude Range – 30 mV to 30 V P-P. 4. O/P impedance – 50 V. 5. Offset capability. 6. Display – 4 digit LED/ LCD

3 Pulse Generator. 1. Pulse repetition rate – 0.1 Hz to 10 MHz in 8 decade ranges. 2. Rise and fall time – 10 ns - 2 ns 3. Pulse width – 35 ns and 0.1 μsec to 1 sec in y decade range. 4. O/P – 40 mV to 5 V across 50 Ω in six step. 5. Power supply – 230 V +/- 10, 50 Hz.

4 CRO 1. Dual Channel, 4 Trace CRT / TFT based. 2. Bandwidth 20 MHz/30 MHz. 3. X10 magnification 20 nS max sweep rate. 4. Alternate triggering. 5. Component tester. 6. Digital Read out. 7. USB interface. 8. Any other Oscilloscope with additional features are also suitable.

5 Demonstration models/kits 1. DAS TRAINER 2. PLC trainer


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M H H M

CO2 H M H H M

CO3 M H H M

CO4 H M H H M

CO5 H M M M M

CO6 H H H M M


http://www.controlsystemworks.com/

http://www.automationworld.com/scada/web-based-scada

200

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Mobile Communication (MCM) COURSE CODE : 6558 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

The glorious 21st century marks the mobile radio communication industry by orders of magnitude. The recent exponential growth in cellular mobile communication needs more skilled technicians for operation, maintenance & servicing of mobile cellular system. This course is classified under technology group and it is based on communication theory, which gives theoretical as well as practical knowledge of different cellular system. It covers digital cellular mobile system such as GSM, IS – 95 standards, WLL, call processing & basic of mobile communication system


The student will be able to, 1. Understand operation of different mobile communication system. 2. Describe cellular concept such as frequency reuse, hand off available in various mobile

standards. 3. Understand GSM system, CDMA (IS-95), SS7 architecture and call processing in these

systems. 4. Understand 3G, 4G, 4.5G mobile communication system.



1. Analyze the different sections of mobile unit. 2. Locate the faults in mobile unit. 3. Understand different hand-off strategies. 4. Analyze various mobile systems. 5. Explain different wireless technologies.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Wireless Communication System

1a. Need of mobile communication system.

1b. State basic features of AMPS, N AMPS, IS-95, GSM standards.

1c. Define terms used in mobile communication system.

1d. Explain principle of Working of cordless telephone system, cellular telephone system and call processing

1.1 Evolution of mobile radio communications : 2G, 2.5G and 3G wireless system

1.2 Mobile radio system around the world: AMPS, IS 95, GSM N-AMPS Definitions: Base station, Mobile station, Mobile switching center, Control Channel, Forward Channel and Reverse channel

1.3 Cordless telephone system. 1.4 Cellular telephone system, Call

processing in cellular

08

201



telephone system.

Unit-II Mobile Unit

2a. Identify different blocks in mobile unit.

2b. Draw block diagram and explain operation of mobile Unit, frequency synthesizer, transmitter, receiver, Logic and Control unit.

2.1 Mobile Unit: Block diagram and operation of mobile Unit.

2.2 Block Diagram and operation of frequency synthesizer,

2.3 Block Diagram and operation of transmitter, Receiver, Logic Unit and Control unit.

06

Unit-III Digital Cellular Mobile Systems

3a. Draw and explain architecture of basic cellular system.

3b. Enlist different features and specifications of basic cellular system.

3c. Names different multiple Access Technologies for Cellular systems.

3d. Explain Frequency reuse. 3e. Describe Co channel

interference and adjacent channel interference.

3f. State the concept of sectoring.

3g. Uses of repeater in cellular system.

3h. Define micro cell.

3.1 Basic Cellular system. 3.2 Frequency reuse concept 3.3 Multiple Access Technologies

for Cellular systems. 3.4 Hand off strategies: Hard

Hand- OFF, Soft Hand Off, Delayed Hand -OFF, Queued Hand-Off.

3.5 Interference and system capacity: Co channel interference and adjacent channel Interference

3.6 Improving coverage of cellular system: Cell splitting, Sectoring and Repeater for range extension.

3.7 Micro-cell zone concept.

16

Unit-IV Digital Cellular Mobile System (GSM)

4a. State the special features of GSM.

4b. Draw and explain the system architecture of GSM.

4c. State the services perform by GSM.

4d. Describe the security in GSM.

4e. Explain call processing in GSM.

4.1 G.S.M.: Concept of GSM, service and features.

4.2 GSM Architecture. 4.3 GSM Radio subsystem. 4.4 Security Aspects. 4.5 Typical flow sequence in GSM

08

Unit-V CDMA Digital Cellular Mobile System

5a. State performance services of SS-7 and explain its protocol architecture

5b. State features of IS-95 CDMA system.

5c. List the frequency and channel specifications of IS-95.

5d. Draw system architecture of IS-95.

5.1 Signal system no. 7 (SS7) - protocol architecture, performance services.

5.2 CDMA digital cellular standard IS-95, IS-95 frequency and channel specification, IS-95 system architecture, IS-95 CDMA calls processing.

5.3 Features of IS-95.

12

Unit-VI Modern wireless Networks

6a. State the popular 3G wireless system.

6b. Explain the concept of UMTS.

6c. List the vision of IMT 2000.

6d. State the features and

6.1 3G W-CDMA (UMTS) (Universal mobile Telecommunication system): Introduction, Features, Protocol Layers, Features of W-CDMA.

6.2 Wireless local loop: Necessity

14

202



specifications of IMT 2000. 6e. Explain the nature and

feature of 3GW-CDMA. 6f. Draw and explain the

operation of LMDS. 6g. Explain the concept of Ad-

voc network. 6h. Draw and explain

architecture of 4G and MANET.

of wireless equipment, Concept, Features, Operation, advantages and applications.

6.3 LMDS (local multipoint distribution system): Introduction, operation and demerits.

6.4 IMT 2000: Introduction, objectives, features, specifications and architecture.

6.5 Concept of Ad-Voc mobile communication for 4G and 4.5G.

6.6 4G wireless architecture and MANET.

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Wireless Communication System 06 02 -- 08

II Mobile Unit 04 06 -- 10

III Digital Cellular Mobile Systems 04 08 -- 12

IV Digital Cellular Mobile System (GSM) 04 10 -- 14

V CDMA Digital Cellular Mobile System 06 10 -- 16

VI Modern Wireless Networks 06 10 04 20

TOTAL 30 46 04 80





S. No.

Unit No.



1 I Perform installation of mobile phone, registration, activation and authentication of mobile handset.

02

2 II Observe Input / Output signal of different sections of mobile phone unit.

02

203

S. No.

Unit No.



3 II Read the content of SIM card 02

4 II Perform testing procedure of different sections of mobile phone 02

5 III Find out different add-on accessories for cell phones such as battery, charger, hands free data cable, memory card and their interfacing with Handset.

04

6 III Identify different sections and component of mobile unit such as Ringer section, dialer section, receiver section etc.

02

7 III Troubleshooting and testing of mobile handset. Such as Speaker problem, Ringer problem, Mike problem, Vibrator problem, SIM card problem, charging problem, display problem, Dialing/keypad problem, Dead handset, Network problem, water dipped handset

04

8 IV Check network availability manual and auto selection of network using AT commands in mobile.

04

9 IV Observe the process of Call connection and Call release of mobile system

04

10 IV Visit to Telephone exchange office/ Mobile tower. 06

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Industrial visit to BTS site or MSC. 2. Workshop on mobile repair by service technician of any mobile repairing centre. 3. Explore websites to understand repairing of various mobile handsets. 4. Download different specifications of basic cellular system.


1. Show video to demonstrate the working principles, constructional features, testing and understandings of different types of modulations.

2. Arrange a visit to any Radio station. 3. Arrange expert lecture of an industry person in the area of communication. 4. Arrange faulty electronic circuit and provide to students for repairing.(Case Study) 5. Encourage students to build communication circuits.


A) Books


1 Wireless communication principle and Practice

Rapport T.S. PHI Learning, New Delhi, (Latest Edition)

2 Mobile and Personal Communication System and Servicing

Pandya Raj IEEE

3 Mobile Communication Lee C. Y. Pearson, New Delhi (Latest Edition)

4 Mobile Cellular Telecommunication System

Lee C. Y. TMH, New Delhi, (Latest Edition)

5 Wireless communication Dalal Upena OXFORD, New Delhi

6 Advance Mobile Repairing Pandit Sanjib BPB, (Latest Edition)

7 Mobile Communication Schiller PHI Learning, New Delhi, (Latest Edition)

204

B) Software/Learning Websites 1. www.learnerstv.com 2. http://www.nptl.com 3. www.academia.edu


a. Oscilloscope / storage oscilloscope Dual channel 100 MHz

b. Spectrum analyzer Up to 2-3 GHz capture bandwidth

c. GSM Trainer GSM wireless standards

d. CDMA Trainer CDMA standards

e. Mobile Handset Trainer GSM based handset trainer with fault creation and test points

f. Modulation technique Trainer board

On board Modulation/Demodulation (GMSK) for mobile system

g. PN sequence generator training board Generate different PN Data


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M M H H

CO2 H M M H H

CO3 H M

CO4 H M M H H

CO5 H L L H H



205


COURSE : Embedded System (EMS) COURSE CODE : 6559



Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

To understand the facts, concepts, principles and procedures of Embedded System Design 2.0 COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The student will be able to, 1. Compare the advanced microcontrollers. 2. Describe function of embedded systems hardware units like processor, I/O devices, On-

chip and Off-chip device, power supply etc. 3. Interface various devices using ports. 4. Perform software analysis, design, implementation, testing, debugging for embedded

system. 3.0 COURSE OUTCOMES:

The course should be taught and practical should be carried out in such a manner that students are able to acquire different learning outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes.

1. Compare and select appropriate processor or microcontroller for specific embedded application.

2. Select the appropriate hardware configuration for the particular embedded application 3. Realize the concept of embedded system and Design the embedded system. 4. Design software for specific embedded application in embedded C language. 5. Test and troubleshoot the hardware, software using different testing and debugging tools. 6. Realize the basic concept of real time operating system and their uses in embedded

system. 7. Perform software analysis, design, implementation, testing, debugging for embedded

systems. 4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Basics of Embedded System

1a. Define embedded system and categories it

1b. Explain recent trends in embedded system and its specialties

1c. Draw hardware, software architecture of embedded system and explain it.

1.1 Embedded system: Definition, Categories, Overview, Specialties and Recent trends.

1.2 Hardware architecture: CPU, Memory, Clock, timer, I/Os, USART.

1.3 Software Architecture: OS services, Architecture, categories, software application, communication software.

10

Unit-II Communication Protocols

2a. Explain Serial, parallel, wireless protocols

2b. Draw and explain serial communication registers

2.1 Introduction to communication protocol

2.2 Introduction to RS232, pin out 2.3 Serial protocol: I2C, CAN,

10

206




of 8051. 2c. Describe RS232.

Firewire, USB. 2.4 Parallel Protocol: PCI, ARM7

TDMI bus. 2.5 Wireless Protocol: Bluetooth,

IEEE802.11, IRDA.

Unit-III Embedded C

3a. State the concept of Device Driver and explain its types.

3b. State software development tools and draw software development cycle.

3c. Design and interface different interfacing units to 8051 and develop program using embedded C.

3.1 Concept of Device Drivers, types 3.2 Software development tools. 3.3 8051 programming using

embedded C: ADC, DAC, Stepper motor, LCD, Seven segment Display,

3.4 Embedded Application: Digital Camera

12

Unit-IV Operating systems Concepts And RTOS

4a. State the different components of operating system.

4b. Draw architecture of RTOS and explain it.

4c. Explain scheduling algorithms of operating system.

4.1 Components of OS: Tasks, Task states, task and data, semaphore and shared data, message Queues, mail boxes, pipes, events, Concept of Starvation, Deadlock, Multitasking.

4.2 Scheduling Algorithms. 4.3 Introduction to RTOS: Concept of

RTOS, RTOS Architecture, Requirement, Need, Specification of RTOS in Embedded systems.

4.4 RTOS Application: Underground Tank Monitoring system.

12

Unit-V ARM 7 Architecture

5a. Draw architecture, block diagram, functional diagram of ARM 7TDMI and explain it.

5b. Explain programmer’s model and operating modes of ARM7.

5c. State the different group of instructions of ARM 7.

5.1 Architecture: Introduction ARM7TDMI core, Block diagram, functional diagram.

5.2 Programmers model. 5.3 Various operating modes of

ARM7. 5.4 Instruction set: Data processing

instructions, Arithmetic and Logical instruction, Branching, Load and Store.

14

Unit-VI Interfacing and programming with ARM 7

6a. Write assembly language programs for ARM7

6b. Design Embedded C language programs for LED and relay.

6.1 Assembly programming of ARM7 16/32 bit addition, 16/32-bit subtraction, 32 bit- Multiplication. Find 1’s complement.

6.2 Programming and interfacing of LEDs, Relay with ARM (embedded C).

06

TOTAL 64

207


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Basics of Embedded System 06 08 -- 14

II Communication Protocols 02 10 -- 12

III Embedded C 04 04 08 16

IV Operating systems Concepts And RTOS 04 12 -- 16

V ARM 7 Architecture 04 06 04 14

VI Interfacing and programming with ARM 7 -- 04 04 08

TOTAL 20 44 16 80





S.

No. Unit No.



1 III Development of embedded C language program to find largest and smallest number from the array using Keil.

02

2 III Development and execution of the programme to Display digits (0 to 9) on seven segment display using 8051

02

3 III Development and execution of the programme to rotate stepper motor in forward and reverse direction using 8051.

04

4 III Development and execution of the programme to Display” GP NASHIK “message on LCD (16 X 2) using 8051.

02

5 III Develop and execute an embedded c program to generate Square Wave at DAC output using 8051.

02

6 IV Case study on Real time embedded application Underground Tank Monitoring system.

02

7 VI Develop and execute Assembly language program of 16/32 bit addition for ARM7.

04

8 VI Develop and execute Assembly language program of 16/32 bit subtraction for ARM7.

04

9 VI Develop and execute Assembly language program of 32 bit Multiplication for ARM7.

04

10 VI Develop and execute Assembly language program to find 1’s complement of a number for ARM7.

02

11 VI Interface 8 LED to ARM7TDMI and develop embedded C language program to blink the LED’s.

02

12 VI Interface Relay with ARM7 and develop program in embedded C language.

02

TOTAL 32

208


1. Prepare journals based on practical performed in embedded system design laboratory. 2. Prepare chart showing all instructions of ARM7. 3. Case Study based on embedded applications. 4. Develop mini projects.


1. Lecture method. 2. Show video/animation film to demonstrate the software and hardware design in

embedded system. 3. Arrange a visit to any embedded system industry. 4. Arrange expert lecture of any industry person or any Academics person in the area of

RTOS, ARM and Embedded design. 9.0 LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) Books

Sr.No. Title of Book Author Publication with Year

1 Embedded System Design Frank Vahid John Willy 2002

2 Programming embedded system in C and C++

Michal Barr Oreilly 1999, ISBN=1565923545

3 The 8051 microcontroller and Embedded System

Muhammad Ali Mazidi

Pearson 2008, Second Edition ISBN 978-81-317-1026-5

4 Embedded Real Time System Concepts, design and Programming

V. K. Prasad Dreamtech 2013 ISBN 978-81-7722-461-0

5 Embedded Real Time Systems Programming

Sriram V. Iyer, Gupta

Tata McGraw Hill, Education 2003 ISBN-9780071331128

6 Embedded System Raj Kamal Tata McGraw Hill, Education 2012 ISBN-10-0-07-066764-0

7 An Embedded Software Primer David Simon Pearson 2003 ISBN=8177581546

8 Embedded System Design Steve Heath Elsevier, 2002 second edition ISBN-0750655461

9 ARM System Developer's Guide

Sloss Esleiver 2004 ISBN-1558608745

10 Arm System-On-Chip Architecture Steve Furber Pearson 2009 ISBN-978831708408

11 ARM Architecture Reference Manual

Jaggar, Dave Prentice Hall. 1996 pp. 6– ISBN 978-0-13-736299-8


1. www.arm.com 2. www.Keil.com 3. www.infocenter.arm.com 4. www.embedded.com.

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Standard_Book_Number

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:BookSources/978-0-13-736299-8

http://www.arm.com/

http://www.kiel.com/

http://www.infocenter.arm.com/

http://www.embedded.com/

209


Sr. No.

Name of Equipments/ Instruments Broad Specifications

1 8051 development board Having on board interfacing of all basic peripherals.

2 ARM 7 development board Having on board interfacing of all basic peripherals.

3 Keil Simulator (Web version)


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H

CO2 H

CO3 H M

CO4 H

CO5 L H L

CO6 H L

CO7 L M H


210

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Mechatronics: Components and Systems (MCS) COURSE CODE : 6560 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

This course is newly introduced in a curriculum as per feedback from industries. This course deals with computer integrated electro mechanical systems such as NC, CNC, DNC, MEMS and ROBOTS. Students will be able to select sensors, actuators and to develop advanced functionalities for the design of electro-mechanical systems.


The student will be able to, 1. Know the elements of Mechatronics systems. 2. Understand the significance of sensors used in Mechatronics. 3. Understand the different types of actuators used in Mechatronics. 4. Understand the working principle of CNC machines 5. Understand the fundamentals of Robotics and micro electro-mechanical systems



1. Identify different Mechatronic systems and their elements. 2. Interpret functionality of different sensors and actuators. 3. Identify different parts and components of robot. 4. Explain working of CNC machine 5. Describe working of micro sensor and micro actuator of MEMS

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Elements of Mechatronic System

1a. State importance of Mechatronics

1b. Draw block diagram of Mechatronic system

1c. Explain elements of Mechatronics system

1d. List advantages and disadvantages of Mechatronic.

1.1 Importance of Mechatronics in various fields of engineering

1.2 Evolution of Mechatronics

1.3 Block diagram of Mechatronic systems and identification of elements (Sensors, signal conditioners, controllers and Actuators)

08

1.4 Advantages and disadvantages of Mechatronics systems

1.5 Applications of Mechatronics

Unit II

2a. Compare transducer and sensors

2.1 Comparison between transducers and sensors

12

Sensors in Mechatronics Systems

2b. Classify different types of sensors

2c. Explain operating principle

2.2 Proximity and position Sensors: construction, principle of operation and applications

211



of Proximity and position Sensors

2d. Explain operating principle of Electromagnetic transducers

2e. Explain operating principle of Motion Sensors

2f. Explain operating principle of acceleration sensors

2g. Explain operating principle of torque sensors

Photo electric sensors Hall effect sensors eddy current proximity sensors

2.3 Velocity Sensors: construction, principle of operation and applications Electromagnetic transducers

2.4 Motion Sensors: construction, principle of operation and applications Stroboscope Pyroelectric Sensors

2.4 Acceleration sensors: construction, principle of operation and applications Strain gauge accelerometer Piezo-electric accelerometer

LVDT accelerometer 2.5 Torque sensors : construction,

principle of operation and applications

Torque measurement using strain gauge

Torque measurement using torsion bar, optical method and capacitive method

Unit-III Actuators in Mechatronics Systems

3a. Define actuators 3b. Classify different types of

actuators 3c. List and explain different

types of mechanical and electrical actuators.

3.1 Definition of actuators

3.2 Classification of actuators

3.3 Types actuators : Working principle and operation of-

Limit switches proximity switches magnetic reed switches Solenoid valves direction Control valves (Poppet

valve, spool valve)

Relays Cams Gears Belts Rack and Pinion and Bearings

single acting and double acting cylinders

Rotary actuators (rotating vane, gear type)

12

Unit-IV CNC Systems

4a. Differentiate between CAM, NC, CNC and DNC

4b. Draw block diagram of CNC machines

4c. Classify CNC machines 4d. Explain different modes of

CNC machine 4e. List out selection criteria of

4.1 Computer aided manufacturing(CAM) Numerical control(NC) Computer numerical control machine(CNC) and Direct numerical control DNC

4.2 Comparison between NC, CNC and DNC

4.3 Block diagram of CNC machine.

10

212



CNC machine

4.4 Classifications of CNC Machine 4.5 Modes of operation of CNC 4.6 Selection criteria of CNC machine. 4.7 Advantages and disadvantages of

CNC machines

Unit-V Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS)

5a. Define MEMS 5b. Draw Block diagram of

MEMS 5c. Explain MEMS micro sensor

and micro actuators 5d. List Advantages and

Applications of MEMS

5.1 Introduction of MEMS 5.2 Block diagram of MEMS 5.3 MEMS micro-sensor 5.4 MEMS micro-actuators 5.5 Advantages of MEMS 5.6 Applications of MEMS

10

Unit-VI Robotics

6a. Define robot 6b. State necessity of robotics 6c. Draw Block diagram of

robot 6d. Define terms related to

robotics 6e. Explain different types of

robots 6f. List out selection

parameters of robots 6g. List applications of robots

6.1 Definition of Robot 6.2 Necessity of robotics 6.3 Block diagram of robot 6.4 Definitions related to robotics

Work envelop Degree of freedom End effectors Manipulators

6.5 Types of robots : Cartesian, Spherical and Cylindrical

6.6 Selection parameters of robot. 6.7 Applications of robots

12

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level

U Level

A and above Levels

Total Marks

I Elements of Mechatronic System 06 04 02 12

II Sensors in Mechatronics Systems 04 06 04 14

III Actuators in Mechatronics Systems 04 06 04 14

IV CNC systems 04 04 06 14

V Micro Electro-mechanical Systems (MEMS) 04 04 04 12

VI Robotics 04 04 06 14

TOTAL 26 28 26 80




Note: Here only outcomes in psychomotor domain are listed as practical/exercises. However, if these practical/exercises are completed appropriately, they would also lead to development of Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes in affective domain as given in a common list at the beginning of curriculum document for this programme. Faculty should refer to that

213

common list and should ensure that students also acquire those Programme Outcomes/Course Outcomes related to affective domain.

S.

No. Unit No.


Hours

1 I Demonstrate any one application of Mechatronics 02

2 II Test and verify the operation of Photo electric sensors 02

3 III Demonstrate the operation of linear, equal percentage and quick opening control valve.

02

4 II Measurement of speed using stroboscope 02

5 III Measurement of torque using torsion bar 02

6 III Demonstrate the operation of single acting and double acting cylinder 02

7 IV Demonstration of operating modes and constructional feature of CNC operation(any one application)

02

8 III Demonstrate the operation of Relays 02

9 III Demonstrate the operation of Solenoid valves 02

10 III Demonstrate the operation of Cams 02

11 III Demonstrate the operation of Gears 02

12 III Demonstrate the operation of Belts 02

13 VI Configure the working of robots 02

14 VI Use the robot end effecters 02

15 VI Use the different types of sensor in robotics. 02

16 VI Use robot trainer to perform different tasks 02

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Collect the information of different Mechatronic systems used in day-to-day life. 2. Prepare the charts of different types of sensors and actuators. 3. Collect the specifications of CNC machines of different manufacturers. 4. Collect the information of manufacturing processes of MEMS. 5. Identify the different types of robots used in industries.


1. Arrange industrial visit 2. Expert lecture from industrial OR academician 3. Show videos /power point presentation from renowned experts in the area of

Mechatronics, sensors used in Mechatronics, MEMS and Robotics 9.0 LEARNING RESOURCES:

A) Books


1 Mechatronics - Integrated Mechanical electronic systems

K. P. Ramachandran, G. K. Vijayaraghavan, M. S. Balasundaram

Wiley-India

2 Mechatronics M. D. Singh and J. G. Joshi

PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi

3 Mechatronics : Principles, Concepts and Applications

Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik


4 Mechatronics W. Bolton Pearson

5 CNC Machines Pabla, B.S. and Adithan M New Age International,

214


New Delhi, 2014

6 Robotics for Engineers Koren Yoram McGraw-Hill Education, New Delhi, 1st Edition

7 Robotics Fu K. S., Gonzalez R C., Lee C S G

McGraw -Hill Education, New Delhi Pvt. Ltd


1. www.mems-exchange.org/ 2. www.allaboutmems.com 3. http://mechatronic.me/1-what-is-mechatronics 4. http://www.cnccookbook.com/CCCNCMachine.htm 5. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/32 6. http://www.kuka-robotics.com/india/en/ 7. http://www.parirobotics.com/


1 DC Regulated dual Power supply. 1. O/P voltage – 0 to 30 Volt, 2A in 3 range in both channel 2. Display – 3 ½ digit, 3. Load regulation – 0.5 V % + 10mV, no load full load for each channel 4. Line regulation – 0.05 % + 15 mV for +/-, Variation around 230 volt 5. O/P imp – 15 milliohm, 6. Ripple – less than 1mV rms. 7. I/P supply – 230 V +/- 10 % 50 Hz. 8. Both channel tracking mode

2 Function generator 3MHz. 1. Out Put wave form – Sine, Triangle, Square. 2. Frequency range – 0.1 Hz to 3 MHz. 3. Amplitude Range – 30mV to 30 Volt P- P, 4. O/P impedance – 50 V. 5. Offset capability, 6. Display – 4 digit LED/ LCD

3 Pulse Generator. 1. Pulse repetition rate – 0.1 Hz to 10 MHz in 8 decade ranges. 2. Rise and fall time – 10 ns - 2 ns 3. Pulse width – 35 ns and 0.1 μsec to 1 sec in y decade range 4. O/P – 40 mV to 5 V across 50 Ω in six step, 5. Power supply – 230 V +/- 10 % 50 Hz.

4 CRO 1. Dual Channel, 4 Trace CRT / TFT based 2. Bandwidth 20 MHz/30 MHz 3. X10 magnification 20 ns max sweep rate 4. Alternate triggering 5. Component tester 6. Digital Read out 7. USB interface 8. Any other Oscilloscope with additional features are also suitable

5 Demonstration kit 1. Demonstration kit of Photo electric sensors 2. Demonstration kit of control valve 3. Stroboscope 4. Torsion bar 5. Demonstration kit of single acting and double acting cylinder 6. Demonstration model of CNC

http://www.mems-exchange.org/

http://www.allaboutmems.com/

http://mechatronic.me/1-what-is-mechatronics

http://www.cnccookbook.com/CCCNCMachine.htm

http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/32

http://www.kuka-robotics.com/india/en/

http://www.parirobotics.com/

215

7. Demonstration kit of Relays 8. Demonstration kit of Solenoid valves 9. Demonstration kit of Cams 10. Demonstration kit of Gears 11. Demonstration kit of Belts 12. Demonstration model of robot trainer


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H M M

CO2 H H H M M

CO3 H H H H M

CO4 H M M L

CO5 H M H H M M


216

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Antenna and Microwaves (AMW) COURSE CODE : 6561



Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE: This course imparts knowledge of microwave transmission and reception, latest microwave technology and different antenna types and their applications.


1. Understand concepts and applications of microwave and optical spectrum. 2. Understand construction and working of microwave components and devices. 3. Know the antenna structure, terminology, practical antennas, microwave fundamentals

and devices. 4. Identify mobile network antennas.

3.0 COURSE OUTCOMES: The course content should be taught and learning imparted in such a manner that students are able to acquire required learning outcome in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes: 1. Select the antennas for different applications. 2. Prepare the specifications for DTH systems. 3. Explain with sketch different smart antennas. 4. List the applications of microwave devices.

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Basic Electromagnetic Theory

1a. Describe properties of electromagnetic waves.

1b. Explain the basic concepts of electromagnetic wave theory.

1c. Describe the basic radiating antennas.

1d. For the given application choose the relevant radiator

1.1 Physical concept of generation of EM Wave.

1.2 Static electric and magnetic field of steady electric current.

1.3 Electromagnetic field and its radiation from a center fed dipole.

1.4 Elementary radiator 1.5 Hertzian dipole; Half-wave dipole,

Power radiated by elementary dipole using Poynting Vector method

08

Unit-II Antenna Terminologies

2a. Distinguish between antenna and aerial.

2b. Calculate the basic antenna parameters using standard formulae.

2c. Identify antenna specifications

2.1 Basic parameters: Aerial and antenna, Antenna Impedance, Radiation Resistance, Radiation Pattern, Beam area and beam efficiency, Isotropic radiator gain, directivity and Gain, radiation intensity, half power BW, polarization, antenna losses, antenna efficiency, effective aperture, effective length of antenna, effects of antenna height, front to back ratio, antenna field zones

08

217



Unit-III Basic Antennas and Arrays.

3a. Select antennas and antenna arrays as per their operating frequency ranges and radiation pattern for the specific applications

3.1 Radiation characteristics of wire antennas: Resonant wire antennas (λ, 2λ), Non-resonant (Rhombic) Antenna

3.2 Loop antenna 3.3 Folded dipole 3.4 Antenna Arrays: Uniform linear

array, Broad side array, End fire array

3.5 Yagi-Uda antenna

16

Unit-IV Antennas for Special applications

4a. Classify antennas used in VHF/ UHF band

4b. Identify mobile network antennas

4c. Explain the concept of Smart Antennas and its applications

4d. Prepare the specifications for the required indoor or outdoor DTH systems

4.1 VHF/UHF antennas: Helical antenna, parabolic reflector antenna, Horn antenna, Turnstile, super turnstile antenna and Log Periodic.

4.2 Micro strip patch antenna 4.3 Terrestrial mobile communication

antennas: Base station antennas, Mobile station antennas

4.4 Smart antennas: Need and applications

4.5 DTH receiver system: outdoor unit, antenna system and indoor unit

08

Unit-V Wave Guide

5a. Need of microwave communication system.

5b. Define TEM/TE/TM/HE, cut off frequency of a waveguide, guide wave length, phase velocity, group velocity.

5c. Draw and explain dominant mode in rectangular waveguide.

5d. Explain the propagation of wave in rectangular waveguide.

5e. Compare waveguide and two-wire transmission line.

5.1 Microwave Region and Band Designations.

5.2 Introduction to TEM/TE/TM/HE wave.

5.3 Comparison of wave guide with two wire transmission line.

5.4 Propagation of waves in rectangular wave guide only. ( Introduction to wave guide only)

5.5 TE and TM Modes in rectangular wave guide with field pattern. Concept of dominant mode.

5.6 Definition and interpretation of cut off frequency of a waveguide, guide wave length, phase velocity, group velocity. (Simple Numerical)

10

Unit-VI Microwave Components and Devices

6a. State principle and draw construction of multi cavity (two cavities) klystron, Reflex Klystron amplifier, Travelling wave tube, Magnetron.

6b. Draw the construction and working of PIN, IMPATT, Tunnel and Gunn diode.

6c. Explain bends and corners, Twists.

6d. Draw and explain working of H- plane TEE, E-Plane TEE, E-H Plane TEE, Multi-hole directional

6.1 Construction, working Principles and Applications of: Multicavity (Two cavities) klystron amplifier, Reflex Klystron amplifier, Travelling wave tube, Magnetron.

6.2 Construction and working principle and Applications of microwave Diodes: PIN, IMPATT, Tunnel and Gunn.

6.3 Working principle of Parametric amplifier

6.4 Construction, Working principle and applications of H- plane TEE, E-Plane TEE, E-H Plane TEE, Multi-hole directional coupler, wave guide,

14

218



coupler, wave guide, circular, Isolator.

bends, corners, Twists, circular, Isolator.

TOTAL 64


Unit No.

Unit Title R Level

U Level

A Level

Total Marks

I Basic Electromagnetic Theory 06 04 -- 10

II Antenna Terminologies 06 06 -- 12

III Basic Antennas and Arrays 04 06 02 12

IV Antennas for Special Applications 04 08 02 14

V Waveguide 06 08 -- 14

VI Microwave Components and Devices 06 10 02 18

TOTAL 32 42 06 80





S.

No. Unit No.



1 III Check the radiation pattern of half wave dipole and find HPBW. 02

2 III Check radiation pattern of loop antenna. 02

3 III Check radiation pattern of folded dipole antenna. 02

4 III Fabricate the demonstrative physical model of Yagi–Uda antenna with at least 3 radiator and one reflector.

02

5 III Test the performance of the Yagi–Uda antenna. 02

6 III Test the performance of the broad side array. 02

7 III Test the performance of the end fire array antenna. 02

8 IV Test the performance of helical antenna in horizontal and vertical planes.

02

9 IV Check the radiation pattern of parabolic reflector antenna. 02

10 IV Test the performance of horn antenna. 02

11 IV Select the relevant Mobile Antenna System for a particular area. 02

12 IV Install and commission DTH receiver systems. 04

13 VI Assemble Microwave Test Bench and five major Microwave components.

02

14 IV Visit to GMRT, Khodad. 04

TOTAL 32

219


1. Industrial visit to BTS site or MSC. 2. Workshop on mobile repair by service technician of any mobile repairing centre. 3. Explore websites to understand repairing of various mobile handsets. 4. Download different specifications of basic cellular system.


1. Show video to demonstrate the working principles, constructional features, testing and understandings of different types of antennas and microwave devices.

2. Arrange a visit to any Radio station. 3. Arrange expert lecture of an industry person in the area of antenna and microwave

communication. 4. Encourage students to learn different antennas for various applications.


A) Books


1 Antennas and Wave Propagation

Kraus John D, Marhefka Ronald J. and Khan Ahmad S.

Tata McGraw-Hill Education, Fourth Edition, or latest


Prasad, K.D. and Handa, Deepak

Satya Prakashan, New Delhi, 3rd edition or latest


Raju, G. S. N. Pearson Education India, 3rd edition or latest

4 Antenna and Wave propagation

Das, Sisir and Das K. Annapurna

Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2013

5 Antenna and Wave propagations

Harish, A. R. And Sachidananda M.

Oxford University Press, 4th Edition or latest

6 Microwave Devices and Circuits

Liao Samuel Y. PHI Learning, New Delhi, (Latest edition)


1. http://www.rfmw.org/transmission_lines_and_distributed_systems_transmission_lines_transmission _lines.html

2. http://www.rfmw.org/transmission_lines_and_distributed_systems_transmission_lines_transmission _lines_video_lectures.html

3. www.nptel.ac.in 4. www.cst.com 5. http://www.antennamagus.com/ 6. http://www.antennamagus.com/antennas.php?page=antennas 7. http://emcos.com/Antenna-Simulation-and-Optimization 8. http://www.apparentlyapparel.com/uploads/5/3/5/6/5356442/practical_antenna_handboo

k_fourth_edition_carr.pdf




http://www.cst.com/

http://www.antennamagus.com/

http://www.antennamagus.com/antennas.php?page=antennas

http://emcos.com/Antenna-Simulation-and-Optimization

http://www.apparentlyapparel.com/uploads/5/3/5/6/5356442/practical_antenna_han

220


1. Experimental antenna trainer kit (preferred with software simulator)

2. Spectrum analyser 30 MHz

3. Standard DTH receiver system.

4. Antenna synthesis simulation demonstrative software

5. Gunn / klystron power supply ‘X’ band

6. VSWR meter Resonated at 01 kHz

7. Microwave bench( Gunn / klystron) ‘X’ band component

8. Microwave accessories BNC to BNC cables, Main Chords.

9. Microwave components ‘X’ band


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H H H M M

CO2 H H H M M

CO3 H M M M M

CO4 H H H M M


221

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : VLSI Techniques (VLT) COURSE CODE : 6562 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Hrs / week Credits

TH Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

The influence of integrated-circuit technology in the past few years on our society has been pervasive, in area ranging from consumer products to business management to Manufacturing control. The driving force behind this pervasiveness is that the functional Capability of modern integrated circuitry has increased in scope and complexity exponentially with time over the past 20 years. The designers of modern integrated Circuitry have continually endeavored to provide more computational speed with less dissipated electrical power and less circuit board area, while maintaining a low failure rate and an aggressive cost. The complexity and speed is finding ready application for VLSI systems in digital processing. Although silicon MOS-based circuitry will meet most requirements in such systems. The student can acquire knowledge in the design skill of Combinational and sequential circuit with the help of VHDL and CMOS Logic circuit Processing operation, student can use this knowledge as technician, supervisor and Programmer in different sections of industry.


The student will be able to, 1. Understand structure of VHDL language 2. Write VHDL program for combinational and sequential circuits. 3. Understand internal structure of CPLD and FPGA. 4. Develop Mealey and Moore machines using k-map. 5. Understand CMOS IC fabrication process. 6. Implement circuits using CMOS technology.



1. Write synthesis and test VHDL program for combinational and sequential circuits. 2. Select appropriate CPLD or FPGA for an application. 3. Design a Mealy or Moore machine using k-map and VHDL. 4. Develop small CMOS circuit using equations. 5. Develop small IC circuit for an application.

222

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:




Unit-I Hardware Descriptive Language

1a. Write syntax of library, entity, architecture.

1b. Know different program modelling style.

1c. Differentiate between signal and variable.

1d. Explain combinational and sequential statements.

1.1 Introduction to VLSI, VLSI design flow. 1.2 Features of VHDL –Library, Entity,

types of architecture-Data flow, structural and behavioral modelling.

08

1.3 Different types of statements- Concurrent – When statement, With. Select statement. Generate statement.

1.4 Different types of statements- Sequential- Process, Signal assignment verses variable assignment, constant, IF, CASE, LOOP, ASSERT and WAIT statements.

Unit-II Subprogram and Packages

2a. Explain various VHDL data types.

2b. Explain Component declaration.

2c. Explain functions and procedures.

2d. Use packages for programming.

2e. Understand different attributes and their uses.

2f. Explain configuration.

2.1 VHDL Data types and operators. 2.2 Component Declaration with example. 2.3 Functions with example. 2.4 Procedure with example. 2.5 Packages with example. 2.6 Attributes types. 2.7 Concept of Configuration.

12

Unit-III VHDL Programming.

3a. Write VHDL program for combinational circuit.

3b. Write VHDL program for sequential circuit.

3c. Explain different types of test bench.

3d. Write VHDL test bench for a circuit.

3.1 VHDL Program for combinational circuits – Gates, Multiplexer, Adder, Subtractor Encoder, Decoder, Demultiplexer. 4-bit ALU (simple)

3.2 VHDL Program for Sequential circuits – D, T and JK Flip-flop, UP/DOWN counter, MOD-counter, Shift registers.

3.3 Test Bench – Types, simple test bench for combinational circuit (Full Adder) and sequential logic circuit (UP/DOWN counter.)

12

Unit-IV Finite State Machine.

4a. Differentiate between Mealey and Moore machines.

4b. Design finite state machine from sequence detector and counter.

4c. Implement FSM using VHDL.

4d. Explain architecture of CPLD

4e. Explain architecture of FPGA.

4.1 Moore and Mealey Machines. 4.2 State diagram, encoding, reduction

techniques. Design example (sequence detector and counter) of FSM using Mealy and Moore machine.

4.3 VHDL programming of Finite State Machines.

4.4 General architecture of PLA, PAL, CPLD and FPGA

4.5 Study of architecture of Xilinx CPLD. (Cool Runner)

4.6 Study of architecture of Xilinx FPGA. (Spartan-3)

12

Unit-V Backend

5a. Classify IC technology. 5b. Draw and explain

MOSFET construction.

5.1 Classification of IC technology- SSI, MSI, LSI, VLSI, ULSI, GSI.

5.2 MOSFET Construction, Working and

12

223




VLSI

5c. Define Threshold voltage, Pinch-off voltage.

5d. Compare scaling types. 5e. Explain short channel

effects. 5f. Explain IC fabrications

steps. 5g. Understand concept of

Latch-up in CMOS.

types, Threshold Voltage, Pinch-off Voltage, Body Effect,

5.3 Principle of MOSFET scaling, types of Scaling- constant voltage and constant field scaling.

5.4 Short Channel effects- Channel Length modulation, hot electron effect.

5.5 IC fabrication steps- oxidation, diffusion, Ion Implantation, Metallization, Photolithography in MOSFET, N-well, P-well and Twin Tube Methods.

5.6 Latch-up in CMOS and its prevention.

Unit-VI NMOS and CMOS Technology

6a. Explain NMOS inverter with passive and active load.

6b. Explain CMOS inverter with Voltage transfer curve.

6c. Draw CMOS circuit for NOR, NAND and 3-variable equation.

6d. Implement Ex-OR and 2:1 Multiplexer using transmission gate.

6e. Draw stick diagram for CMOS NOT, NAND and NOR gate.

6.1 MOSFET inverter- NMOS Inverter with resistive load and NMOS Inverter with active load.

6.2 CMOS Inverter, Voltage transfer curve. Noise Margin

6.3 CMOS NOR and NAND gate with operation.

6.4 Realization of Boolean Equation using CMOS. (3-variable)

6.5 Transmission Gates, Implementation of EX-OR and 2:1 Multiplexer using Transmission Gates (TG)

6.6 Layout design rules, simple stick diagram for CMOS NOT, NAND and NOR gate. Layout of CMOS NOT gate.

08

TOTAL 64


Unit No.


R Level U Level A Level Total Marks

I Hardware Descriptive Language 04 06 02 12

II Subprogram and Packages 04 04 04 12

III VHDL Programming. 00 00 16 16

IV Finite State Machine 04 04 04 12

V Backend VLSI 04 06 04 14

VI NMOS and CMOS Technology 02 04 08 14

TOTAL 18 24 38 80




224


S.

No. Unit No.



1 I Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test basic logic gates. 02

2 III Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for 8: 1 multiplexer using VHDL.

02

3 III Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for 2: 4 decoders using VHDL.

02

4 III Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for half adder and Full Adder (using structural modeling)

02

5 III Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for 8: 3 encoders. 02

6 III Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for 4-bit comparator. 02

7 III Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for simple 4-bit ALU. 02

8 III Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for D and T-flip-flop. 02

9 III Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for 4-bit up-down counter.

02

10 III Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for 4-bit Shift register. 02

11 III Write Test-bench for 4-bit up-down counter and verify results. 02

12 IV Write VHDL code, synthesis, simulate and test for State diagram using VHDL.

02

13 IV Study of Xilinx Spartan-3 FPGA. 02

14 IV Write VHDL code and download on FPGA kit to interface and blink LEDs. 02

15 IV Write VHDL code and download on FPGA kit to interface and to generate Waveforms using DAC.

02

16 VI Design and simulate layout for CMOS NOT gate. 02

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like 1. Prepare a chart of architecture of FPGA / CPLD 2. Prepare a chart showing simple CMOS circuits. 3. Download information regarding current FPGA / CPLD available in market. 4. Download animation explaining MOSFET fabrication process. 5. Develop simple project like – Traffic light system, Lift controller etc.


1. Show video/animation film to demonstrate the working of FPGA/CPLD 2. Arrange expert lecture of a person in the area of VLSI design. 3. Show video/animation film to demonstrate the working of MOSFET and its fabrications

steps.

225


A) Books


1 VHDL Primer J. Bhaskar Prentice Hall of India.

2 VHDL programming by example Douglas Perry McGraw Hill, 4th Edition

3 Xilinx Xilinx Manual www.xilinx.com

4 CMOS Digital Integrated circuits. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici

Tata McGraw Hill Edition

5 Neil H. E. Weste Kamran Eshraghian

Principles of CMOS VLSI design

Pearson Education.

6 Douglas A. Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian

Basic VLSI Design Prentice Hall of India


1. http://www.asic-world.com/vhdl/index.html 2. www.nptel.ac.in


1. Xilinx ISE Design Suit (Web version) 2. FPGA / CPLD Trainer Kit. 3. Computer system (Latest version) 4. Peripheral interface kits 5. Microwind Layout Editor Tool. (Web version)


Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 L H

CO2 M

CO3 M H

CO4 L L M H

CO5 L L M H


http://www.asic-world.com/vhdl/index.html


226

PROGRAMME : Diploma Programme in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (EL) COURSE : Industrial Automation (IAM) COURSE CODE : 6563 TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME:


Credits TH

Paper Hrs.

Marks


04 -- 02 06 03 Max. 80 20 100 -- 25 25 150

Min. 32 -- 40 -- 10 10 --

1.0 RATIONALE:

The aim of this course is to introduce students with present Industrial Automation scenario in India. The broad knowledge of essential component of present industrial Automation Industry such as Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Distributed Control System (DCS).This course will explore automation system used in industries, DCS & PLC: its operation, usage, Instructions, hardware selection and configuration, applications, introductory programming examples and exercises and some troubleshooting hints of PLC system. Thus, this course is very important for students who want to use their knowledge of electronic engineering for working in industrial automation sector.


The student will be able to, 1. Know the advanced automation system used in industrial as well as domestic level. 2. Understand different parts of PLC 3. Select PLC hardware configuration for given application. 4. Know the application of PLC Prepare a ladder logic Program for a given applications 5. Know the programming of PLC 6. Understand the system architecture & working of DCS



1. Explain working of various building blocks of basic automation system. 2. Describe the functionality & connect different hardware used in PLC. 3. State & use different types of instructions for PLC programming. 4. Develop ladder diagrams for PLC programming for given applications 5. Design PLC based automation system applications 6. Describe the operation of different blocks of DCS

4.0 COURSE DETAILS:



Unit-I Basics of Automation

1a. Define automation system 1b. State different tools for

automations 1c. Explain Automation

system structure 1d. Describe Human

interference subsystem

1.1 Automation – Definition, Need, Benefits, Different tools for automation, Automation system structure, Instrumentation subsystem Control subsystem

10

1.2 Human Interface subsystem 1.3 Operator Panel

Construction of the panel Interfacing with control

subsystem 1.4 Types of mimic panels

227



1.5 Advance Human Interface System

Intelligent Operator Panel Operator Station Data logging station

Unit-II PLC Hardware

2a. Explain discrete input & output module

2b. Draw the block diagram & wiring diagram of AC, DC, analog discrete input & output module

2c. State the specification for discrete I/O module

2d. State the selection criteria for I/O module

2.1 Discrete input modules:

AC input modules - block diagram, description, typical wiring details and specifications.

DC input modules - block diagram, description, typical wiring details, sinking and sourcing concept & specifications.

Analog input modules- block diagram, description, typical interfacing of input devices & specifications.

2.2 Discrete output modules:

AC output modules - block diagram, description, typical wiring and specifications.

DC output modules - block diagram, description, typical wiring details, sinking and sourcing connections & specifications. Relay and Isolated o/p modules. (Only description)

Analog output modules- block diagram, description, typical wiring details & specifications.

2.3 I/O module, selection criterion

10

Unit-III I/O Addressing of PLC

3a. Explain and use relay, Timer, Counter, Comparison, Data handling, Logical, arithmetic instructions

3b. Describe how different simple Timer, Counter, Comparison, Data handling, Logical, arithmetic operations can be performed by PLC.

3c. Describe PLC sequencer functions

3d. Explain subroutine for PLC 3e. Describe PID functions.

3.1 Relay type instructions - NO, NC, One shot, Latch and Unlatch.

3.2 Timer instructions - On delay timer, off delay timer, Retentive timer and Timer reset.

3.3 Counter instructions - up counter, down counter, high speed counter, counter reset.

3.4 Comparison instructions – Equal, Not equal, Greater, Greater than equal, Less, Less than equal.

3.5 Data handling instructions – Move, Masked Move and Limit test.

3.6 Logical instructions – AND, OR, EX-OR, NOT.

3.7 PLC arithmetic function : Addition, Subtraction Multiplication, Division, Square root Negative, Average

10

228



3.8 Miscellaneous instructions – Sequencer instructions, scale with parameter, subroutine and PID instructions.

Unit-IV PLC Programming

4a. List out different types of PLC Programming languages.

4b. Describe general programming procedure

4c. List out different instructions

4d. State the basic concept of ladder

4e. State the rules of ladder diagram

4f. Develop the ladder diagram for simple examples like applications related to Timer, Counter, Comparison, Data handling, Logical & arithmetic

4.1 Different PLC programming languages (only introduction) - FBD, Instruction list, structured text, sequential function chart,

4.2 Basic concept of ladder, Rules of ladder

4.3 Simple programming examples using ladder programming language based on relay, timer, counter, logical, comparison, Data handling and miscellaneous instruction

12

Unit-V Applications of PLC

5a. Draw system diagram for given application

5b. Draw logical connection diagram for simple automation system

5c. Develop ladder diagram for simple automation system

5d. Connect input & output modules for simple automation system

5e. State the trouble shooting procedure for PLC system

5.1 System diagram, logic, I/O listing, ladder diagram’s of

Motor sequence control. Traffic light control. Elevator control. Tank level control. Reactor control. Conveyor system. Batch process Control Drum/Bottle Filling System

Stepper motor control. Speed Control of AC/ DC Motor

5.2 Trouble shooting of PLC

12

Unit-VI Introduction to DCS

6a. Explain concept of DCS 6b. Draw and describe

hierarchy of DCS. 6c. describe functions of each

level of DCS 6d. explain different system

elements of DCS 6e. state 5 Selection criteria

of DCS 6f. State Strengths and

limitations of DCS

6.1 Introduction to DCS, concept of DCS, hierarchy of DCS

6.2 DCS architecture, function of each level of DCS

6.3 Database organization in DCS 6.4 System elements of DCS

Field station

Intermediate station Central computer station

6.5 Selection criteria of DCS 6.6 Advantages & limitations of DCS 6.7 Applications of DCS

10

TOTAL 64


Unit No.



I Basics of Automation 04 04 04 12

229

Unit No.



II PLC Hardware 06 04 04 14

III I/O Addressing of PLC 06 04 04 14

IV PLC Programming 04 04 06 14

V Applications of PLC 04 04 06 14

VI Introduction to DCS 04 04 04 12

TOTAL 28 24 28 80





Sr. No.

Unit No.


Hours

1 I Identify continuous, discrete control and composite control system. 02

2 III Verify the functions of logic gates by using PLC 02

3 IV Develop & test Ladder program for Start stop logic using two inputs. 02

4 IV, V Develop & test Ladder program for push to start and push to stop. (Use single Push Button)

02

5 IV, V Develop & test Ladder program for blinking of LED’s. 02

6 IV, V Develop& verify ladder program for sequential ON-Off control of Lamps 02

7 V Develop & verify ladder program for sequential control of DC motors 02

8 V Develop ladder program for stepper motor. Verify its operation 02

9 V Simulate Timers for Traffic Control. verify its operation 02

10 IV, V Interface thermocouple/RTD as an analog sensor with PLC. verify its operation

02

11 IV, V Develop temperature On-Off control loop using PLC. verify its operation 02

12 III Use of sequencer instructions for stepper motor control. 02

13 IV, V Develop ladder program for automated parking system. verify its operation

02

14 IV Simulate PLC based conveyor system. verify its operation 02

15 IV Simulate PLC based Elevator system. verify its operation 02

16 VI Test the DCS functionality 02

TOTAL 32


Following is the list of proposed student activities like

1. Develop a small project using MULTISIM software 2. Collect the information related to sensors used for industrial automation system 3. Assemble PLC hardware on PLC trainer

230

4. Collect the specifications of different PLC used for industrial purpose 5. Develop ladder diagram for any one industrial application 6. Prepare & Present seminar on any one topic related to the course 7. Prepare a case study on industrial automation system


1. Arrange industrial visit to study industrial automation system 2. Expert lecture on automation system from person from industry 3. Show videos /power point presentation PLC basic, industrial automation system and DCS


A) Books


1 Introduction to Programmable logic control

Gary Dunning

Cenage Learning

2 Programmable logic controllers F.D. Petruzella Tata- McGraw-Hill, New Delhi (Third edition)

3 Programmable logic controllers John Hackworth and Federic Hackworth

Pearson education

4 Industrial automation and process control

Jon Stenerson Prentice Hall

5 Programmable logic controllers V. R. Jadhav Khanna Publishers, New Delhi

6 Distributed Computer Control for Industrial Automation

Popovic & Bhatkar

CRC Press, New Delhi,

7 Computer Based Industrial Control

Krishna Kant

PHI, New Delhi,


1. PLC simulator (freeware) 2. DCS simulator 3. MULTISIM

C) Learning Websites

1. www.control.com 2. www.plcs.net 3. http://plc-training 4. www.triplc.com 5. www.plcsimulator.net/ 6. http://www.automationdirect.com

D) Major Equipments/ Instruments with Broad Specifications

1. DCS Trainer Set-up or Simulation Software IEC 1131- 3 Compatible Software 2. PLC’s, sensors and Transmitters, PC server, Two work Stations 3. Programmable Logic controllers Trainer Set-up or Simulation Software from standard

vendors. 10.0 MAPPING MATRIX OF PO’S AND CO’S:

Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes


CO1 H M M M M

CO2 H M H H H M

CO3 H H H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

CO5 H H H H H H

CO6 H H H M


http://plc-training/

http://www.automationdirect.com/

231

Annexure : I

Rules for Registration and Examination

Important Rules of Registration for courses.

1. An eligible student must register to minimum three courses and maximum seven courses during each term.

2. While registering for a course at the beginning of a term, a student shouldn't have backlog of more than seven courses of any term as carried over due to failure or any other reason.

3. A student can register for a Project work only after acquiring minimum 100 credits.

4. A student will have to re - register for a course/s if he / she is detained from the course/s for any reason.

Important Rules regarding Registration for Examination

1. A student can register for examination of only those courses for which he has registered and kept term.

2. A student can register for examination for not more than 10 courses in one examination.

3. A student will have to re-register for examination of theory or Practical / oral of a course if he / she fails in examination.

4. A student will be allowed to re-register for examination in accordance with rules if he / she was eligible to appear for last Examination but he/ she failed to appear last examination for any reason.

5. A student will not be able to cancel his registration after he / she is Registered for examination

Other Important Rules

1. A candidate will be eligible for the award of diploma when he / she acquires the required number of credits for a Programme.

2. No candidate will be allowed to appear for examination of any course unless the Head of

the Department certifies that 2.1 Attended at least 75% of the prescribed lecture hours, tutorial hours, practical hours

or any other kind of work and or assignment for the course as the case may be in conformity with the provision laid down in the course contents.

2.2 Satisfactorily completed specified laboratory practical, term work prescribed in

curriculum for the course. 3. No candidate will be permitted to reappear to any course of any examination in which he

has once passed.

Standard of Passing

1. Theory, total of theory and periodic test, practical, oral and termwork examination shall be separate head of passing.

2. To pass examination of any course, a candidate must obtain a minimum of 40% marks in each head of passing prescribed for that course taken separately.

Periodic Test 1. Two periodic tests will be conducted during each term for the courses as per their

examination scheme.

2. Average marks of the two period tests will be considered for each course separately. 3. Reappearing for the periodic test for improvement of marks is not allowed.

232

Term Work 1. Term work is a document submitted by the candidate consisting of report of site / field visit

and / or laboratory work and / or drawing sheets / sketch books / jobs / model. Such term

work shall be submitted before the end of academic term and it shall be satisfactory in the opinion of concern faculty member, Head of the Department and Principal of Institute.

Grace Marks 1. Grace marks shall be applicable if the rules of “standards of passing” are fulfilled.

2. The grace of maximum three marks will be given in either in “Theory marks”, or “Periodic test” or “total of theory and periodic test marks”, if it falls short by maximum three marks to pass a course.

3. The grace of maximum three marks shall not be applicable twice for the same course. i.e. for “theory” and “total of theory and periodic test” of same course.

4. The grace marks are not applicable to practical, oral, term work examination.

Award of Class

First Class with Distinction : 70% or more

First Class : 60% and above but less than 70%

Second Class : 50 % and above but less than 60% Pass Class : 40% and above but less than 50 %

233

Annexure : II

Evaluation Scheme for Project

Term Work : Max. Marks : 50 Min. Marks : 20. Oral : Max. Marks : 50 Min. Marks : 20.

Progressive Assessment

Name of the student: Enrolment No.: Term : II / III ODD / EVEN

Programme: Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering Course : Project Code : 6412 Project Guide :

Title of Project :

SN

Pro

ject

Acti

vit

ies

Da

te /

We

ek

Le

ad

er

sh

ip

Un

de

rsta

nd

ing

Ob

se

rva

tio

n

&A

ccu

racy

Co

ntr

ibu

tio

n

Tim

ely

Co

mp

leti

on

To

tal

Sig

na

ture

of

Stu

de

nt

Sig

na

ture

of

Gu

ide

Sig

na

ture

of

HO

D

5

5

5

5

5

25

1 Formation of team & finalization

of project

1

2 Submission of synopsis : by each group

2

3 Project activity plan 3

4 Maintenance Project Diary 6

5 Visits to Industries / Institutions / Market

7

6 Collection of Data / Survey 9

7 Analysis and Presentation of

data.

10

8 Pre submission seminar 13

9 Presentation of Rough Work : hand written

14

10 Final Project Report : Submission 15

Total by Internal : out of 250

The Term Work : Convert the total given by internal to “out off 25”.

Signature of Project Guide Project assessment :

Term Work Oral

Internal External Total Internal External Total

25 25 50 25 25 50

234

Annexure : III

Committees

1. Governing Body (GB)

Sr.

No Name & Office Address

Governing Body

Designation

1. Shri. Pramod Naik

Joint Director, Directorate of Technical Education, M.S. Mumbai Chairman

2. Shri. Mahendra Kothari

Chairman, Maharashtra State Pipe & Allied Industry, D-5, MIDC

Satpur, Nashik.

Member

3. Shri. Ashok Katariya

Chairman, Ashoka Group of Companies, Ashoka House, Ashoka

Marg, Nashik.

Member

4. Dr. Ramesh Unnikrishnan

Regional Officer and Director,

Regional Office, (AICTE) Regional Office, Western Region,

Mumbai.

Member

5. Shri. B. S. Joshi

The Joint Director, Industries, Regional Office, Nashik Member

6. Shri. V. D. Patil

Coordinator, NITTR-Bhopal Extension Center, Pune. Member

7. Shri. S. P. Wagh

Chairman, Consumer Grievances Redressal M.S.E. Dist.Co.Ltd,

Nashik

Member

8. Shri. Kishor Patil

Institute Of Career & Skills, 3, Adgaonkar plaza basement, ABB

circle, Mahatma Nagar, Nashik-422007

Member

9. Shri. Harishankar Banerjee

President, NIMA, MIDC, Satpur, Nashik. Member

10. Shri. F. A. Khan

Principal, Govt. Polytechnic, Aurangabad. Member

11. Shri. Manish Kothari

Chairman, Institution of Engineers Nashik Local Centre, Nahik. Member

12. Prof. Dnyandeo P. Nathe

Principal, Government Polytechnic, Nashik Member Secretary

235

2. Board of Studies (BOS) Sr.

No.

Name & Office address BOS Designation

1 Shri. S. P. Wagh

Chairman, Consumer Grievances Redressal M.S.E. Dist.Co.Ltd, Nashik Chairman

2 Shri. Sunil Bhor

Project Management Consultant, 659/A wing second floor market,

Shopping complex Dindori Road, Nashik.

Member

3 Shri. Bhalchandra R. Patwardhan

Plot No.24, Atharva Raw House, Bhavik Nagar, Gangapur Road,

Nashik-13.

Member

4 Shri. Kishor T. Patil

Institute Of Career & Skills, 3, Adgaonkar plaza basement, ABB circle,

Mahatma Nagar, Nashik-422007

Member

5 Shri. Kishor Vyas

Digilog System Pvt. Ltd., 15, Shriram sankul, Opp. Hotel Panchavati,

Vakilwadi, Nashik.

Member

6 Shri. Chandrashekhar. B. Dahale

F1, Computer Service, No. 2, Sukhraj, Near Parijatnagar bus

stop,Nashik 422005

Member

7 Shri. M. M. Dube

Sr. Executive, Systems, M & Q, C-1, MIDC, Ambad, Nashik-10 Member

8 Shri. Anant Tagare

Principal Engineer, Validation,

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd., R & D Centre, 89, MIDC, Satpur, Nashik-

422007

Member

9 Shri. Aaush Potdar

Director, Poddar Clothing Industries, Nashik. Member

10 Shri. Vijay Sanap

Architect & Consultant, Soham Constructions, Nashik. Member

11 Shri. Pramod U. Wayse

Deputy Secretary (T), MSBTE, Regional Office, Osmanpura,

Aurangabad-431005.

Member

12 Shri. P. T. Kadve

Principal, K.K. Wagh Polytechnic, Nashik. Member

13 Shri. R. N. Vaidya

HOD, Civil Engg., Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik. Member

14 Shri. S. R. Deshkukh

HOD, Civil Engg (II Shift), Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik Member

15 Dr. C. Y. Seemikeri

HOD, Mechanical Engg., Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik. Member

16 Dr. Sanjay Ingole

HOD, Mechanical Engg (II Shift), Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik Member

17 Shri. J. B. Modak

I/C, HOD, Plastic Engg., Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik. Member

18 Shri. L. S. Patil

I/C, HOD, Electrical Engg., Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik.

Member

236

Sr.

No.

Name & Office address BOS Designation

19 Shri. Yogesh Sanap

I/C, HOD, Information Technology. & Computer. Technology, Govt.

Polytechnic, Nashik.

Member

20 Shri. A. S. Laturkar

HOD, Electronics and Telecommunication Engg., Govt. Polytechnic,

Nashik.

Member

21 Dr. S. D. Pable

HOD, Electronics and Telecommunication Engg (II Shift), Govt.

Polytechnic, Nashik

Member

22 Shri. T. G. Chavan

I/C, HOD Automobile Engg., Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik. Member

23 Ms. T. J. Mithari

I/C, HOD, Dress Design & Garment Manufacturing, Govt. Polytechnic,

Nashik

Member

24 Ms. N. P. Adke

I/C,HOD, Interior Design & Decoration, Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik Member

25 Shri. V. H. Chaudhari

I/C, Training & Placement Officer, Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik Member

26 Shri. G. G. Wankhede

Controller of Examination, Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik. Member

27 Shri. S. P. Dikshit

Lecturer in Civil Engg., I/C CDC, Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik Member Secretary

237

3. Programme wise committee(PWC)

Sr.

No.

Name & Office address PWC Designation

1 Shri. A. S. Laturkar

HOD, Electronics & Telecommunication Engg. Dept.,

Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik.

Chairman

2. Dr. S. D. Pable

H.O.D. Electronics &Telecommunication Engg. Dept. (second shift),

Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik.

Member

3 Shri. Anand Gharpure

SONIC Multitech Pvt. Ltd., Nashik.

Member

4 Shri. Prashant Suryavanshi

Surya Technologies, G16, Ujjwal Terraces, Dhayari, Pune - 51

Member

5 Shri. B. L. Kulkarni

H.O.D. E & TC Dept., Amrutvahini Polytechnic, Sangamner

Member

6 Shri. M. R. Patil

Lecturer in Electronics Engg., Govt. Polytechnic Nashik

Member

7 Dr. J. G. Joshi

Lecturer in Electronics Engg., Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik

Member

8 Shri. Pramod U. Wayse

Deputy Secretary (T), MSBTE, Regional Office, Osmanpura, Aurangabad-

431005.

Member

9 Shri. S. P. Dikshit

Lecturer, Civil Engg. Dept., Incharge CDC, Govt. Polytechnic, Nashik.

Member secretary

238

4. PROGRAMME CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT COMMITTEE

Institute Level Curriculum Development Cell

Sr.

No.

Name of the

Faculty

Designation

1 Prof. D. P. Nathe Principal, Government Polytechnic, Nashik

2 Shri. R. N. Vaidya Head of Civil Engineering Department and Academic co-ordinator,

Government Polytechnic Nashik

3 Shri. S. P. Dikshit CDC Incharge, Lecturer in Civil Engineering, Government Polytechnic,

Nashik

4 Dr. N. L. Patil Lecturer in Civil Engineering, Government Polytechnic, Nashik.

5 Dr. S. V. Bhangale Lecturer in Electrical Engineering, Government Polytechnic, Nashik.

6 Dr. S. J. Gorane Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering, Government Polytechnic, Nashik.

7 Shri. N. N. Thakare Lecturer in Plastic Engineering, Government Polytechnic, Nashik.

Department Level Committee

Sr.

No.

Name of the Faculty Designation

1 Shri. A. S. Laturkar H.O.D. Electronics & Telecommunication Engg., Dept., Government

Polytechnic Nashik

2 Shri. S. S. Prabhune Lecturer in Electronics Engg., Government Polytechnic Nashik

3 Dr. J. G. Joshi Lecturer in Electronics Engg., Government Polytechnic, Nashik.

4 Shri. B. M. Chaudhari Lecturer in Electronics Engg., Government Polytechnic, Nashik

5 Shri. V.S. Thakare Lecturer in Electronics Engg., Government Polytechnic, Nashik.

NITTTR, Bhopal Committee

Sr.

No.

Name of the

Faculty

Designation

1 Prof. R. G. Chouksey Dean Student Welfare, Department of Vocational Education and

Entrepreneurship Development, NITTTR, Bhopal.

2 Dr. Nishith Dubey Professor, Department of Vocational Education and Entrepreneurship

Development, NITTTR, Bhopal.

239

5. Contributors to Course Curriculum Development

Sr.

No.


1 Dr. A. R. Thete Consultant. Director Center For Development of Leadership in

Education Pvt. Ltd. Aurangabad.

Sr.

No.


2 Electronics & Telecommunication Engineering Department, Government

Polytechnic Nashik

Shri. A. S. Laturkar H.O.D. Electronics & Telecommunication Engg. Dept.

Shri. M. R. Patil I/C H.O.D. Electronics & Telecommunication Engg. Dept.

(second shift)

Shri. S. S. Prabhune Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Dr. J. G. Joshi Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Mrs. M. M. Shinde Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Mrs. V. B. Patil Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Shri. V. P. Tayade Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Shri. M. V. Patil Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Shri. P. D. Deshpande Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Shri. V. S. Thakare Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Shri. M. D. Raut Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Mrs. S. S. Chaudhari Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Shri. D. B. Borude Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

Shri. B. M. Chaudhari Lecturer in Electronics Engineering

3 Applied Mechanics Department, Government Polytechnic Nashik

Shri. R. G. Sonone Co-ordinator and Lecturer in Applied Mechanics

Shri. S. P. Pagare Lecturer in Applied Mechanics

Shri. V. R. Gaikwad Lecturer in Applied Mechanics

4 Civil Engineering Department, Government Polytechnic Nashik

Dr. S. S. Pathak Lecturer in Civil Engineering

4 Mechanical Engineering Department, Government Polytechnic Nashik

Shri. S. P. Muley I/C Head of Department

Shri. R. V. Rupavate I/C Head of Department (second shift)

Shri. S. D. Sanap Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering

Dr. S. G. Gorane Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering

Shri. P. S. Kulkarni Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering

Shri. K. A. Jagtap Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering

Shri. Y. S. Kokate Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering

Shri. A. G. Waghulde Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering

Other Departments, Government Polytechnic Nashik

5

Shri. P. G. Kochure Workshop Superintendent

Dr. K. V. Nemade Controller of Examination, Lecturer in Automobile Engineering

Dr. S. V. Bhangale Lecturer in, Electrical Engineering

240

Sr.

No.


6 Science and Humanities Department, Government Polytechnic Nashik

Shri. S. M. Shinde Lecturer in Mathematics

Mrs. A. S. Salunkhe Lecturer in Mathematics

Shri. C. N. Pagare Lecturer in Chemistry

Shri. S. A. Padwal Lecturer in Physics

Shri. R. P. Landage Lecturer in English

Mrs. A. N. Patil Lecturer in Chemistry

Mrs. Y. S. Patil Lecturer in Physics

Mrs. P. S. Joshi Lecturer in English

Mrs. K. S. Shinde Lecturer in Chemistry

Dr. Mrs. K. D. Talele Lecturer in Physics

Certificate

The curriculum of the programme has been revised in the year 2016, as per the

provision made in curriculum development process of

Government Polytechnic, Nashik. This is the outcome based Curriculum of

Diploma in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering programme,

which shall be implemented from academic year 2016-17.

Verified by

Department Level CDC Representative Government Polytechnic, Nashik

Head of Department

Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

Government Polytechnic, Nashik

Incharge, Curriculum Development Cell Government Polytechnic, Nashik.

Principal

Government Polytechnic, Nashik.

GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC NASHIK · 20.2 6553 CSP Control System and PLC 178 ... Communication and...

Documents

Transcript of GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC NASHIK · 20.2 6553 CSP Control System and PLC 178 ... Communication and...